Home

L-PRO 4000 Manual - ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd.

1. Toxi I Ble gdt Window Help slal x Dy tel B GA 9 E0 identification Point Change Event Class Deadband Reported a Relay Group Index Name none 1 2 3 Deadband Units Seale Units C Analog Inputs na 41 Edemalinnt 16 C X 1m a External Inputs 1 2 42 Bternalinpt 17 O X O0 C Output Contacts 12 4 Externalinput 18 OX OTO C Virtual Inputs 1 2 4 External Input 19 7 O C Seting Groups 12 45 Externalinput 20 X O0 C System Parameters SCADA Communication Analog Inputs EC DNP Configuration 332 0 Line Va Magnitude O O X 2 of nominal 10 1 KY C Point Map 30 32 1 Line Va Angle pimai 5 degrees oa degrees ia Cass Data 30 32 2 Line Vb Magnitude xX 2 9 of nominal 0 1 KV C SCADA Settings Summary 332 3 Line Vb Angie TEETE tig 5 degrees 01 degrees O Record Length 30 32 4 Line Ve Magnitude C io of nominal 0 1 KV EC Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 30 32 5 Line Ve Angle ERNER 5 degrees 04 degrees C Line Parameters 30 32 6 Line la Magnitude of nominal 1 A C Scheme Selector 30 32 7 Line la Angle ails cei 5 degrees 04 degrees C Breaker Status 30 32 8 Line Ib Magnitude 1 1 of nominal 1 A C Directional Element 30 32 9 Une bb ange OTO Hist dela 5 degrees o4 degrees E 0 Protection Functions 30 32 10 Line le Magnitude J O X of n
2. S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP YES S7 GetAllDataValues TP M YES Table N 7 Data Clause 10 S8 GetDataValues TP M YES S9 SetDataValues TP O YES S10 GetDataDirectory TP M YES S11 GetDataDefinition TP M YES Table N 8 Data Set Clause 11 S12 GetDataSetValues TP M YES S13 SetDataSetValues TP O NO S14 CreateDataSet TP O NO S15 DeleteDataSet TP O NO S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP O YES Table N 9 Substitution Clause 12 S17 SetDataValues TP M YES Table N 10 Setting group control Clause 13 S18 SelectActive SG TP O NO S19 SelectEdit SG TP O NO S20 SetSGvalues TP O NO S21 ConfirmEditSGvalues TP O NO S22 GetSGvalues TP O NO S23 GetSGCBvalues TP O NO L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Table N 11 Reporting Clause 14 Buffered report control block BRCB 24 Report TP c6 YES 824 1 Data change dchg YES 824 2 qchg change qchg NO 824 3 Data update dupd NO 25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 YES S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 YES Unbuffered report control block URCB S27 Report TP c6 YES 27 1 Data change dchg YES 27 2 qchg change qchg NO 27 3 Data update dupd NO 28 GetURCBValues TP c6 YES S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 YES c6 shall declare support for at least one BRCB or URCB Table N
3. Channel Address Units Scale Line Va Angle 40258 Degrees 10 Line Vb Magnitude 40259 kV 10 Line Vb Angle 40260 Degrees 10 Line Vc Magnitude 40261 kV 10 Line Vc Angle 40262 Degrees 10 Line la Magnitude 40263 A 1 Line la Angle 40264 Degrees 10 Line Ib Magnitude 40265 A 1 Line Ib Angle 40266 Degrees 10 Line Ic Magnitude 40267 A 1 Line Ic Angle 40268 Degrees 10 12a Magnitude 40269 A 1 I2a Angle 40270 Degrees 10 2b Magnitude 40271 A 1 12b Angle 40272 Degrees 10 2c Magnitude 40273 A 1 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Channel Address Units Scale 12c Angle 40274 Degrees 10 13a Magnitude 40275 A 1 I3a Angle 40276 Degrees 10 3b Magnitude 40277 A 1 I3b Angle 40278 Degrees 10 3c Magnitude 40279 A 1 3c Angle 40280 Degrees 10 4a Magnitude 40281 A 1 I4a Angle 40282 Degrees 10 4b Magnitude 40283 A 1 14b Angle 40284 Degrees 10 4c Magnitude 40285 A 1 4c Angle 40286 Degrees 10 Bus Va Magnitude 40287 kV 10 Bus Va Angle 40288 Degrees 10 Bus Vb Magnitude 40289 kV 10 Bus Vb Angle 40290 Degrees 10 Bus Vc Magnitude 40291 kV 10 Bus Vc Angle 40292 Degrees 10 Not used 40293 Not used 40294 Not used 40295 Not used 40296 Not used 40297 No
4. Group Logic 5 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 6 Group Logic 6 Group Logic 6 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 7 Group Logic 7 Group Logic 7 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 8 Group Logic 8 Group Logic 8 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt
5. Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix C Hardware Description The relay is a complete line distance protection relay package designed and manufactured with high quality features and recording components The fol lowing information describes the main hardware components of the relay Main Processor The MPB has two processor sub systems which control the operation of the en Board MPB tire relay the DSP processor and the control processor The DSP sub system interfaces to the RAIB the DIB and the OCB and manages the protection fea tures of the relay The control processor manages the user interface and system control features of the relay Both subsystems operate independently of each other and will continue to function even if the other sub system fails The MPB provides the following functionality DSP processor subsystem which interfaces to the RAIB the DIB and the OCB and manages the protection features of the relay with The floating point DSP to provide fast capture and manipulation of data e RAM and reprogrammable non volatile Flash memory Allows oper ation independent of the control processor and supports
6. Va Ring Filter gt Sequence Ve Ring Filter m Component gt Vpos_mem Filter S 2 V gt Ring Filter Ay N c 8 H lt oma gt gt Vpolarizing Sequence z gt Component Vpos Filter Figure 4 7 Polarizing Voltage Fault Ring Filter Memory Voltage Figure 4 8 Effect of the Ring Filter The ring filter is designed to adjust the center of the frequency response to ac count for small variations of the power system frequency When the measured voltage drops below 0 5 V ec the ring filter explicitly uses the nominal system frequency as the center point of the bandpass filter During this condition or when the system frequency varies widely or rapidly as during out of step con ditions the ring filter could provide an incorrect output During these condi tions the 21P and 21N Mho Quad elements use the positive sequence voltage derived from the system voltage directly from the line VTs until the voltage output of the ring filter is correct If the measured positive sequence voltage is below 1 Vsec then the Mho Quad elements use the positive sequence voltage derived from the memory voltage L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 9 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Directional Element 4 10 The relay includes a directional element that directly supervises the Zone 1 to Zone 5 phase and ground distance elements The directional element considers
7. ProLogic 18 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 19 ProLogic 19 ProLogic 19 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 20 ProLogic 20 ProLogic 20 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 21 ProLogic 21 ProLogic 21 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4
8. 100BASE T FX 100BASE T FX Modem 4000BASE TXLX 1000BASE TXLX RIG B NO Taput ae 1A SA 50Hz 60Hz Main AC Orman Aux AC Line omni AC Current Inputs Record Only Aux AC Volts T en AC Volts A AGB ALG TAG 12A AY 12B AIG126 FI ee eee ie VB VC N VA VB VC N HOCOCQOOCCCOOMOOOOANCAAA be SEEE o mes oa sos me mor soe mo mo mO a O ms me n7 me ms moo mo mo m ma a On w 7 Ports 100 117 9 External Programmable Inputs 8 Ports 200 201 Relay inoperative contact Ports 202 229 14 programmable output contacts Ports 230 235 Unused 9 Port 118 Internal modem 10 Port 119 120 100BASE T or 100BASE FX Ethernet Ports 11 Port 121 External clock IRIG B modulated or unmodulated 12 Port 122 SCADA 13 Port 123 Direct Modem RS 232 Port 14 Ports 324 327 330 333 AC voltage inputs 15 Ports 300 323 AC current inputs 16 Ports 230 235 328 329 334 335 Unused 17 Ports 336 337 Power su
9. Enumerated type Mod Description Mode Ordinal Semantic 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Enumerated type Health Description Health Ordinal Semantic 1 Ok 2 Warning 3 Alarm Enumerated type PhyHealth Description Health Ordinal Semantic 1 Ok 2 Warning 3 Alarm D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 53 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Enumerated type dirGeneral Description Direction Ordinal Semantic 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Enumerated type dirPhs Description Direction Ordinal Semantic 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward Enumerated type ctlModel Description Control Model Ordinal Semantic 0 status only 1 direct with normal security 2 sbo with normal security 3 direct with enhanced security 4 sbo with enhanced security Appendix N 54 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Enumerated type orCat Description Originator Category Ordinal Semantic 0 not supported 1 bay control 2 station control 3 remote control 4 Automatic bay 5 Automatic station 6 automatic remote 7 maintenance 8 process Enumerated type seqT Description Originator Category Ordinal Semantic 0 pos neg zero 1 dir quad zero D02706R02 50 L
10. Table N 15 control 17 5 1 51 Select TP O NO 52 Select with value TP O NO S53 Cancel TP O NO 54 Operate TP M NO S55 Command Termination TP O NO S56 Time Activated Operate TP O NO V Table N 16 File Transfer Clause 20 S57 GetFile TP M YES S58 SetFile TP O YES S59 DeleteFile TP O YES S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP M YES Table N 17 Time 5 5 T1 Time resolution of Internal clock 10 1 msec Nearest negative power of 2 in sec onds T2 TimeAccuracy of Internal clock 10 1 msec TO T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T3 Supported Time Stamp resolu 10 1 msec Nearest value of 2 tion n in seconds accord ing to 5 5 3 7 3 3 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 7 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation N 2 Model Implementation Conformance Statement MICS Appendix N 8 Introduction This specification is the Model Implementation Conformance Statement MICS and presents the top level IEC 61850 data model that has been imple mented The definitions of all used Logical Nodes and their associated Com mon Data Classes components and associated enumerated values are also included for completeness The reader is expected to be conversant with the terminology presented within the IEC 61850 part 7 series of specifications Objective To provide comprehensive details of the standard data object model elements supported by the device
11. Appendix F 30 L PRO 4000 User Manual DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var rare Function Codes PA Function Codes RA Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 2 0 Binary Input Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 2 2 Binary Input Event With absolute 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With relative 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 10 2 Binary Output Output Status with 1 read 06 no range or
12. I Enabled Number of Shots 1 Ei Recloser Mode Main then Aux First Reclose T1 10 0 Block Reset TOB 05 s Second Reclose Tz 50 s Follower Time TF 5 0 g Third Reclose T3 10 0 Breaker Out of Service TC 50 0 Fourth Reclose T4 20 0 3 Follower Sequencer Switch Close Time Tp Di s Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF Lockout Reset TD 30 0 g Close after the Recloser Reset Time TD Initiate Reset TOI 1 0 s Enable Syne Control Figure L 16 79 Recloser Setting the recloser is all done in one screen In our example we are using one shot with an open interval of 10 seconds T1 for the Main circuit breaker and a follow interval of 5 seconds TF for the aux iliary circuit breaker This means that 10 seconds after both breakers open the main breaker will attempt to reclose and 5 seconds after the main breaker has closed the auxiliary breaker will attempt to close The main and auxiliary close signal time is set to last for 0 5 seconds TP When the recloser receives an initiation signal that signal will stay high for an additional time of 1 0 seconds which allows the recloser to seal in TDI We are not using sync control is this example If sync control was necessary the user only has to enable sync control and then set the appropriate settings in the 25 27 59 screen For example if Dead Main Dead Auxiliary was selected the recloser would be blocked unless both main and auxiliary voltages a
13. Identification C DNP Configuration y C SCADA Settings Summary Settings Version 404 C Record Length J Ignore Serial Number HC Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Serial Number LPRO 4000 oo0000 o1 Refer tothe serial number C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 an on the back of the relay C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 1 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Nominal CT Sec Current 14 1 L Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Nominal System Frequency Eaka C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Optional I O Not installed Network Card Installed Standard I O 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts v X Comments Comments Software Setting Setting Name Default Settings Date Created Modified por 2 10 29 10 01 03 Station Station Name Station Name Station Number 1 Location Location Line D245 L PRO Offliner Settings v404 Figure 7 3 Identification Serial Number Screen Save the file Connect to the relay in Service or Change mode via the relay front port Port 150 using the Relay Control Panel From the Main Menu double click on Configuration N From the Configuration submenu select Import Browse to the converted acceptance test file and click on Open Select the file under Saved Settings list and click on the Load to JED button on the rig
14. 21N Zone 3 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 15 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Ip Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 4 21N Zone 4 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 2 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 5 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 5 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Ip Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 5 21N Zone 5 Disabled Appendix B 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 20 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Ip Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 68 Power Swing Block Trip Mode Off Zone 1 Blocking Disabled Zone 2 Blocking Disabl
15. Print Print active document Prints Graphs or the setting summary depending on which seen is selected About Display program information Displays the Offliner version L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 3 Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts Graphing Protection Functions D02706R02 50 The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts that Offliner provides Table 6 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Ctri N Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version Ctrl O Open an existing setting file Ctrl S Saves the active setting file Ctrl Z Undo Ctrl X Cut Ctrl C Copy Ctrl V Paste Ctrl F4 Closes the active Offliner setting document Ctrl F6 Switches to the next open Offliner setting file if more than one setting file is being edited F6 Toggles between the LHS Tree view and HRS screen F10 Alt Enables menu keyboard short cuts F1 Displays the user manual Grid On Grid Off The graph can be viewed with the grid on or off by clicking the Grid On or Grid Off button A right click on the trace of the curve gives the user the x and y coordinates Refresh This button will manually refresh the graph if it has been zoomed Print Graph To print a particular graph click the Print Graph button Zoom on Graphs Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display Left click on any graph and drag to form a smal
16. Weak Infeed Enable Disable Device 27 V1 Pickup 0 0 to 69 0 V secondary Device 59 3V0 Pickup 0 0 to 100 0 V secondary Zone 2 Zone 4 Reset Delay TWD1 0 02 to 0 20 seconds Communication Cycle Reset Delay 0 02 to 0 20 seconds TWD2 Communication Reset Time Delay 0 02 to 1 0 seconds TW3 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 23 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 25 27 59 Sync Check 4 24 The relay can bring in voltages from both line and bus PTs The Line Sync Check function if enabled looks at the voltage steady state angle between the line and bus PT voltage If this angle is within a plus minus specified value 1 to 50 degree magnitude range of setting available the function enables a definite time delay pickup user selectable 0 to 10 seconds after which time an output is produced The line sync reference voltage is taken from a bus source The relay can bring one single phase to neutral voltage Logic within the relay allows the single phase quantity to be either A B or C phase All unused single phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation The Dead Main Live Auxiliary DMLA Live Main Dead Auxiliary LMDA and Dead Main Dead Auxiliary DMDA logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive sequence secondary voltages to determine the Sync Check condition The voltage is fixed at 20 V secondary voltages below 20 V are declared a dead state and voltages above 20 V
17. n t on the back of the relay Identification Settings Version 404 D02706R02 50 SCADA Communication C DNP Configuration Unit 1 Nominal CT Sec Current UntiD 5a v Point Map Nominal System Frequency 60Hz v C Class Data E SO SCADA Settings Summary Standard 1 0 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts C Record Length Optional I O Not installed C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Line Parameters C Scheme Selector C Breaker Status C Directional Element Protection Functions Z Circle Trigger ProLogic C Group Logic T Output Matrix C Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 C Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 C Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Petting Group 8 L PRO Offliner Network Carat Comments Software Setting Setting Name Date CreatedMosified Station Station Name Station Number Location Line Settings v404 Installed Comments Defaut Settings iS 2012 10 23 10 01 03 Station Name 1 Location D245 Setting Tree Setting Area Figure 6 1 Opening Screen L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 2 Offliner Features Menu and The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar Top Toolbar Tool Bar on page 6 2 de
18. LOW LOW LOW Low LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW Low LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW 21P Zone 2 D21P Zone 5 21N Zone 1 21N Zone 4 Z Circle 46 51 Dist Scheme 21P Zone 2 A 21P Zone 5 A 21N Zone 4 A 51N Al Inner Blinder A 59 Main 50BF 2 Main 79 3Ph Main Rec 79 1PhA Aux Rec 79 1PhC Main Rec Trip Trip Trip Trip Trig Trip Trip arm arm arm arm 79 3Ph Initiated m ON 25 27 59 Sync Check Trip ose 50BF Initiate ose ose 79 1Ph Follow Lockout Single Ph Open Timeout 3 to 1 or 1 to 3Ph Faults a a LOW LOW LOW LOW Low LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW ow 21P Zone 3 Trip 51 Trip 21N Zone 2 Trip 21N Zone 5 Trip 51N Trip 46 50 Trip Dist Scheme Send 21P Zone 3 Alarm 21N Zone 2 Alarm 21N Zone 5 Alarm 46 51 Alarm 79 3Ph Blocked 27 Main UV 59 Aux OV SOLS Aux 50BF 1 Aux Trip 79 3Ph Aux Reclose 79 3Ph Follow Lockout 79 1PhB Main Reclose 79 1PhC Aux Reclose 79 1Ph Initiate Multiple 1Ph Faults DEF Scheme Trip IRIG B Signal Loss TATE TDN Aros A line A Extemal Logic 1 A logic 2 A Prologic J Outputs Grouplagic J Vital J Metering O Main Menu Metering Relay Control Panel v0 3 P0164 BPRO MB E Relay Control Panel Metering File Help Current Relay LPRO USBLPRO Zoom Level 150 v Freeze Close Con
19. Check the option No not this time In the window This wizard helps you install software for ERLPhase 4000 Series Device What do you want the wizard to do Check the option Install from a list or specific location Advanced In the window Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 3 2 Setup and Communications Uncheck the option Search removable media floppy CD ROM Check the option Include this location in the search Browse for the following folder C WINDOWS tiinst TUSB3410 In the window Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware ERLPhase 4000 Series Device has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP or Windows can t verify the publisher Hit Continue Anyway In the window Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for ERLPhase 4000 Series Device Hit Finish To verify the installation was successful and to which comm port is the ERL Phase 4000 Series Device configured do the following In Windows XP Start gt Control Panel gt Performance and Maintenance gt System gt Hard ware gt Device Manager gt Ports or if using Control Panel s Classic View Start gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardwa
20. Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 8 ProLogic 8 ProLogic 8 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused
21. D02706R02 50 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Read Input Status Function Code 02 Virtual Input 1 10513 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 2 10514 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 3 10515 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 4 10516 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 5 10517 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 6 10518 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 7 10519 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 8 10520 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 9 10521 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 10 10522 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 11 10523 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 12 10524 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 13 10525 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 14 10526 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 15 10527 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 16 10528 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 17 10529 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 18 10530 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 19 10531 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 20 10532 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 21 10533 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 22 10534 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 23 10535 0 Off inactive On active
22. Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA 0 Exit HeD ARON port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 10 Connected 0 00 33 WT100 TCP IP Figure 2 6 Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu Commands 1 4 5 6 and 7 are Port 150 access only Commands Table 2 2 Maintenance Menu Commands Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP addresses network mask default gateway and IEC61850 network port assignment View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log Retrieve system diagnos Automatically packages up the internal status log plus setting tics and setup information and downloads it in compressed form to the computer This file can then be sent to our customer support to help diagnose a problem Restore settings com Use these commands to force the system back to default mands 4 5 and 6 values if a problem is suspected due to the unit s settings calibration and or setup parameters Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset Note that the communication link is immediately lost and cannot be reestablished until the unit completes its start up Network utilities Enters network utilities sub menu Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 11 2 Setup and Communications 2 10 Firmware 2 12 Table 2 3 Network Utilities Menu Commands View protoco
23. Ipos lt 4 of Nominal Current 50 Figure 4 14 Line Energization Supervision Logic Note Vpos is the present positive sequence voltage VposOld is the positive sequence voltage at two cycles before The Logic shown in Line Energization Supervision Logic on page 4 20 has been introduced in order to prevent potentially erroneous operations of the 21 upon energizing of T tapped transmission lines that have transformers connect ed and the PT connected on the line side of the breaker This logic does not re quire any user setting In this logic the present positive sequence voltage is compared with the posi tive sequence voltage of 2 cycles previously In an energization situation the VposOld would be near zero V and the present Vpos would be approximately the nominal As time goes by the old Vpos gets updated with the nominal volt age and would eventually equal the present When it gets within 10 V second ary the top input to the AND gate would reset go to zero and reset the blocking function The second input is the previous 2 cycle positive sequence voltage and has an undervoltage setting of 30 V This input goes high to block the distance relays only if the positive sequence voltage from 2 cycles back was less than 30 V approximately 50 nominal so for a line that has been previously energized and now experiences a fault no distance relay blocking takes place The third input the bottom one produ
24. 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz To protect against a possible short circuit in the supply use an inline fuse or circuit breaker with a 5 A rating En sure that the chassis is grounded for proper operation and safety There are no power switches on the relay When the power supply is connect ed the relay starts its initialization process See Using the IED Getting Start ed on page 3 1 for the start up process details Ground the relay to the station ground using the case grounding terminal at the back of the relay for details see Figure 1 5 L PRO Relay Rear View 4U on page 1 5 WARNING Ground the relay to station ground using the case grounding terminal at the back of the relay for details see Figure 1 5 L PRO Relay Rear View 4U on page 1 5 L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 1 2 Setup and Communications 2 3 Time Sources The L PRO 4000 Line Protection relay supports the use of modulated or un modulated IRIG B time signals external primary secondary SNTP network based time synchronization external and manually configurable system time based on a free running internal oscillator The internal free running oscillator is always present on the IED and in the absence of any external time source will become the default mode of time synchronization An externally applied IRIG B time source will have the highest order of pre cedence and will typically offer the highest available time accuracy exceed ing 1 us aft
25. 303 3 15 A Z 120 Ph C 303 304 3 15 A 7 120 Observe 68 OutBlinder Alarm Low Contact 12 Open 4 Simultaneously increase ramp up 3 phase currents At 3 72 to 4 10 A expect 3 91A 68 OutBlinder Alarm High Contact 12 Closed End of 68 Outer test 68 Inner Left Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 68 InnBlinder Alarm Output Contact 13 with an ohmmeter 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 7 120 Ph N 333 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 31 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Change Setting Group 7 32 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 3 15 A 180 from voltages to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 3 15 A 2180 Ph B 302 303 3 15 A 2 60 Ph C 304 305 3 15 A 2 60 Observe 68 InnBlinder Alarm Low Contact 13 Open 4 Simultaneously increase ramp up 3 phase currents At 4 86 to 5 36 A expect 5 11 A 68 InnBlinder Alarm High Contact 13 Closed Testing the 68 Swing Timer Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 2 204 205 2 Test at impedance between Inner and Outer Right Blinders 15 Q 20 3 Set timer to start from 3 phase current transition i e current off to on 4 Apply keep on balanced 3 phase voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331
26. Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Ind14 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind15 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind16 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind17 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind18 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind19 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind20 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind21 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind22 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind23 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind24 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind25 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind26 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind27 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind28 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind29 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind30 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Logical Node RDRE1 Description Disturbance recorder function LN Class RDRE Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate RedTrg SPC_2_RcdTrg Trigger recorder RcdMade SPS_1_Proxy Recording made FitNum INS_1_IntIn Fault Number RedStr SPS_1_Proxy Recording started D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 39
27. Configure the terminal program as described in Table 2 1 Terminal Program Setup and link it to the appropriate serial port modem or TCP IP socket on the computer Table 2 1 Terminal Program Setup Baud rate Default fixed baud rate 115 200 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware or Software Hardware flow control is recommended The relay automatically sup ports both on all its serial ports Function arrow Terminal keys and control keys Emulation VT100 Font Use a font that supports line drawing e g Terminal or MS Line Draw If the menu appears outlined in odd characters the font selected is not supporting line drawing characters To configure HyperTerminal follow these instructions In Windows 7 open HyperTerminal PE in Windows XP go to Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTerminal If Default Telnet Program windows pops up Check Don t ask me this question again Hit No First time use of HyperTerminal will ask for Location Information Fill with appropriate information e g What country region are you in now Choose Canada L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 9 2 Setup and Communications 2 10 What area code or city code are you are in now Enter 306 If you need to specify a carrier code what is it Enter i e leave blank
28. D68B3RPSB4 ST BlkZn stVal 68 Zone 3 block D68B4RPSB5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B4RPSBS Data Name Description D68B4RPSB5 ST Str general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B4RPSB5 ST Str dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction set to unknown D68B4RPSB5 ST BlkZn stVal 68 Zone 4 block D68B5RPSB6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B5RPSB6 Data Name Description D68B5RPSB6 ST Str general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B5RPSB6 ST Str dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction set to unknown D68B5RPSB6 ST BlkZn stVal 68 Zone 5 block D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 95 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D79MRREC1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D79MRREC1 Data Name Description D79MRREC1 ST Auto stVal 79 Main Reclose D79MRREC1 ST Op general 79 Main Reclose D79MRREC1 ST AutoRecSt stVal 79 Main Reclose status change D79ARREC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D79ARREC2 Data Name Description D79ARREC2 ST Auto stVal 79 Auxiliary Reclose D79ARREC2 ST Op general 79 Auxiliary Reclose D79ARREC2 ST AutoRecSt stVal 79 Auxiliary Reclose status change D81_1PFRC1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PFRC1 Data Name Description D81_1PFRC1 ST Str general 81 1 rate of change of frequ
29. Since B phase C phase actual minimum current required is equal to 3 2 20 7 16 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 2 Use the minimum test current to determine what voltage would be appro priate for this test V FaultMin 21 2x ITestMin From Equation 21 we can derive the formula 22 V FaultMin Zx2x ITestMin And using appropriate values the Minimum Fault Voltage is V raultMin 7382 x2 x 1 6A 23 6V 23 where V FaultMin Minimum Fault Voltage ITestmin Minimum Fault Test Current L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 17 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 3 Now determine the 3 phase voltage phasors Only B C fault is shown here but the same principle applies for A B or C A faults Since neutral is not involved in this type of fault the faulted voltage phasors collapse toward each other along the phase to phase line 7X HEALTHY p VOLTS v i 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I I l 1 si i I I i I 1 1 I I I FAULT VOLTS 1 1 Mw c 120 deg Figure 7 12 Phasor Representation of an Ideal Phase to Phase Fault The following tables show the voltages to inject for a variety of fault voltage levels using 115 V secondary phase to phase nominal 66 4 V phase to neutral nominal A B Fault Table 7 14 A B Fault Voltage Injections C phase voltage
30. D21P3RFLO3 MX FitDiskm mag f D21P4RFLO4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P4RFLO4 21P3 fault distance Data Name Description D21P4RFLO4 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21P4 fault impedance magnitude D21P4RFLO4 MX FItZ cVal ang f 21P4 fault impedance angle D21P4RFLO4 MX FitDiskm mag f D21P5RFLOS This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P5RFLOS 21P4 fault distance Data Name Description D21P5RFLOS MX FitZ cVal mag f 21P5 fault impedance magnitude D21P5RFLOS5 MX FitZ cVal ang f 21P5 fault impedance angle D21P5RFLO5 MX FitDiskm mag f D21N1RFLO6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1RFLO6 21P5 fault distance Data Name Description D21N1RFLO6 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21N1 fault impedance magnitude D21N1RFLO6 MX FIitZ cVal ang f 21N1 fault impedance angle D21N1RFLO6 MX FitDiskm mag f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N1 fault distance D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D21N2RFLO7 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N2RFLO7 Data Name Description D21N2RFLO7 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21N2 fault impedance magnitude D21N2RFLO7 MX FitZ cVal ang f 21N2 fault impedance angle D21N2RFLO7 MX FitDiskm mag f D21N3RFLO8 21N2 fault distance This section defines l
31. Directional Directional non directional combined Forward and Reverse Pickup 0 50 to 150 00 A secondary 5A 0 10 to 30 00 A secondary 1A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 51 Enable Disable Directional Directional non directional combined Forward and Reverse Pickup 0 25 to 25 00 A secondary 5 A 0 05 to 5 00 A secondary 1 A Curve Type For details see Table 4 22 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 40 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 B 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 01 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 Directional Angle Setting Alpha 179 90 to 180 00 Beta 0 10 to 360 00 Phase Setting Multiplier for Single Phase Open Pole Condition 50 Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 50 Pickup Time Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 51 Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 51 Pickup Time Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50N 51N 67 Neutral overcurrent provides backup protection for line to ground faults The Neutral user can define directional or non directional control on either 50N or 51N Overcurrent functions 51N can also be configured for use in the communication scheme All the curve definitions are the same as the phase overcurrent except that this function uses 310 rather than phase current The equation is For 3 gt pickup r 7
32. Figure 7 29 Main Breaker Fail Logic 50BF 50BF and 50LS Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 50LS Main Output Contact 1 SOBF Main 1 Trip A Output Contact 2 SOBF Main 2 Trip A 2 Apply single phase current to the relay terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 0 8 A 3 Slowly ramp the current up at a rate of about 0 1 A per second At 0 9 to 1 1 A expect 1 0 A 50LS Main High 5 seconds later Output Contact 1 Closed SOBF Main 1 Trip After an additional 5 seconds Output Contact 2 Closed SOBF Main 2 Trip 4 Turn current off 50LS Main Low Contacts 1 and 2 Open 5 The same 50BF procedure may be followed on the auxiliary input by inject ing current into relay auxiliary current input Terminals 306 307 and mon itor Contacts 3 and 4 Testing Inputs 3 and 4 50LS Function Inputs 3 and 4 50LS functions are used in a Breaker Fail Application using Pro Logic The following screen shot shows the Logic being used to make a Breaker Fail application from the 50LS using ProLogic ProLogic 1 This boolean equation used to initiate and operate as a Breaker Fail for 52 3 Input 3 Current above the 50LS threshold arms one input of the D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 43 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 44 AND gate The initiate in this case is provided by Virtual Input 3 which will latch until the current drops below the 50LS threshold Note P
33. Not supported 1 1 13 Connections Supported Serial complete section 1 2 IP Networking complete section 1 3 Other explain Appendix F 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value ii eoufigurables list methods 1 2 1 Port Name Port 122 1 2 2 Serial Connection Asynchronous 8 Data Bits 1 Start Bit 1 Stop Not configured L PRO Offliner Parameters Bit No Parity for DNP 1 Other explain Asynchronous with selectable parity 1 2 3 Baud Rate Fixed at Not configured L PRO Offliner Configurable range to for DNP k Configurable selectable from 300 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 and 57600 Configurable other describe 1 2 4 Hardware Flow Control None Handshaking RS 232 V 24 V 28 Options Describe hardware sig Before Tx Asserts RTS naling requirements of DTR the interface Before Rx Asserts RTS Where a transmitter or DTR receiver is inhibited until Always Asserts k RTS a given control signal is K DTR asserted it is consid Before Tx Requires Asserted Deasserted ered to require that sig CTS nal prior to sending or DCD receiving characters DSR Where a signal is RI asserted prior to trans Rx Inactive mitting that signal will Before Rx Requires Asserted Deasserted be maintained active CTS until after the end of DCD transmission DSR Where a signal is RI asserted to enable Alw
34. Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 2 Group Logic 2 Group Logic 2 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 3 Group Logic 3 Group Logic 3 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 4 Group Logic 4 Group Logic 4 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 27 Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 5 Group Logic 5
35. V Enabled Name ProLogic 10 AND Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds 0 Dropout Delay 0 26 seconds 0 1 JV Target Enabled 1 jojojo l oj o Input A El 1 Selector 1 7 Input B PL 9 ProLogic 9 X Figure L 5 ProLogic 10 Group Logic 1 is used to switch to the new setting group there is no intentional delay Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 IV Enabled Name Group Logic 1 AND Setting Group to Activate fe 2 Setting Group 2 X Pickup Delay 0 seconds Input amp PL 10 ProLogic 10 yE Input B PL 8 Block Group Logic Out input El 4 43CS LocalRemote 7 jojojo lolo o o Figure L 6 Group Logic 1 Appendix L 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Using Three External Inputs to Toggle Setting Group D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Three external inputs connected to an 8 position selector switch The output contact is used to build a truth table to toggle between 8 setting groups In this example we connect EI 1 EI 2 and EI 3 to the selector switch output contacts eee Input States Setting Group to Activate EI 3 EI 2 El 1 1 0 0 0 Setting Group 1 2 0 0 1 Setting Group 2 3 0 1 0 Setting Group 3 4 0 1 1 Setting Group 4 5 1 0 0 Setting Group 5 6 1 0 1 Setting Group 6 7 1 1 0 Setting Group 7 8 1 1 1 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 1 8 Logic Statements The followin
36. on page 2 2 and Communication Port Details on page 2 15 The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the Ethernet LAN Both DNP over TCP and DNP over UDP are supported For details on connecting to the Ether net LAN see Network Link on page 2 5 Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in the Appendices for details see Modbus RTU Communication Protocol in Appendix E and DNP3 Device Profile in Appendix F To select the desired SCADA protocol go to L PRO 4000 Offliner SCADA communications section Select the protocol and set the corresponding param eters Port 122 s communication parameters are set in the L PRO 4000 Offliner SCADA communications section Both the baud rate and the parity bit can be configured The number of data bits and stop bits are determined automatically by the selected SCADA protocol Modbus ASCII uses 7 data bits Modbus RTU and DNP Serial use 8 data bits All protocols use stop bit except in the case where either Modbus protocol is used with no parity this uses 2 stop bits as defined in the Modbus standard Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing The utilities can be accessed through the Maintenance Menu Commands see Maintenance Menu Commands on page 2 11 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 13 Communication Port De
37. 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Follower Sequence Switch Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF On Off Close after the Recloser Reset Time TD On Off Sync Control Enabled Disable L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The recloser provides flexibility with lead and follower breaker options The lead breaker is in the main or auxiliary position This allows the user to control the lead circuit breaker with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary su pervision angle limit and voltage limit The user also has the ability to control the 79 remotely or locally with external or virtual inputs The 79 recloser mon itors the breaker contact a status and automatically moves the follower breaker into the lead position when the lead breaker is removed from service after an out of service time delay setting For details of auto recloser examples see L PRO Setting Example in Appendix L Sync Control The flexibility provided with device 79 allows the user to control 1 or 2 circuit breakers with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervision slip fre quency Sync control is provided on the lead breaker only because the follow er breaker always recloses after the lead breaker has successfully closed ProLo
38. 2 2 4 Reports Output Never Not supported Command Event Only upon a successful Control Objects Upon all control attempts 2 2 5 Event Variation Variation 1 without time Not supported L PRO Offliner reported when variation Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 0 requested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 6 Command Event Variation 1 without time Not supported L PRO Offliner Variation reported when Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 variation 0 requested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 7 Event reporting mode Only most recent Not supported L PRO Offliner All events See Note 2 below 2 2 8 Command Event Only most recent Not supported reporting mode All events 2 2 9 Maximum Time Not Applicable 10s between Select and kl Fixed at 10 seconds Operate Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from __ seconds Configurable other describe Variable explain Based on point Index add column to table below 2 2 10 Definition of Binary Fixed list shown in table below Complete list is L PRO Offliner Output Status Control BK Configurable shown in the relay output block Other explain table below CROB Point List points excluded from the default configuration are marked with Appendix F 20 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Events are not sup
39. After 2 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds Main Breaker Reclose Shot 1 T1 Auxiliary Breaker Close Shot 1 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Breaker Reclose Shot 2 T2 Aux Breaker Close Shot 2 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Breaker Reclose Shot 3 T3 Aux Breaker Close Shot 3 TF External Trip PL4 TF Main Breaker Reclose Shot 4 T4 Aux Breaker Close Shot 4 TF External Trip PL4 TF After 1 3 Seconds Recloser Lockout 1 0 seconds Tp 4 For detail of shot numbers etc observe the sequence of events by viewing Mai n Menu gt Events 5 To perform this test again reset the Lockout as per 79 Reset Procedure above then repeat the 79 test procedure End of 79 test 7 56 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 8 Installation 8 1 Introduction This section deals with the installation of the L PRO relay when first delivered The section covers the physical mounting AC and DC wiring and the Commu nication wiring 8 2 Physical Mounting Standard 3U 4U The relay is 3 rack units or 5 25 inches high and approximately 12 9 inches deep The standard relay is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechani cal drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay the following is needed e 19 inch rack 4 10 screws The relay is 4 rack units or 7 0 inches high and approximately 12 25 inches deep The relay
40. For this test apply 0 voltage and 0 current to the relay with no prefault This causes the first 3 conditions to be met 27V1 NOT Zone 2 OR Zone 4R NOT Loss of Potential In this case a Virtual Input is set up to simulate the Permissive Trip Receive contact via ProLogic Distance Scheme Selection POTT Communication Aided External Inputs 1 to 9 and ProLogic 1 to 24 Receiver 1 Receiver 2 PL 8 PerTrip Rec via gt edizablect Figure 7 17 Scheme Selector Settings Offliner L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 25 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 26 Weak Infeed Test Procedure 1 Activate this Virtual Input by accessing the Relay Control Panel s Utilities gt Virtual Inputs 2 Select Virtual Input 13 in the Virtual Input drop down list 3 Click on the Pulse On button to execute the PerTripRec Simulate as shown in the following screen shot em Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities z x lol iba File Help r Control Virtual Inputs Virtual Input 13 X Latch Off LatchOn Unit Identification Extemal Input_A Virtual Inputs Main Menu Config Mar Utilities Metering Events Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED UnitID Connected Figure 7 18 Virtual Input Control Observe Relay Target POTT Trip WI 0 0 mi Note The 0 0 mi indicates that there was 0 impedance measured due to 0 line voltage being applied End of Weak Infeed test
41. Impedance Characteristics Available in L PRO Mho and Quadrilateral Reactive x Forward Characteristic Angle 90 degrees Resistive R Directional Reverse se Supervision Figure 7 4 MHO Circle Characteristic Angle 90 Available for 21P and 21N L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Reactive x Forward Resistive R Reverse Directional Supervision Figure 7 5 MHO Tomato Characteristic Angle lt 90 Available for 21P and 21N Reactive x Forward Characteristic Angle 90 degrees Resistive R Reverse Directional Supervision Figure 7 6 MHO Lens Characteristic Angle gt 90 Available for 21P and 21N L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 7 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Reactive OP onward Resistive R Reverse Directional Supervision Figure 7 7 Quadrilateral Available for 21P and 21N Only Basic Testing Calculations Nominal primary voltage 230kV 1 kV 230kV _ 2 i to ee Oe IIB Nominal secondary phase to phase voltage PTRatio 2000 3 Nominal secondary phase to neutral voltage 66 4V 3 115V NB where kV Nominal Primary Voltage PT Ratio Potential Transformer Ratio Zero Sequence Impedance calculations for phase to ground impedance ele ment tests using secondary Positive and Zero Sequence Line Impedances Z 5 9Q 280 1 03 j5 81 4 N
42. Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 22 ProLogic 22 ProLogic 22 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 23 ProLogic 23 ProLogic 23 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 25 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 26 Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 24 ProLogic 24 ProLogic 24 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt
43. LN Class RREC Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Auto SPS_1_Proxy Automatic Operation Op ACT_1_Op Operate AutoRecSt INS_1_AutoRecSt Auto Reclosing Status Logical Node PTOV1 Description Overvoltage LN Class PTOV Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPit Name Plate Str ACD_2 Str Start L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 19 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 20 Logical Node PTOV2 Description Overvoltage LN Class PTOV Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node PTUV1 Description Undervoltage LN Class PTUV Attribute Attr Type Explanation T x Mod INC_2_ Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_2 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node PTOF1 Description Overfrequency LN Class PTOF Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr
44. Low TESTE p Ane A ne A Etema A loge 1 A Logie 2A Prologic A Ouiputs J_Grouplogic_ J Virtual Zoom Leve 200 v Freeze Close Metering Main Menu Metering Relay Control Panel v0 3 P0164 BPRO MB Current Relay LPRO USBLPRO Connected Figure 7 9 Protection Functions Metering Screens D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 11 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 60 Loss of Potential LOP Test 7 12 Settings e Voltage 0 75 per unit phase to neutral fixed In this case minimum op erate 0 75 per unit 0 75 V ming 0 75 66 4 V 49 8 V e I Blocking 10 0 A positive sequence current that blocks LOP if exceeded 339 Blocking 1 0 A zero sequence current that blocks LOP if exceeded e Neg Seq Monitoring disabled 27 V a 0 75 pu fixed 27 VLb 0 75 pu foed 27 Vic 0 75 pu fred SVa 01 pu feed SO Vib 0 1 pu fied 58 Vic 0 1 pu fixed dvposid lt Migde ABS dposit gt 0 1Aqyde negative Seq Monitoring V2 gt Vnps 12 lt inps 5D ILB 461 nomnal SOILC 4 nominal Figure 7 10 Loss of Potential Logic 60 60 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 60 Alarm 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 0 5 A to th
45. Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 9 Group Logic 9 Group Logic 9 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 10 Group Logic 10 Group Logic 10 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 29 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 30 Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 11 Group Logic 11 Group Logic 11 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 12 Group Logic 12 Group Logic 12 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator
46. Table 4 12 59 Overvoltage Settings Main 1 Main 2 Enable Disable Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 2 Enable Disable L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 29 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage 4 30 Table 4 12 59 Overvoltage Settings Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup 1 0 to 138 0 V secondary Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds The relay provides Zero sequence overvoltage protection from line side PT The element operates on the residual voltage quantity 3V0 The element has one DTL and one Inverse Time stage The device 59N Inverse Time provides three IEC inverse time curve types three IEEE inverse time types of Zero sequence overvoltage protection and one user defined curve The equation and the parameters of device 59N are listed below Pickup T 3V0 TMS B A 3V0 3VOpickup 1 Reset T 3V0 TMS TR 1 3VO 3 VO pickup Table 4 13 IEC and IEEE Curves NO Curve Type A B P 1 IEC Standard Inverse 0 14 Fixed 0 00 Fixed 0 02 Fixed 2 IEC Very Inverse 13 5 Fixed 0 00 Fixed 1 00 Fixed 3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80 00 Fixed 0 00 Fixed 2 00 Fixed 4 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 0104 Fixed 0 0228 Fixed 0 02 Fixed 5 IEEE Very Inverse 3 880 Fixed 0 0963 Fixed 2 00 Fixed 6 IEEE Extremely Inverse 5 67 Fixed 0 0352 Fixed 2 00 Fixed 7 User defined 0 0010 to 0 0000 to 0 01 to 10 00 10
47. Table of Contents Appendix H Rear Panel Drawing6 ceee H 1 Appendix AC Schematic Drawings eee l 1 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings eee J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram 008 K 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 06 L 1 Switching Setting GroupS eseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeerereeerrernnee L 2 79 Auto recloser Examples eeeseeeseeeeeeeteeeseeees L 9 Appendix M Failure Modes ccccccccseesseeeeeeeeeees M 1 ACUONS oyi eae A a EEA M 1 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation N 1 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement CCS act i ne E A E ES AE N 1 Model Implementation Conformance Statement OEN E E E ecttniirecdvannlsssaceacneces ixamacnanetvetene N 8 Data Mapping Specifications ccccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeees N 56 WAG Xe asec pete ete E E A coat atenas tue ctek A AN A D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual ix Version Compatibility D02706R02 50 This chart indicates the versions of Offliner Settings RecordBase View and the User Manual which are compatible with different versions of L PRO firm ware RecordBase View and Offliner Settings are backward compatible with all ear lier versions of records and setting files Use RecordBase View to view records produced by any version of L PRO firmware and Offliner Settings can create and edit older setting file versions Minor
48. 1 Contact Closed active 21P1 Trip 769 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P2 Trip 770 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P3 Trip 771 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21P4 Trip 772 0 Off inactive 1 On active 51 Trip 773 0 Off inactive 1 On active 50 Trip 774 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N1 Trip 775 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N2 Trip 776 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N3 Trip 777 0 Off inactive 1 On active 21N4 Trip 778 0 Off inactive 1 On active 68 Power Swing 779 0 Off inactive 1 On active Z Circle Trigger 780 0 Off inactive 1 On active 51N Trip 781 0 Off inactive 1 On active 50N Trip 782 0 Off inactive 1 On active D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 2 Read Coil Status Function Code 01 46 51 Trip 783 0 Off inactive On active 46 50 Trip 784 0 Off inactive On active Deadline Trip 785 0 Off inactive On active Distance Comm Scheme Trip 786 0 Off inactive On active Distance Comm Scheme Send 787 0 Off inactive On active 60 Alarm 788 0 Off inactive On active 21P2 Alarm 789 0 Off inactive On active 21P3 Alarm 790 0 Off inact
49. 50P Directional Control If Directional or combined T must be greater than 10 ms 284 T 7 0 Out 10 ILa RVS Seed Maximum ILb RMS Phase curent for ILe RMS 51 Element ms 0 arm Timer is active only if it s directional or combined 285 a Out 1 51P Directional Contr J i Figure 7 26 Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic 50 51 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 37 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50 and 51 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 51 Alarm Output Contact 10 50 Trip 2 Apply single phase current to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 0 5 A 3 Slowly ramp up the current At 1 43 to 1 58 A expect 1 5 A 51 Alarm High 4 Continue to raise current At 14 3 to 15 8 A expect 15 A 50 Trip High Contact 10 Closed 5 Turn current off 51 Alarm Low 50 Trip Low 51 Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 11 2 Set timer start from single phase 0 0 A to 6 00 A transition this equates to 4x pickup 3 Inject fault Time Delay TMS x L 1 p C multiple 0 5 x 0 00 125 0 5 x 0 00 25 2 255 411 3 34 Observe Relay Target 51 Trip on A 51 Directional Test Settings e 51 Settings directional forward if directional a 170 B 180 e Line Angle 80
50. 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 5 Apply 3 phase currents from 0 to 4 43 A to start the timer Ph A 300 301 4 43 A 20 Ph B 302 303 4 43 A Z 120 Ph C 304 305 4 43 A 2120 Expect operating time 1 0 second inherent 1 0 to 1 3 cycle detection time Observe target Out Of Step Trip End of 68 Swing Timer test For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file change to Setting Group 2 1 In Relay Control Panel access Utilities gt Virtual Inputs 2 Select corresponding virtual input for Switch to SG2 3 Click on Pulse On button to execute the command 4 The Active Setting Group will become Group 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 27 Settings Undervoltage Main AND 3 Phase Undervoltage Test e Auxiliary AND Single Phase Undervoltage Only 1 phase is connected e Main and Aux Pickup 30 V e Time Delay 0 01 second 27 Va main RMS 27 Vb main RMS 300 O T 27 Vc main RMS 27 Mein Undervoltage 301 m 0 3 Phases Connected J 27 Va aux RMS 27 Vb aux RMS 302 O T 27 Vc aux RMS out 13 27 Aux Undervoltage 303 nl 0 1 Phase Connected Figure 7 23 Undervoltage Logic 27 27 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 27 Main U V 27 Aux U V Monitor Output Contacts
51. Aux amp ms SOTF Enable Undervoltage monitoring o y j 2 R Trip A 27 Under voltage 1 21P2 Alarm 21N2 Alarm 21Zone 2 Enable 1_ or yd E IL2a ILla ee J 3 IL2b IL1b Z or X gt ati IL2efille y_ 2 Harmonic Restraint Enable 7 Figure 4 15 Switch On To Fault SOTF The logic diagram Figure 4 15 Switch On To Fault SOTF on page 4 21 shows how the circuit actually works The SOTF function has options as Close Command or Status Monitoring D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 22 Close Command This method can be applied where the relay can get the Breaker Close com mand from control panel manual close switch TNC or SCADA Close com mand This Close command should reach the relay as an External Input or a Virtual Input or ProLogics to initiate SOTF logic This method ensures that all the poles or any one pole are in dead condition for more than the Al timer by checking the current level i e lower than 4 of nominal then it will enable the SOTF function Status Monitoring This method can be applied where the relay can get Breaker status 52A This Breaker Status Monitoring signal should reach the relay as an External Input or a Virtual Input to initiate SOTF logic This method will monitor all the pole statuses as well as each pole load current The SOTF function is enabled whenever current value is ch
52. C Setting Groups Aux Voltage Input 3 Phase v I System Parameters C SCADA Communication Nc S O DNP Configuration IV Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Line Input C Point Map Main Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 240 00 1 For Protection and Recording O Class Data C SCADA Settings Summary de C Record Length Current Input 3 CT Ratio 400 00 _ 1 For Recording and ProLogic Input C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Current Input 4 CT Ratio 00 00 1 For Recording and ProLogic Input O Line Parameters C Scheme Selector PT Turns Retio C Breaker Status C Directional Element j z et ee Main PT Turns Retio 2009 00 4 For Protection and Recording a ProLogic Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 2000 00 4 For Protection and Recording Group Logic C Output Matrix Line C Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Distance Unit C Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Devices Lineto Line Voltage 230 00 ky Pri km zj Figure 6 11 System Parameters Table 6 9 System Parameters System Parameters L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 9 System Parameters Base MVA 1 00 to 2000 00 MVA primary Target Latching On global Enable Disable Phase Rotation ABC or ACB Fault Location Display Enable Disable Aux Voltage Input 3 phase 1 phase Fault Locati
53. Dead Main Dead Sync Enabled 27 Vmain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 218 27 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed Figure 7 32 Synchronism Check Logic 25 27 59 7 48 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Sync Check Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 25 27 59 Sync Check Output Contact 10 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves DMDA with no voltage applied 2 Apply voltages to the relay main voltage input terminals sufficient to create Vpos of 66 4 V If only 3 voltage sources are available Ph A 330 99 6 V 20 Ph B 331 99 6 V Z 120 Ph C 332 not applicable Ph N 333 OR If 4 voltage sources are available Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 333 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves Live Main Dead Aux LM DA with only line voltage applied 3 Turn voltage off 4 Apply single phase nominal voltage 120 V to the relay auxiliary voltage input terminals Ph A 324 120 V 225 Note 3x Minimum Voltage 3x40 120 V this is for single phase only Ph N 327 Short and ground unused Terminals 325 and 326 Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check High Proves DMLA with only bus voltage applied 5 Apply both sets of voltages to main and auxiliary inputs as detailed above Observe 25 27 59 Sync Check Low 6 Simultaneously rotate the auxiliary voltage phase
54. FaultData D21P3RFLO3 Fault Locator 21P3 Zone 3 21P fault locator FaultData D21P4MMXU4 Measurement 21P4 Zone 4 21P fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21P4RFLO4 Fault Locator 21P4 Zone 4 21P fault locator FaultData D21P5MMXU5 Measurement 21P5 Zone 5 21P fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21P5RFLO5 Fault Locator 21P5 Zone 5 21P fault locator FaultData D27AMMXU15 Measurement 27 27 Auxiliary fault voltages FaultData D27MMMXU14 Measurement 27 27 Main fault voltages FaultData D4650MSQI7 Measurement 46 50 46 50 Negative Sequence overcurrent FaultData D4651MSQI10 Measurement 46 51 46 51 Negative Sequence overcurrent FaultData D50LSAMMXU9 Measurement 50LS 50LS Auxiliary fault currents FaultData D50LSMMMXU8 Measurement 50LS 50LS Main fault currents FaultData D5067MMXU18 Measurement 50 67 50 67 fault currents D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 57 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation FaultData D50N67MSQI8 Measurement 50N 67 50N 67 Zero Sequence current FaultData D5167MMXU19 Measurement 51 67 51 67 fault currents FaultData D51N67MSQI9 Measurement 51N 67 51N 67 Zero Sequence current FaultData D59A2MMXU21 Measurement 59 1 59 1 Auxiliary fault voltages FaultData D59AMMXU13 Measurement 59 2 59 2 Auxiliary fault voltages FaultData D59MMMXU12 Measurement 59 1 59 1 Main fault voltages
55. Frame Configurable other describe D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 7 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile e aye If configurable 1 5 Application Layer Capabilities Current Value iletmethods 1 5 1 Maximum number of K Fixed at 2048 2048 octets Transmitted in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable from i Fragment other than Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 2 Maximum number of Fixed at NA octets Transmitted in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable from Fragment containing Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 3 Maximum number of K Fixed at 2048 2048 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in an Configurable selectable from Application Layer Configurable other describe Fragment 1 5 4 Timeout waiting for None 2 000 ms Complete Application kl Fixed at 2 000 ms Layer Fragment Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from i ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 5 Maximum number of kl Fixed at 16 16 objects allowed ina Configurable range to single control request Configurable selectable from i for CROB group 12 Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 6 Maximum number of Fixed at _ Analog Outputs objects allowed ina Configurable range ___to not supported single control request Configurable selec
56. Group Logic 9 Using ProLogic Select from any available ProLogic inputs to make specific blocking logic to to Qualify be used as a qualifier for any group logic decisions In this example we use ei Group Logic ther the zone 1 or zone 2 phase distance elements or the communications trip Statements or the communications send or the Power Swing outer blinder alarm to drive the Block Group Logic statement There is no intentional pickup delay and 0 5 second drop out delay to hold the block on after the block condition has reset ProLogic 8 Block Group Logic V Enabled Name Block Group Logic AND Pickup Delay 9 00 seconds Dropout Delay 0 50 seconds JV Target Enabled Input A 21P1 Trip X Input B 21P2 Trip v Input Comm Scheme Trp i Out Input D Comm Scheme Send x ERS ouse 59 Main Overvoltage a lolo oj gt o jojojo Thi h has not been usel 59 Aux Overvoltage lc zero input 60 Alarm 68 Trip 68 OuterBind Alarm 68 InnerBind Alarm Figure L 15 ProLogic 8 Appendix L 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example L 2 79 Auto recloser Examples 79 Recloser Settings D02706R02 50 The user can program up to 4 shots or reclose attempts with the 79 function with various lead and follow breaker options Create settings by using the Of fliner settings software or by using the Relay Control Panel 79 3Ph Recloser
57. Not mapped set to unknown CBFIRBRF5 ST OpEx general L PRO 4000 User Manual 50BF Initiation Appendix N 83 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 84 D21P1PDIS1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1PDIS1 Data Name Description D21P1PDIS1 ST Str general 21P1 Trip D21P1PDIS1 ST Str dirGeneral 21P1 Direction set to unknown D21P1PDIS1 ST Op general 21P1 Trip D21P1PDIS1 ST Op phsA 21P1 Trip phase A D21P1PDIS1 ST Op phsB 21P1 Trip phase B D21P1PDIS1 ST Op phsC 21P1 Trip phase C D21P1PDIS1 ST Op neut D21P2PDIS2 21P1 Trip neutral This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P2PDIS2 Data Name Description D21P2PDIS2 ST Str general 21P2 Trip D21P2PDIS2 ST Str dirGeneral 21P2 Direction set to unknown D21P2PDIS2 ST Op general 21P2 Trip D21P2PDIS2 ST Op phsA 21P2 Trip phase A D21P2PDIS2 ST Op phsB 21P2 Trip phase B D21P2PDIS2 ST Op phsC 21P2 Trip phase C D21P2PDIS2 ST Op neut 21P2 Trip neutral L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21P3PDIS3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P3PDIS3 Data Name Description D21P3PDIS3 ST Str general 21P3 Trip D21P3PDIS3 ST Str dirGeneral 21P3 Direction se
58. Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 External input 1 1 2 o none L Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 External input 2 1 2 4 1 0 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 External input 3 1 2 2 2 i H 0 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 External Input 4 2 3 3 E O Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 External input 5 12 4 P C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 eternal input 6 T2 A i Edernal input 7 2 6 1 External input 8 2 i 1 Virtual Input 4 1 2 8 It L PRO Offliner Settings v12 Figure 6 15 SCADA Settings Summary This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the working setting file This includes SCADA Communication parameters and if the SCADA mode is set to DNP Binary Input Binary Output and Analog In put information including Deadband and Scaling factors This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Record Length 6 Offliner Settings Software L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 3 File Edit Window Help osla x m e gt Identification O Relay C Analog Inputs External Inputs O Output Contacts O Virtual Inputs O Setting Groups O System Parameters C SCADA Communication C DNP Configuration O Point Map Class Data O SCADA Settings Summary Feco Lena C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 O Line Parameters Scheme Selector C Breaker Status O Directional Element ale
59. Tf you dial a number to access an outside line what is it Enter The phone system at this location uses Choose Tone dialing Hit OK First time use of HyperTerminal will show Phone and Modem Options Hit Cancel HyperTerminal will show initially Connection Description Enter a name for the relay e g LPRO4000 Hit OK In the window Connect To Connect using Choose COM where was obtained previously in Section 2 5 USB Link after installing the USB driver Let s assume in this case it is COM3 In the window COM3 Properties choose 115200 gy None gt Hardware Hit Apply then hit OK At this time the connection should already be established Hit Enter in the terminal window L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications Login as maintenance in lower case L PRO 4000 HyperTerminal Ele Edit View Call Transfer Help Dw 08 f L PRO 4000 System Utility v1 1 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration and password Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings
60. Toggle Outputs N A N A Close Open Settings Group Save Save Passwords N A N A Configuration 3 Using the IED Getting Started Table 3 5 Relay Control Panel Structure Present Settings Get From Relay Saved Settings Load to Load to Relay Relay Notice that some options are not available N A depending on the access level D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 11 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 1 Protection and Recording Functions Introduction 21P Phase 21N Ground Distance D02706R02 50 This section describes the equations and algorithms of the relay protection functions All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when their pickup level is exceeded The following functions are exceptions 27 Auxiliary 27 Main 59 Auxiliary 59 Main 25 27 59 Sync Check SOLS Main 50LS Auxiliary 50BF Main 50BF Auxiliary 81 Frequency and ProLogic elements A complete list of the settings and their range values can be found in IED Set tings and Ranges in Appendix B The relay 21P contains 5 zones of phase distance elements all 5 zones of 21P can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type Note that only one type can be used at a time The 21P can contain a mixture of Mho and Quadrilateral shapes for example the 21P1 and 21P2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and the 21P3 21P4 and 21P5 could be set to a Quadrilateral characteristic The relay 21N contains 5 zones
61. Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node PTUF1 Description Underfrequency LN Class PTUF Attribute Attr Type Explanation T x Mod INC_2_ Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 21 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 22 Logical Node PFRC1 Description Rate of change of frequency LN Class PFRC Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node PIOC1 Description Instantaneous overcurrent LN Class PIOC Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Op ACT_5_Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node PIOC2 Description Instantaneous overcurrent LN Class PIOC Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate S
62. Virtual Input 24 10536 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 25 10537 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 26 10538 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 27 10539 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 28 10540 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 29 10541 0 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 30 10542 0 Off inactive On active L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 5 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 6 Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 Channel Address Units Scale L PRO Clock Time UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds Now 40001 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40002 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40003 0 59 1 Hours Now 40004 0 23 1 Day of Year Now 40005 1 365 up to 366 if leap year 1 Years since 1900 40006 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40007 0 No 1 Yes 1 Time of Acquisition UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds Now 40008 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40009 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40010 0 59 1 Hours Now 40011 0 23 1 Day of Year Now 40012 1 365 up to 366 if leap year 1 Years since 1900 40013 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40014 0 No 1 Yes 1 Offset of UTC to IED time 40015 2 s complement half hours 1 North America is negative aaan
63. e Back up earth fault SOTF Trip Target LED assignments are the default values but are configurable by the user through the Offliner settings output matrix configuration L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 3 3 Using the IED Getting Started Push Buttons Display 3 4 Table 3 3 Identification of Push Buttons Up Down Right Left Enter Escape Used to navigate the front panel screens The LCD screen of the L PRO 4000 relay provides information to the user in the form of data messages and visual feedback for user interaction A series of access controlled menu options are available through the front panel LCD and Push Button keypad provided on the unit allowing unit level access to many of the same features available through the supporting ERLPhase relay software tools In all cases a password is required to obtain more than the basic IED in formation The basic menu structure for navigation of the LCD screen is given below The LCD screen displays the following metering parameters e Phase wise voltage magnitude amp angle e Phase wise current magnitude amp angle e 3 phase real power e 3 phase reactive power e Frequency e 3 phase apparent power e Power factor e All sequence voltages e All sequence currents e Single phase real power e Single phase reactive power Single phase Apparent power e Single phase power factor The metering display in LCD screen has a resolution of three decimals for
64. i e current lags voltage by 80 Note Operating Range 90 from line angle 7 38 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 51P Forward 266 51P directional control 51P Reverse 278 267 lo Non directional SOP Forward 268 50P directional control SOP Reverse 269 Non directional al 51N Forward ILpos H T7 280 51N directional control 59 Main 2 volts RMS fixed C y Non directional 50N Forward 272 50 ILpos 4 norrinal RMS fixed 50N directional control 50N Reverse 273 Non directional 46 51 Forward 274 46 51 directional control 46 51 Reverse 275 Non directional 46 50 Forward 276 46 50 directional control 46 50 Reverse 277 Non directional Figure 7 27 Directional Element Logic 51 Directional Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection 7 Monitor 51 Pickup Alarm Apply single phase polarizing voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 Z V 0 Ph B 331 333 66 4 Z V 120 Ph C 332 333 66 4 Z V 120 Apply single phase current at line angle to Ph A 300 301 2 0 A Z 80 Observe 51 Pickup Alarm High Slowly ramp the current phase angle in negative direction i e more lag At 165 to 175 expect 170 51 Pickup Alarm Low Restore cur
65. o 16 0Q 274 4 41 715 38 5 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Zo 4 Ko 3 x Zi 4 41 1 03 j15 38 j5 81 3 x 5 92Z80 3384957 10 15 lt 70 52 _ 9 57295 6 17 7 80 17 7 80 where Z Positive Sequence Impedance Z gt Negative Sequence Impedance Ko Factor The multiplier used to compensate phase to ground impedances 1 K 1 0 572 9 5 1 0 562 0 094 1 562 j0 094 1 569 3 5 7 21N Reach Settings Zone Reach Mho 4 72 Q Zone 2 Reach Quadrilateral X 7 38 Q R 6 00 Q Zone 3 Reach Mho Forward 17 7 Q Reverse 0 50 Q Zone 4 Reach Mho Forward 0 00 Q Reverse 4 72 Q Compensated 21N1 setting 4 72 Q Zone 1 phase to ground compensated Mho impedance 4 720 280 x 1 569 2 3 5 7 400 276 5 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 9 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Compensated 21N2 Setting 7 38 Q Zone 2 phase to ground compensated Quadrilateral impedance Reactive 7 38 80 x 1 569 3 5 11 58Q 276 5 9 Resistive 6 0Q 0 x 1 569 2 3 5 9 4103 5 10 11 The pure resistive component 9 41Q x cos 3 5 9 390 20 Compensated 21N3 Zone 3 Phase to ground compensated impedance 13 17 70Q 280 x 1 569 2 3 5 27 76Q 276 5 14 Forward Reverse 0 5002 2 100 x 1 569 Z 3 5 0 78QZ 103 5 Compensated 21N4 Zone 4 phase to ground compensated impedan
66. using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 2 and in itiate the reclosing sequence 16 Check the event log and confirm that only 52 2 breaker reclosed and was in the lead position Confirm that 52 1 breaker did not receive any reclose attempts L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Zl Relay 4000 Control Panel Events D00 Ele Edit View Help 2010aug03 16 13 20 031 52 2 a Status PL4 High 2010Aug03 16 13 19 931 TP Start PL9 Low 2010Aaug03 16 13 19 931 TP End PL10 High 2010Aaug03 16 13 19 831 TP Start PL9 High 2010aug03 16 13 19 831 TP End PL10 Low 2010Aug03 16 13 19 831 79 3Ph Aux Reclose shot 1 R 2010Aug03 16 13 10 731 Spare 4 0UT4 Open 2010Aug03 16 13 10 731 Spare 3 0UT3 Open 2010Aug03 16 13 10 631 52 1Trip PL1 Low 2010Aug03 16 13 10 631 52 2 Trip PL3 Low 2010Aug03 16 13 10 629 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 VI5 Low 2010Aug03 16 13 09 823 52 2 a Status PL4 Low 2010Aug03 16 13 09 625 79 3Ph Initiated High 2010Aug03 16 13 09 623 52 1Trip PL1 High 2010Aaug03 16 13 09 623 52 2 Trip PL3 High 2010Aug03 16 13 09 623 Spare 4 0UT4 Closed 2010Aug03 16 13 09 623 Spare 3 0UT3 Closed 2010Aaug03 16 13 09 596 52 1 52 2 Trips79 VI5 High E m Print Main Menu Contig Mar Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Events Figure L 37 Only 52 2 breaker reclosed and wa
67. 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 12 12a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 13 12a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 14 12b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 15 12b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 16 12c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 17 12c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 18 13a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 19 13a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 20 I3b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 21 I3b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 22 I3c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 23 I3c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 24 l4a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 25 l4a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 26 l4b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 27 l4b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 28 l4c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 29 l4c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 30 Bus Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 31 Bus Va Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0
68. 0 0 deg 25 0 to 25 0 KM2 Mutual Line 2 Disabled KM2 Magnitude 1 00 0 10 to 2 00 KM2 Angle 0 0 deg 25 0 to 25 0 Scheme Selector Distance Scheme Selection Basic Protection Scheme 3 Phase 1Ph Max Open Pickup Delay TM 2 500 s 0 100 to 5 000 1Ph 3Ph for 3Ph Dropout Delay 25 000 s 0 100 to TD4 999 000 1Ph 3Ph for 1Ph Pickup Delay 0 100 s 0 100 to TL5 5 000 1Ph 3Ph for 1Ph Dropout Delay 25 000 s 0 100 to TD5 999 000 Fault Timer Disabled Fault Timer Pickup 0 20 s 0 05 to 10 00 Communication Receiver1 El 1 El Spare 1 Communication Receiver2 lt disabled gt Scheme Send Pickup Delay TL3 0 000 s 0 000 to 1 000 Scheme Send Dropout Delay 0 100 0 000 to TD3 1 000 POTT Current Reversal Pickup 0 000 0 000 to Delay TL1 0 500 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 5 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 6 POTT Current Reversal Dropout 0 100 0 000 to Delay TD1 0 500 DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup 0 050 0 005 to Delay TL2 0 500 DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout 0 100 0 000 to Delay TD2 0 500 DEF Scheme Selection Disabled Communication Receiver3 lt disabled gt DEF Scheme Send Pickup Delay 0 100 0 000 to TL6 1 000 DEF Scheme Send Dropout Delay 0 200 0 000 to TD6 1 000 External Single Phase Main A lt disabled gt Phase External Single Phase Main B lt disabled gt
69. 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A 3lo Blocking 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Negative Sequence Monitoring Enable Disable Vnps 7 0 to 110 V Inps 0 25 to 5 0 A secondary 5 A 0 05 to 1 0 A secondary 1 A If this function is enabled and an AC Loss of Potential takes place an output contact can be closed Loss of potential causes an alarm and distance elements will be blocked Pos itive and zero sequence current settings provided will block this function for L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 33 4 Protection Functions and Specifications faults If voltage goes below 75 nominal 49 8 V and the currents obtained do not exceed the settings the loss of potential will be initiated Note that the positive and zero sequence current blocking level should be set above the maximum line current This function is fast enough to provide blocking of the distance functions for schemes that use bus potential inputs that are sometimes transferred without the need for any external blocking inputs Table 4 17 Logic Gates Loss of Potential Logic Logic Description for details see Figure 4 18 Loss of Potential Logic on page 4 Gate 32 1 When one of the phase to ground potentials falls below 0 75 pu the logic ele ment s output is HIGH 2 Phase voltage A and B and C less than 0 1 pu will have output HIGH 3 Logic element 2 HIGH and positive seq
70. 0 gt ProLogic 11 ProLogic 11 ProLogic 11 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 12 ProLogic 12 ProLogic 12 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 22 Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 13 ProLogic 13 ProLogic 13 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 14 ProLogic 14 ProLogic 14 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3
71. 005 to 99 990 The relay supports a Basic no communication a Permissive Overreaching Transfer Tripping POTT a Permissive Under reaching Transfer Tripping PUTT and a Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme DCB Directional Element L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help Dieu seeme identification Relay C Analog Inputs External Inputs Directional Element Override Enabled Directional Element Output Contacts Virtual inputs Negative Sequence Directional Element O Setting Groups rs 7 Enabled Zero Sequence Directional Element Enabled V2 Sensitivity Levet 0 5 v 3V0 Sensitivity Levet 1 0 v 12 Sensitivity Levet 02 A 310 Sensitivity Level 0 2 A SCADA Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 O Line Parameters O Scheme Selector Breaker Status H Directional Element Figure 6 20 Directional Element Table 6 13 Directional Element Directional Element Override Enable Disable Negative Sequence Directional Element Enable Disable V2 Sensitivity Level 0 5 to 5 0 Volts secondary I2 Sensitivity Level 0 1 to 1 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 0 20 A secondary 1A Zero Sequence Directional Element Enable Disable 3V0 Sensitivity Level 1 0 to 10 0 Volts secondary 310 Sensitivity Level 0 2 to 2 0 A secondary 5A 0 04 to 0 40 A secondary 1A L PRO 4000 User Manu al 6 25 6
72. 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 46 51 Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 46 51 Pickup Time Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 Z Circle Trigger Swing Trigger Disabled Positive Seq Impedance 20 0 ohm 0 1 to 50 0 ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 17 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 18 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 2 ProLogic 2 ProLogic 2 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 3 ProLogic 3 ProLogic 3 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 4 ProLog
73. 1 kV Diff IEEE C37 90 1 Oscillatory Signal ports 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff ac power port 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff dc power port 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff IEC EN 61000 4 16 Mains frequency voltage Signal ports 30 V continuous 300 V for 1s ac power port 30 V continuous 300 V for 1s IEC EN 61000 4 17 Ripple on dc power supply dc power port 10 Note The L PRO 4000 is available with 5 or 1 amp current input All current specifications change accordingly D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 7 Appendix A IED Specifications A 1 Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal Frequency Figure A 1 through A 6 show operating times for the relay distance elements The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact operate time Faults were applied at a location representing a percentage of the Zone relay reach setting Tests were performed for source impedance ratios SIR of 0 1 1 0 10 0 and 30 0 No pre trigger load current or fault resistance was included Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz L PRO Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults 1 6 5 1 4 4 1 2 4 y 14 e SIR 30 D BP ai SIR 10 0 8 gt x SIR1 0 6 x SIR 0 1 0 4 4 0 2
74. 13 27 Aux Trip 14 27 Main Trip 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 324 and 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 2 120 Ph N 327 and 333 Observe 27 Main U V Low 27 Aux U V Low 3 Reduce A Phase voltage At 31 0 to 29 0 V expect 30 V 27 Aux U V High Contact 13 closed 27 Main U V remains Low Contact 14 open 4 With A Phase voltage still reduced reduce B and C phase V D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 33 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide At 31 to 29 V expect 30 V 27 Aux U V High 27 Main U V High Contact 14 closed End of 27 test 59 Overvoltage Settings Test e Main 1 amp 2 AND 3 Phase Overvoltage e Auxiliary 1 amp 2 OR Single Phase Overvoltage 1 phase connected e Main 1 amp 2 and Aux 1 amp 2 Pickup 72 V e Time Delay 0 05 second 59 Va mein MS 59 Vb main RMS 59 Ve main RMS 59 Main 1 Overvoltage 3 Phases Connected 59 Va main MS 59 Vb main RMS 59 Vc main RMS 59 Main 2 Overvoltage 3 Phases Connected 59 Va aux RMS 59 Vb aux RMS 59 Vc aux RMS 59 Aux 1 Overvoltage 1 Phase Connected 59 Va aux RMS 59 Vb aux RMS 59 Vc aux RMS 59 Aux 2 Overvoltage 1 Phase Connected Figure 7 24 Overvoltage Logic 59 59 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 59 Main 1 O V 59 Main 2 O V 59 Aux 1 O V 7 34 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 50
75. 19 ESCADA Communication 5 Virtual Input 5 20 Virtual Input 20 C DNP Configuration Point Map 6 Virtual Input 6 214 Virtual Input 21 Class Data 7 Virtual Input 7 22 Virtual Input 22 T SCADA Settings Summary a Virtual input 8 23 Virtual Input 23 O Record Length E Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 9 Virtual Input 9 24 Virtual Input 24 C Line Parameters 40 Virtual input 10 25 Virtual Input 25 C Scheme Selector 44 Virtual input 11 26 Virtual Input 26 Breaker Status Directional Element 42 Virtual input 12 27 Virtual Input 27 C Protection Functions 43 Virtual Input 13 28 Virtual Input 28 Z Circle Trigger 44 Virtual Input 14 29 Virtual Input 29 HEI prologo Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 30 i 1 Group Logic ga Virtual inp 30 Virtual Inpt Output Matrix Figure 6 9 Virtual Inputs Table 6 7 Virtual Inputs Virtual Inputs 1 to 30 User defined The relay can control its internal functions and connected devices both locally and remotely Thirty general purpose logic points are accessible via DNP3 and the TUI The 30 virtual inputs are individually controlled and include a set reset and pulse function The latch state is retained during setting changes and relay power down conditions The 30 virtual inputs conform to DNP3 standards Use the DNP3 functions such as SBO select before operate Direct Operate or Direct Operate with no acknowledge to control virtual inputs Use virtual
76. 2 5 x 3 5 5 Ziz E o Q Q Z 9 o o6 6 6 5 6 a 2 e E 8 8 8 8 8 8 S o 8 5 e e v ae ot Ej E fo a 9 A A J amp J a F ojojo 46 Output Contact 16 Inactive Active None None 47 Output Contact 17 Inactive Active None None 48 Output Contact 18 Inactive Active None None 49 Output Contact 19 Inactive Active None None 50 Output Contact 20 Inactive Active None None 51 Output Contact 21 Inactive Active None None D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 23 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 3 Analog Input Points eke c A If configurable Shee ioe sire a a Ua oe arent Value list methods 2 3 1 Static Variation reported Variation 1 32 bit with flag when variation 0 Variation 2 16 bit with flag requested Variation 3 32 bit without flag Variation 4 16 bit without flag Variation 5 single precision floating point with flag Variation 6 double precision floating point with flag Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 2 Event Variation Variation 1 32 bit without time reported when variation K Variation 2 16 bit without time 0 requested Variation 3 32 bit with time Variation 4 16 bit with time Variation 5 single precision floating
77. 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 13 Group Logic 13 Group Logic 13 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 0 to 999 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 14 Group Logic 14 Group Logic 14 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 15 Group Logic 15 Group Logic 15 Disabled Setting Group to Activate none Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt Group Logic 16 Group Logic 16 Group Logic 16 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 31 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 32
78. 301 5 3 A Z 80 Ph B 302 303 5 3 A Z 200 Ph C 303 304 5 3 A 2 40 Expect operating time less than 1 3 cycles with CCVT algorithm dis abled End of 21P1 test 21P2 Phase Zone 2 Phase Under Impedance tested as 2 phase fault Distance Test Settings e Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance 100 of line 5 9 Q Pos itive Sequence Line Angle Z1 80 e 21P2 7 38 Q Maximum Reach 125 of line 24 25 miles at maximum torque angle of 80 Time Delay 400 ms expect 1 0 to 1 3 cycle additional delay due to in herent detection and contact times e Delta Current Supervision 3 0 A minimum phasor difference between any 2 phases to allow 21P2 Trip This test example shows how to test for a phase to phase fault Determine the voltage and current quantities required to perform this test 1 Determine the minimum current required as per Idelta supervision setting 2 Determine an appropriate fault voltage to use for the test 3 Determine the 3 phase voltage phasors required to create the fault voltage 1 Minimum current required for this test I delta Supervision Setting the phasor difference of 2 phases 3 0 A Cur rent is injected into polarity of B phase and out of polarity of C phase Therefore B phase and C phase currents are equal in magnitude but 180 out of phase The minimum delta current required 3 0 A add 5 to ensure supervision is met 3 0 x 105 percent 3 2A 19
79. 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect single phase current source to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 1 58 A 2 3 5 Observe 21N2 Pickup Low 4 Reduce Phase A voltage At 15 6 to 14 2 V expect 14 9 V 21N2 Pickup High After 400 ms 21N2 Trip High L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 23 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Load Encroachment Test 7 24 Testing the Zone 2 Neutral Time Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 1 202 203 2 Set timer to start from single phase current transition i e current off to on 3 Apply the following 3 phase voltages to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 4 Apply single phase current from 0 to 6 0 A to start the timer 95 of Zone 2 Reach 119 of the line 23 1 miles Ph A 300 301 6 0 A Z 76 5 Expected operate time 400 ms 1 0 to 1 3 cycle 417 ms 2 5 Note The zone timer starts when the fault is detected the detection time inherent contact time approximately 1 0 to 1 3 cycles after fault inception Testing Other Zones Test all other zones 21P3 4 and 21N1 and 21N3 4 using the same process as the 21P1 21P2 and 21N2 zones except that the user needs to substitute the impedance and timing settings for those zones End of 21 tests Load Encroachment function operates based on the fact that all phase to phase impedanc
80. 59 2 Aux Trip 892 0 Off inactive 1 On active Successful Reclose Main 893 0 Off inactive 1 On active Successful Reclose Aux 894 0 Off inactive 1 On active 79 Fault lockout 895 0 Off inactive 1 On active Read Input Status Function Code 02 Channel Address Value External Input 1 10001 0 Off inactive On active External Input 2 10002 0 Off inactive On active External Input 3 10003 0 Off inactive On active External Input 4 10004 0 Off inactive On active External Input 5 10005 0 Off inactive On active External Input 6 10006 0 Off inactive On active External Input 7 10007 0 Off inactive On active External Input 8 10008 0 Off inactive On active External Input 9 10009 0 Off inactive On active External Input 10 0010 0 Off inactive On active External Input 11 0011 0 Off inactive On active External Input 12 0012 0 Off inactive On active External Input 13 0013 0 Off inactive On active External Input 14 0014 0 Off inactive On active External Input 15 0015 0 Off inactive On active External Input 16 0016 0 Off inactive On active External Input 17 0017 0 Off inactive On active External Input 18 0018 0 Off inactive On active External Input 19 0019 0 Off inactive On active External Input 20 0020 0 Off inactive On active External Input 1 Change of state latch 0257 0 Off inactive On active External In
81. 6 3 Converting Setting Files 1 Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the set ting file match The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial number or the settings version do not match A serial number discrepancy message may appear This is to en sure that the user is aware of the exact relay in which settings are to be loaded If this happens check the relay serial number using the terminal mode ID menu item Type this serial number into the L PRO Serial No box in the Identification tab display area of Offlin er Settings Alternately the user may check the Ignore Serial Num ber check box to bypass serial number supervision L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software 2 Check the serial number and the settings version of the relay The Device Serial Number and Required Settings Version on the Identification screen indicate the serial number and the settings version of the relay Creating a 1 Offliner Settings displays a default setting file on start up showing the set Setting File tings version in the bottom status bar As an example L PRO Offliner is from an Older shipped with a set of default sample files of older settings versions These sample files are v1 sample lps v2 sample lps v3 sample lps etc Version Each sample file contains default values of an older settings version For a new installation these sample files are
82. 66 4 V Z 120 The resultant angle of A B voltage always 30 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault V 103 5V 920V 805V 690V 57 5V 46 0V 345V 230V 11 5V Fault Volt Angle 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Voltage A B 61 5V 56 7V 522V 47 9V 43 9V 404V 374V 354V 33 7V A Angle 2 7 5 8 9 5 13 9 19 1 25 3 32 5 40 9 50 2 B Angle 117 3 114 2v 440 5 106 1 100 9 94 7 87 5 79 1 69 8 7 18 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide B C Fault Table 7 15 B C Fault Voltage Injections A phase voltage 66 4 V Z0 The resultant angle of B C voltage always 90 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault V 103 5V 920V 805V 69 0V 57 5V_ 46 0V 345V 23 0V 11 5V Fault Volt Angle 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Voltage B C 61 5V 56 7V 522V 47 9V 43 9V 404V 374V 351V 33 7V B Angle 122 7 125 8 129 5 133 9 139 1 145 3 152 5 160 9 170 2 C Angle 122 7 125 8 129 5 133 9 139 1 145 3 152 5 160 9 170 2 Table 7 16 C A Fault Voltage Injections C A Fault B phase voltage 66 4 V Z 120 The resultant
83. 68 Trip J gt p 60 Figure 4 13 Power Swing Function Table 4 7 68 Power Swing Function Details Mode Block Off Trip Zone Blocking Zone 1 Blocking Enable Disable Zone 2 Blocking Enable Disable Zone 3 Blocking Enable Disable Zone 4 Blocking Enable Disable Zone 5 Blocking Enable Disable Out of Step Swing Timer 0 00 to 1 00 seconds 11 Supervision 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1A 310 Blocking 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Blocking Reset Time 0 25 to 2 00 seconds Left Hand Side LHS Blinder Outer R1 100 0 to R2 ohms secondary 5A 500 0 to R2 ohms secondary 1A Inner R2 R1 to R3 ohms secondary Right Hand Side RHS Blinder Inner R3 R2 to R4 ohms secondary D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 19 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Line Energization Supervision Logic 4 20 Table 4 7 68 Power Swing Function Details Outer R4 R3 to 100 0 ohms secondary 5A R3 to 500 0 ohms secondary 1A Top Blinder Outer X4 X3 to 100 0 ohms secondary 5A X3 to 500 0 ohms secondary 1A Inner X3 X2 to X4 ohms secondary Bottom Blinder Inner X2 X1 to X3 ohms secondary Outer X1 100 0 to X2 ohms secondary 5A 500 0 to X2 ohms secondary 1A Vpos VposOld gt 10 volts VposOld lt 30 volts a all 21 devices 1 sec
84. 70 reduction of phase to phase nominal 115V 2 90 115V 2 90 x 70 percent 34 5V Z 90 26 2 2 Faulted Test Voltage Magnitudes 45 4 1399 8 37 4V 27 Faulted Phase Angle 60 atan 349 60 27 5 32 5 28 For B C fault adjust Phase B angle toward Phase C angle and adjust Phase C angle toward Phase B angle B Phase Angle 120 32 5 152 5 C Phase Angle 120 32 5 152 5 7 20 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide So A Phase Phasor Unfaulted 66 4 V 20 B Phase Phasor Faulted 37 4 V 7 152 5 C Phase Phasor Faulted 37 4 V 7 152 5 Connecting the Test Source for B C Fault AC Current AC Voltages 330 331 332 A B C Main Current Inputs Main Voltage Inputs Figure 7 13 AC Connections to the relay for B C 21P Test In summary for this example inject Phase B to Phase C fault Line Impedance 7 38 Q Line Angle 80 Fault Voltage 34 5 V Z 90 using the calculated voltage phasors Fault Current greater than 1 6 A 7 90 80 greater than 1 6 A Z 170 21P2 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor the following element for pickup 21P2 Zone 2 Pickup 2 Apply the following 3 phase voltages to the relay main ac V terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 37 4 V Z 152 5 Ph C 332 37 4 V Z 152 5 P
85. A To SX CHL CNL OOOO e e a BG eemOMOOOOOOOOOOOO S m ma G B GB eT OO eOOOOOOOOOO OB BS e e e mse OLD OOO OO XOOOD OS 8 ma e M BO reece MmMeBTIOOOOOOOOXOOOO0 8 GB Ma G B tarts Lee ee ne nen e we wewat aa aaa M OO Froe conj O O0 0 000 00 00 20 0 0 0 KA0 00 0 MA A DM GB Tortor Device zarm D EBXOOOOOOOOOD D 0 O B X O C _ Taget 22T m E E Oxon onnan a OO eT 7SaTPRIBGBOOX OOOOOOOD D 0O O M O C Tegete zT A B Oxon B 1x age 7STPIDBBOOOOX OOOOO0 0 O Og O O oe 7A OB OO a0g0n0n0 8 OMD am armiOOBOOOOOOOOO0OO00 0 0S OO O Aemeo wmam miBOBOUOUUDODUUOOO oO Oa uo U 7AmiOGOOOOOOOO0O0OOO0D 0 Ola OO OC tone MeO oa popopoppongoooe oanp o p 21N2 Trip Target LED 2 asm m OBOUDODOUDODDDD DOB o o oO w MmMmODOOOOOOOOOOOO0 0 O O O OO O Jrearetten2 asTe B D ODOT 8 0 070 per aaemOFOOOOOOOOOOOO0 0 O 0wa OO OF Asmuo 2A 0 A A OOOODOOODODO O 0 0 8 0 0 0 Aento Mm OOOOOOOOOOOO0O0 0 O OO O O OF Absrmtep 25A BROOOODOOOO OOO 0 0 BO OO ee aassmerek FRR a a aMMa BOB B B G B GB zr 27 Man Undervotage EF O D RRREROBRBEREAEAA BG B G B B GD ston 27 Aux Undervotae M HERE RBEREERRRERAL SESE OB B B G B GB ktore 59 Main 1 Overvotage M A D A D AAAA BBB B B GD stone 59 Main 2 Overvotage M GHORRREEEEBREEE E M MMMM Gi stone S9 Aux 1 Overvotage M A D A A AAAA MAMM M MMMM GB o SJAuw 20vervotage m A D A A AAMA AAM M MMMM GB o SNF Te M M MMMM M MMMM GB i o Sm oF aem A A A MMMM M MMMM OQ Ree SVPIHOBBEEBEEEEEEEGEEBE
86. A phsA cVal mag f 21P1 phase A fault current magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21P1 phase A fault current angle D21P1MMXU1 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21P1 phase B fault current magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21P1 phase B fault current angle D21P1MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21P1 phase C fault current magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal ang f 21P1 phase C fault current angle L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 63 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 64 D21P2MMXU2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P2MMXU2 Data Name Description D21P2MMXU2 MxX Hz mag f 21P2 fault frequency D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21P2 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21P2 phase A voltage angle D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21P2 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21P2 phase B fault voltage angle D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21P2 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21P2 phase C fault voltage angle D21P2MMXU2 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21P2 phase A fault current magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21P2 phase A fault current angle D21P2MMXU2 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21P2 phase B fault current magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21P2 phase B fault current angle D21P2MM
87. APA If configurable 1 1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 1 1 Device Function O Master O Master Outstation Outstation 1 1 2 Vendor Name ERLPhase Power Technolo gies 1 1 3 Device Name L PRO 4000 1 1 4 Device manufacturer s NA hardware version string 1 1 5 Device manufacturer s NA software version string 1 1 6 Device Profile V1 3 Oct 21 Document Version 2014 Number 1 1 7 DNP Levels Supported Outstations Only for Requests and Responses None Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 1 1 8 Supported Function Self Address Reservation Blocks Object 0 attribute objects Data Sets File Transfer Virtual Terminal Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in a DNP3 XML file 1 1 9 Notable Additions e Start stop qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01 limited quantity qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08 and indi ces qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28 for Binary In puts Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs object groups 1 10 and 30 e 32 bit and 16 bit Analog Inputs with and without flag variations 1 2 3 and 4 Analog Input events with time variations 3 and 4 e Fault Location information as analog readings e Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and 111 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 1 Device Identification 1 1 10 Methods to set Configurable Parameters Capabilities XML Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer XML Loaded via
88. Address Fixed at 1 L PRO Offliner Configurable range 1 to 65519 Configurable selectable from i Configurable other describe 1 4 2 DNP3 Source Address Never Validation Always one address allowed shown in 1 4 3 Always any one of multiple addresses allowed each selectable as shown in 1 4 3 Sometimes explain 1 4 3 DNP3 Source Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA Address es expected Address value when Validation is Configurable range to Enabled Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 4 4 Self Address Support Yes only allowed if configurable NA using address OxFFFC BK No 1 4 5 Sends Confirmed User Always L PRO Offliner Data Frames Sometimes explain to disable set Never Data Link Time K Configurable either always or never out to 0 1 4 6 Data Link Layer None 500 Confirmation Timeout Fixed at __ ms Configurable range 0 to 2 000 ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 4 7 Maximum Data Link Never Retries 3 Retries K Fixed at3 Configurable range to Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 4 8 Maximum number of kK Fixed at 292 292 octets Transmitted in a Configurable range to Data Link Frame Configurable selectable from i Configurable other describe 1 4 9 Maximum number of k Fixed at 292 292 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in a Data Link Configurable selectable from
89. Alpha 179 90 to 180 00 Beta 0 10 to 360 00 Phase Setting Multiplier for Single Phase Open Pole Condition 46 50 Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 46 50 Pickup Time Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 46 51 Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 46 51 Pickup Time Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 The relay provides an adaptive additional time delay maximum 16 ms re sponse to the 50 O C elements to prevent operation during RFI testing with minimal pickup set points and operation near pickup This adaptive delay is applied to SOLS 1 SOLS 2 5OLS 3 50LS 4 50 50N 46 50 If the Pickup Delay setting Tp lt 20ms AND Pickup Level setting lt I ominai nominal current an extra 8 ms delay is added After this 8 ms timer expires if I lt threshold the second 8ms extra delay will be added in addition to the original Tp If I gt threshold after the first 8ms timer expires only Tp is used for the delay Note Tp is the setting which is less than 20ms could be Oms The threshold is equal to 2 PickupLevel if pickup is between 40 J jming and Tnominal i between 2 A and 5 A for 5 ACT The threshold is equal to 40 Lominal if 2 PickupLevel lt 40 J omingj The threshold is equal to 7 om inal 1f 2 PickupLevel gt L j minal L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 45 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Z Circle Trigger Fault Locator 4 46 Figure 4 25 Z Circle Trigger Table 4 26 Z Circle Tri
90. Appendix A 10 and rate of change settings The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact operate time Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz Time Delay Error 0 2s 1 Hz s e 0 1 Hz s 90 10 Hz s Delay error ms Hz s Pickup Multiple Figure A 4 Time delay Error at 0 2 seconds Time Delay Error 1s 0 1 Hz s m 1 Hz s 10 Hz s Time Delay Error ms Ss amp a Multiple of Hz s Pickup Figure A 5 Time Delay Error at 1 second L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications Time Delay Error 10s 195 180 165 150 135 120 105 00 1 Hz s a1 Hz s Time Delay Error ms Multiple of Hz s Pickup Figure A 6 Time Delay Error at 10 seconds D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 11 A 3 External Input Pickup Filter To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses an external input pickup filter setting has been introduced This setting is made in Relay Control Panel under Utilities gt Setup gt External Inputs The setting is an integer number rep resenting the number of samples in a packet of 12 that must be recognized by the DSP as high before an External Input status is changed from low to high This will affect the p
91. Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings Figure H 2 Rear Panel 4U 4A previously 4U Chassis L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix H 2 Appendix AC Schematic Drawings uo1 99 0d aul 104 pasn sjndu eyoa Oy urew uoNoe OId JapUN aAO pue dUAs aul 104 pasn s ndu abeyjoA xny OV sjualINo OY 19470 Bulpsooe uoesuadwos jenjnwW 104 pasn aq ued p pue s ndu 19 E suoyeol dde snq Bul 104 s uasind u JO JaS PUODAS 104 p sn aq ued z syndu 19 Z aul p 429 01d y Jo Bu p 03 1 104 pue UO Da 0 d 104 pasn aq 0 s ndu 19 4 S JON SIOA OV SOA OV sindu juano 9y sju uno eury sqyueuing sun uen xny v ndul 19 ndul 19 ov xny ov ule ECC Zee lee OEE 6ZE_ 8ZE ZZE 92e SZE Pe EZE ZZE LZE OZE GLE Sle Lie Oe SLE ple ELE ZLE LLE OLE 60E 80E 40E 90E goe toe EOE ZOE LOS 00E Lplp HH I asg vsa oe a u17 P8 9 01d sues sul s19 eur Y V PRO AC Schematic Figure 1 1 L Appendix l 1 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawings 5A Supply ii Relay Standard Output Relay Contacts All Chassis Inoperative 200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 28 4336 NC Out Out us Qua Outs O6 Out us uta Otto out Outta Touts outa 201 208 205 207 209 an bas 215 217 219 pat 223 25 faz 229 Power y Supply Alam f 7 Optional Output Relay Contacts 4U Ch
92. Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 40 Common Data Class Definitions The definition tables for each of the Common Data Classes used in the Logical Node definitions are presented in the following sub sections From an application point of view the data attributes of a Common Data Class are classified according to their specific use The characterization of data attri butes and the services that they support provide will be through the use of Functional Constraints The Functional Constraints are specified by the table below FC Name Semantic Source Definition BR Buffered Reports IEC 61850 7 2 CF Configuration IEC 61850 7 2 CO Control IEC 61850 7 2 DC Description IEC 61850 7 2 EX Extended Definition IEC 61850 7 2 GO GOOSE Control IEC 61850 7 2 GS GSSE Control UCA2GOOSE IEC 61850 7 2 LG Logging IEC 61850 7 2 MS Multicast Sampled Value Control IEC 61850 7 2 MX Measurands Analogue Values IEC 61850 7 2 RP Unbuffered Reports IEC 61850 7 2 SE Setting Group Editable IEC 61850 7 2 SG Setting Group IEC 61850 7 2 SP Set Point IEC 61850 7 2 ST Status information IEC 61850 7 2 SV Substitution Values IEC 61850 7 2 US Unicast Sampled Value Control IEC 61850 7 2 XX Data Attribute Service Parameters IEC 61850 7 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class DPL_2_PhyNam Description Standard Device
93. Device 27 V1 Pickup 51 0 vV 0 0 to 69 0 Device 59 3V0 Pickup 5 0 V 0 0 to 100 0 Zone2 Zone4 Reset Delay 0 10 s 0 02 to 0 20 TWD1 Comm Cycle Reset Delay 0 05 s 0 02 to 0 20 TWD2 Comm Reset Time Delay TWD3 0 15 s 0 02 to 1 00 25 27 59 Sync Check 25 Sync Check Disabled Maximum Voltage 70 0 V 60 0 to 138 0 Minimum Voltage 40 0 vV 40 0 to 69 9 Angle Difference 20 0 deg 1 0 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 10 s 0 00 to 10 00 Frequency Difference Disabled Frequency Difference 0 000 Hz 0 010 to 2 000 Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Disabled Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Disabled Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Disabled 79 3Ph Recloser 79 3Ph Disabled Number of Shots 1 First Reclose T1 1 0 s 0 1 to 999 9 Second Reclose T2 5 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Third Reclose T3 10 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Fourth Reclose T4 20 0 s 1 0 to 999 9 Close Time Tp 0 2 s 0 1 to 1 0 Lockout Reset TD 25 0 s 0 1 to 999 9 Initiate Reset TDI 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 Sync Control Disabled Recloser Mode Main Only Block Reset TDB 0 1 s 0 0 to 999 9 Follower Time TF 5 0 s 0 0 to 24 9 Breaker Out of Service TC 50 0 s 0 0 to 999 9 Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 79 1Ph Recloser 79 1Ph Disabled Number of Shots 1 Reclose T1 1 0 0 1
94. FaultData D59M2MMXU20 Measurement 59 2 59 2 Main fault voltages FaultData DSCHMMXU11 Measurement Distance scheme fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData DSCHMSQI6 Measurement Distance scheme Zero Sequence current FaultData DSCHRFLO11 Measurement Distance scheme fault locator Protection CBFIRBRF5S Breaker failure BFI Breaker Failure Initiation Protection D21P1PDIS1 Distance 21P1 Zone 1 phase Protection D21P2PDIS2 Distance 21P2 Zone 2 phase Protection D21P3PDIS3 Distance 21P3 Zone 3 phase Protection D21P4PDIS4 Distance 21P4 Zone 4 phase Protection D21P5PDIS5 Distance 21P5 Zone 5 phase Protection D21N1PDIS7 Distance 21N1 Zone 1 ground Protection D21N2PDIS8 Distance 21N2 Zone 2 ground Protection D21N3PDIS9 Distance 21N3 Zone 3 ground Protection D21N4PDIS10 Distance 21N4 Zone 4 ground Protection D21N5PDIS11 Distance 21N5 Zone 5 ground Protection LodEncPDIS6 Distance Load Load Encroachment Block Encroachment Protection D2527RSYN1 Synchronism check 25 27 59 Sync Check or synchronising Protection D27AuxPTUV2 Undervoltage 27 27 Auxiliary Trip Protection D27MnPTUV1 Undervoltage 27 27 Main Trip Protection D50BF1RBRF1 Breaker failure 50BF Main 1 Trip Protection D50BF2RBRF2 Breaker failure 50BF Main 2 Trip Protection D50BF3RBRF3 Breaker failure 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip Protection D50BF4RBRF4 Breaker failure 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip Protection D50LS1PI0C1 Instantaneous Over 50LS 50LS Main Trip current Protection D50LS2PIOC2 Instantaneous Over 50LS 50LS Aux
95. Function Logic Diagram Single Phase 3 Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme With this scheme setting the relay will trip and reclose a single phase for an initial Single Phase fault and will trip and reclose for a Three Phase or multi phase fault Only one attempt to reclose will occur if the fault is permanent in nature before lockout will occur If sufficient time takes place between the first fault and subsequent new line faults as determined by the TD4 and TD5 dropout times the protection will try to keep the line in service by tripping and reclosing the line as required It should be noted that the relay has two types of reclosers a single phase type 79 1 and a 3 phase type 79 3 recloser The single phase recloser has only one shot determined by timer T1 This time delay applies for both the Single Phase Scheme and for the Single Phase Three Phase Scheme settings The 3 phase recloser has a common setting for the first reclose of the Three Phase or the Single Phase Three Phase Trip and Reclose Schemes L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Summary of Trip and Reclose Schemes 59 Main Auxiliary Overvoltage D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Three Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting Provides 3 phase tripping for any type of line fault with up to four 4 shots of reclosure possible Single Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting This scheme allows one shot of trip and reclose if the fault is sin
96. General indication binary input Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind14 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind15 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind16 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind17 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind18 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind19 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind20 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 33 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 34 Logical Node GGIO4 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy General indicatio
97. Help Spare 2 0UT2 Open 52 2 Close 52 C5 I3 Low 52 2 a Status PL4 High Spare 2 0UT2 Closed 1 03 44 52 2 Close 52 CS VI3 High 2010aug03 7 03 42 Spare 1 0UT1 Open 2010aug03 2 03 42 52 1 Close 52 CS5 VI1 Low 2010aug03 7 03 41 52 1 a status PL2 High Spare 1 0UT1 Closed 52 1 Close 52 CS I1 High Erase Print Main Menu Contig Mar Metering Utilities Events Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L483 Getting Events 7 Figure L 32 52 1 a status High and 52 2 a status High L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 17 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 10 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select Manual 79 I using the Pulse On action for the Virtual Input 6 This will initiate the recloser but no action will be taken because the circuit breakers remain closed Z Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities Eile Help Control Virtual Inputs Virtual Input 6 aa Latch Off Latch On 14 4 gt Ph Unit Identification Extemal Input A Virtual Inputs Main Menu Config Mar Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Events 7 Figure L 33 Pulse On Manual 79 11 Check the event log and confirm there was no reclosure action E Relay 4000 Control Panel Events Ce File Edit View Help Manual 79 I6 Low 79 3Ph Initiated High Manual 79 VI6 High Spare 2 0UT2 Open 52 2 Close 52 C5 VI3 Low 52 2 a Status PL4 High 2 03 44 Spare 2 0UT
98. LCD contrast impaired for temperatures below 20 C and above 70 C Humidity Up to 95 without condensation IEC 60068 2 30 Insulation Test Hi Pot Power supply analog inputs external inputs output contacts 2 kVrms 50 60 Hz 1 minute IEC 60255 5 ANSI IEEE C37 90 Electrical Fast Transient Tested to level 4 4 0 kV 2 5 5 kHz on Power and I O lines ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 IEC EN 60255 22 4 IEC 61000 4 4 Oscillatory Transient Test level 2 5kV ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 IEC EN 60255 22 1 IEC61000 4 12 Level 3 RFI Susceptibility 10 V m modulated 35 V m unmodulated ANSI IEEE C37 90 2 IEC 60255 22 3 IEC 61000 4 3 Level 3 Conducted RF Immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz IEC 60255 22 6 IEC 61000 4 6 Level 3 Shock and Bump 5g and 15g IEC 60255 21 2 IEC EN 60068 2 27 Class 1 Sinusoidal Vibration 1g 10 Hz to 150 Hz 1 0 octave min 40 sweeps IEC EN 60255 21 1 IEC EN 60068 26 Class 1 Voltage Interruptions 200 ms interrupt IEC 60255 11 IEC 61000 4 11 rack mount x 32 8 cm depth 4U chassis 17 7 cm x 48 3 cm x 32 8 cm Physical Weight 3U chassis 10 3 kg 22 6 Ibs 4U chassis 11 9 kg 26 2 Ibs Dimensions 3U chassis 13 2 cm height x 48 26 cm width 5 2 height x 19 width rack mount x 12 9 depth 6 93 x 19 x 12 9 Time Synchronization and Accuracy D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 3 Appendix A IED Speci
99. Low 2010Aug03 2 19 01 79 3Ph Initiated High 52 l1Trip PL1 High 52 2 Trip PL3 High Spare 4 0UT4 Closed Spare 3 0UT3 Closed 52 1 52 2 Trips79 I5 High 52 1 a status PL2 High TP Start PL9 Low TP End PL10 High TP Start PL9 High Print Main Menu Config Mar Metering Utilities Events Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Events 4 Figure L 38 79 3Ph Lead lockout event log 21 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Close 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will close breaker 52 1 and after a fixed delay of TD seconds the recloser will reset Communication aided Tripping Schemes L PRO 1 L PRO 2 Figure L 39 Current Reversal Logic example Appendix L 22 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Current The relays are installed and provide line protection by the tripping Breaker 1 Reversal Log IC and Breaker 2 respectively A ground fault occurs at location F in the parallel Exam ple line Initially 21N2 of L PRO 2 picks up and sends a permissive transfer trip signal to L PRO 1 Since L PRO 1 detects a reverse fault 21N4 picks up it neither trips the breaker nor sends a permissive transfer trip signal When breaker 3 opens due to a zone trip the current reversal condition occurs on L PRO 1 If the 21P2 on L PRO 1 operates and if the received permissive transfer trip signal from L PRO 2 still
100. New Relay Choose Communication gt Direct Serial Link Hit Get Information From Relay Then RCP will communicate with the LPRO 4000 and retrieve in formation to fill required fields When this is done hit Save Relay If the window Relay already exists pops up you may need to re name the relay changing the Relay Name in the Relay Definition category before saving After first time in Select Relay choose relay and hit Connect In Relay Password Prompt Choose desired access level enter appropriate password Note Default passwords are listed below remove the quotation marks View Access view Change Access change Service Access service The basic structure of the Relay Control Panel information including basic actions available is given below L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 9 Table 3 5 Relay Control Panel Structure View Change Service Relay Control Panel Records Trigger Fault Trigger Fault Trigger Swing Trigger Swing Trigger Event Trigger Event Faults Erase Erase Events Erase Erase Metering Analog Line External Logic 1 Logic 2 ProLogic Outputs Group Logic Virtual Utilities Unit Identification Communication Time Analog Input Calibration N A N A External Input Virtual Inputs N A Latch Pulse Latch Pulse
101. Numerics 21P phase distance 4 1 25 27 59 sync check 4 38 46 50 51 67 negative sequence overcurrent 4 44 50 51 67 phase overcurrent 4 40 50BF breaker failure 4 38 50LS low set overcurrent 4 40 50N 51N 67 neutral overcurrent 4 43 6 26 59 overvoltage 4 29 60 loss of potential 4 46 6 26 68 out of step 4 46 79 recloser 4 25 81 frequency 4 36 81 over under frequency 6 26 A ac and dc wiring 8 1 Alarm 3 3 analog input 6 11 B backward compatibility 6 6 Base MVA 6 15 Baud rate direct serial link 2 13 modem link 2 13 Cc calibrate 7 2 calibration 7 2 circuit breaker simulator L 13 communication direct serial link 2 6 modem link external 2 7 modem link internal 2 8 network link 2 9 relay 2 2 communication aided scheme 4 50 L 22 creating a setting file from an older version 6 7 CT turns ratio 6 15 D DCB logic 4 54 dead line pickup 4 21 display 3 4 E external input 6 12 L PRO 4000 User Manual Index F fault locator 4 46 Front display 3 1 front display 3 2 3 4 Front view 3 1 G grounding 2 1 group logic 4 48 6 27 L 8 H HyperTerminal 2 9 l identification 6 10 inputs external 1 5 IRIG B time 2 2 IRIG B 3 2 IRIG B time input 2 2 L LED lights 3 2 line parameters 6 21 M maintenance 2 17 maintenance menu 2 17 mho characteristic shapes 4 3 7 6 phase and ground 4 2 modem link 2 13 O Offliner settings 3 1 6 1 output contact 6 12 output matrix 6 28 output relay con
102. Offliner Settings Software 6 26 Protection Functions I Zone3 Zones I Zones 25 27 59 Sync Check 25 Syne Check Dead Main Live Aux Live Main Dead Aux Dead Main Dead Aux Protection Functions 27 Undervoltage O Z Crete Trigger Pian F ax ProLogic 3 Group Logic Overvotage Output Matrox wi C Settings Summary I Maint I Aux 1 BL Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 F Man 2 I Aux 2 SH Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 O Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 C Seng Group 5 Setting Group S L PRO Offliner Settings v407 SOLS Low Set Overcurrent I Main input 1 mput3 I Aux nput 2 F nps SOBF Breaker Failure I Main Aux 50 51 Phase Overcurrent F so rs SON S1N Neutral Overcurrent F son F sN 46 50 46 51 57 Neg Seq Overcurrent F 46 50 F 46 51 81 Over Under Frequency forr x 88 Power Swing Block Trip I Switch On To Fautt T Wi Weak infeed I 60 Loss of Potential T 79 3Pn Reclser r S9N Zero Sequence OverVoltage I inverse Time Delay I Definte Time Delay Setting Group 1 Figure 6 21 Protection Functions For a detailed description see Protection Functions and Specifications on page 4 1 ProLogic L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 J File Edit Window Help Djsjal sjeli fe C SONISING7 a 466081067 ProLogic 1 Show Line Breaker C Z Circle Trigger ProLogic E PL 1 Show Line Bre CPL 2 ProLogic 2 C
103. Output Contact 10 OCGGIO4 ST Ind11 stVal Output Contact 11 OCGGIO4 ST Ind12 stVal Output Contact 12 OCGGIO4 ST Ind13 stVal Output Contact 13 OCGGIO4 ST Ind14 stVal Output Contact 14 OCGGIO4 ST Ind15 stVal Output Contact 15 OCGGIO4 ST Ind16 stVal Output Contact 16 OCGGIO4 ST Ind17 stVal Output Contact 17 OCGGIO4 ST Ind18 stVal Output Contact 18 OCGGIO4 ST Ind19 stVal Output Contact 19 OCGGIO4 ST Ind20 stVal Output Contact 20 OCGGIO4 ST Ind21 stVal SChAImGGIOS5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node SChAlmGGIOS Output Contact 21 Data Name Description L PRO 4000 User Manual SChAlmGGIO5 ST ind stVal Self Check Fail Alarm Appendix N 103 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 104 LEDGGIO10 This section defines logical node data for the logical node LEDGGIO10of the logical device System Data Name Description LEDGGIO10 ST Ind1 stVal Target LED 1 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind2 stVal Target LED 2 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind3 stVal Target LED 3 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind4 stVal Target LED 4 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind5 stVal Target LED 5 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind6 stVal Target LED 6 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind7 stVal Target LED 7 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind8 stVal Target LED 8 State LEDGGIO10 ST Ind9 stVal Target LED 9 State LEDGGIO1
104. Output Contact Names Output 1 Out Spare 1 Output 2 Out Spare 2 Output 3 Out Spare 3 Output 4 Out Spare 4 Output 5 Out Spare 5 Output 6 Out Spare 6 Output 7 Out Spare 7 Output 8 Out Spare 8 Output 9 Out Spare 9 Output 10 Out Spare 10 Output 11 Out Spare 11 Output 12 Out Spare 12 Output 13 Out Spare 13 Output 14 Out Spare 14 Output Contact Dropout Timers L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Output1 Out Spare 1 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output2 Out Spare 2 0 10 0 00 to 1 00 Output3 Out Spare 3 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output4 Out Spare 4 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output5 Out Spare 5 0 10 0 00 to 1 00 Output6 Out Spare 6 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output7 Out Spare 7 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output8 Out Spare 8 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output9 Out Spare 9 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output10 Out Spare 10 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output11 Out Spare 11 0 10 0 00 to 1 00 Output12 Out Spare 12 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output13 Out Spare 13 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Output14 Out Spare 14 0 10 s 0 00 to 1 00 Virtual Input Names VI 1 Virtual Input 1 VI 2 Virtual Input 2 VI 3 Virtual Input 3 VI 4 Virtual Input 4 VI5 Virtual Input 5 VIG Virtual Input 6 VI7 Virtual Input 7 VI 8 Virtual Input 8 VI 9 Virtual Input 9 VI 10 Virtual Input 10 VI 1
105. PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 55 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation N 3 Data Mapping Specifications L PRO Logical L PRO logical device identifications Device L PRO 4000 has the following IEC 61850 logical devices defined in its ICD file e Measurements FaultData Protection e System e VirtualInputs L PRO logical nodes Table N 19 L PRO Logical Nodes defines the list of logical nodes LN for the L PRO logical devices Note System logical nodes group L are not shown here Table N 19 L PRO Logical Nodes LD Name LN Name LN Description Protection Comments Function Measure MAINMMXU1 Measurement Main channel metering data ments Total Active Power Total Reactive Power Total Apparent Power Average Power Factor Frequency Phase voltages Phase currents Phase active power Phase reactive power Phase apparent power Phase power factor Phase impedances Measure MAINMSQI1 Measurement Main channel sequence voltage and current ments Measure AUXMMXU2 Measurement Auxiliary channel metering data ments e Phase voltages Phase currents FaultData D21N1MMXU6 Measurement 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault frequency voltages and currents Appendix N 56 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Fau
106. Phase A to a ground fault Preliminary calculations Since this is a single phase test use the compensated impedance value calcu lated above the calculated fault impedance Zy is 29 V fault 29 he g lt Jau I fault 7 22 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide The minimum single phase current required is Remember Testing single phase so need to exceed the greater of J pqse and 3I supervision settings add 5 to ensure the minimum supervision logic is high for this test 30 Imin Greater of Zphase and 32 Supervision x 105 1 5x1 05 1 584 This element has been set for Quadrilateral characteristic 21N2 Reactive Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 21N2 Zone 2 Pickup 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect single phase current source to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 1 58 A Z 76 5 Observe 21N2 Pickup Low 4 Reduce Phase A voltage At 17 4 to 19 2 V expect 18 3 V 21N2 Pickup High After 400 ms 21N2 Trip High 21N2 Resistive Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 21N2 Zone 2 Pickup 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B
107. Profile 170 27 Aux A Trip Inactive Active 171 27 Aux B Trip Inactive Active 172 27 Aux C Trip Inactive Active 173 59 1 Main A Trip Inactive Active 174 59 1 Main B Trip Inactive Active 175 59 1 Main C Trip Inactive Active 176 59 1 Aux A Trip Inactive Active 177 59 1 Aux B Trip Inactive Active 178 59 1 Aux C Trip Inactive Active 179 50LS Main A Inactive Active 180 50LS Main B Inactive Active 181 50LS Main C Inactive Active 182 50LS Aux A Inactive Active 183 50LS Aux B Inactive Active 184 50LS Aux C Inactive Active 185 81 1 OF Trip Inactive Active 186 81 1 UF Trip Inactive Active 187 81 1 FRC Trip Inactive Active 188 81 2 OF Trip Inactive Active 189 81 2 UF Trip Inactive Active 190 81 2 FRC Trip Inactive Active 191 81 3 OF Trip Inactive Active 192 81 3 UF Trip Inactive Active 193 81 3 FRC Trip Inactive Active 194 81 4 OF Trip Inactive Active 195 81 4 UF Trip Inactive Active 196 81 4 FRC Trip Inactive Active 197 21P5 Trip Inactive Active 198 21N5 Trip Inactive Active 199 21P5 Alarm Inactive Active 200 21N5 Alarm Inactive Active 201 59N Def Trip Inactive Active 202 59N Inv Trip Inactive Active 203 59N Def Alarm Inactive Active 204 59N Inv Alarm Inactive Active 205 60 CTS Main Inactive Active Appendix F 18 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profi
108. Quadri Mho Quadri Mho Quadri Mho Quadri Mho Quadri lateral lateral lateral lateral lateral Forward Impedance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Both Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Forward Reactance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Quadrilateral Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Reverse Impedance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Both Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Reverse Reactance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Quadrilateral Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Left Reach R1 Ohms 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 Quadrilateral secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 5 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 1 21P Phase Distance Element Settings
109. Right Reach R2 Ohms 0 05 to 66 00 0 05to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05to66 00 Quadrilateral secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Mho Characteristic Angle 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 Mho degrees Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 Both Id Supervision A second 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 Both ary 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A Line Angle degrees 5 0 to 89 0 Setting is made in Line Parameters Positive Sequence Angle Load Impedance Ohms R Ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 Both X Ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 Both Load Encroachment Enable Disable Both LHS Impedance Ohms sec 0 01 to 66 0 5 A Both ondary 0 05 to 330 0 1 A Upper angle degrees 90 1 to 179 9 Both Lower angle degrees 180 1 to 269 9 Both RHS Impedance Ohms sec 0 01 to 66 0 5 A Both ondary 0 05 to 330 0 1 A Upper angle degrees 0 1 to 89 9 Both Lower angle degrees 0 1 to 89 9 Both Table 4 2 21N Ground Distance Element Settings Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa ble ble ble ble ble Characteristic Type Mho Quadri Mho Q
110. SeqA Positive Negative and Zero Sequence Current Seqv SEQ_4 SeqA Positive Negative and Zero Sequence Current Logical Node GGIO1 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIit Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 31 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 32 Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind14 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind15 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind16 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind17 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind18 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind19 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind20 SPS_1
111. Sequence Impedance Quantities 68 Inner Alarm Out 1 Zpos ___________ 68 Outer Alarm Enable Setting tf 164 50 Ipos 163 i 68 Block 50 310 d or 2 165 Out 2 tip Out 1 2l ELE Figure 7 22 Power Swing 68 Preliminary Calculations Because this is a Positive Sequence Impedance perform this test as balanced 3 phase since this is the easiest way to obtain positive sequence The calculat ed Z is 31 Z V Phase Sa I Phase where Z Fault Impedance V phase Phase Voltage IPhase Phase Current The minimum 3 phase current required must be greater than the Jj Supervision Setting 3 0 A Add 5 to ensure that the supervision is met 7 30 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 32 Lmin LiSupervision 105 3 0 x 1 05 3 154 where Tvin Minimum Current I 1Supervision Positive Sequence Supervision current setting 68 Outer Right Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 68 OutBlinder Alarm Contact 12 with an ohmmeter 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 3 15 A in phase with voltages to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 3 15 A 20 Ph B 302
112. Set Overcurrent Tests 7 42 3 Inject fault Observe Relay Target 46 51 Trip End of 46 51 test Settings Main e 50LS Pickup 1 0 A Time Delay 0 00 seconds SOBF Time Delay 1 5 0 seconds e SOBF Time Delay 2 10 0 seconds Auxiliary e 50LS Pickup 1 0 A Time Delay 0 00 seconds e 50BF Time Delay 1 5 0 seconds e 50BF Time Delay 2 10 0 seconds Input 3 e 50LS Pickup 0 3 A e Time Delay 1 00 second S50LS used with Virtual Input 3 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 3 Input 4 e 50LS Pickup 0 3 A e Time Delay 1 00 second S50LS used with Virtual Input 4 to make Breaker Fail for Breaker 4 Main and Aux Breaker Fails are set to be initiated via the Output Matrix from 50LS Pickup 1 0 A Main and Aux and 0 time delay Note Requires a mini mum of 0 2 A on any phase to arm Breaker Fail L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50BF Breaker Failure Main Enabled Protection Scheme 3 Phase 50BF Breaker Failure Initiation from the output matrix 50 1a gt Breaker Current Pick up 50 1b gt Breaker Current Pick up Pick up Delay 1 50 1c gt Breaker Current Pick up gt SOBF Main 1 Trip Pick up Delay 2 Main External A Phase 5OBF Initiation SOBF Main 2 Trip Main External B Phase SOBF Initiation Main External C Phase 50BF Initiation Protection Scheme 1 Phase Protection Scheme 1 3 Phase
113. Settings From a Record 22 ccccceceesseseeccreeeeeeeesessneees 6 30 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 1 PWC CHOI a Fe ction cane aaraa eaa yaad mechan tne Eoo ia naaa 7 1 Acceptance Testing 2 d sesteshotteaGarrohineanechosestessciettettetedent 7 1 L PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline 7 4 8 Installati n inaia iaa 8 1 Introd ctiONie nnan aeee aaa aAa A EAEE Aaa 8 1 Physical MOUMUNG lt a64 cece csasatdienatterctonandomecaetenatiaasadausecnates 8 1 AG and DC Wiring jaics eiccesisecoccvee aes seennsedenietausedtebaceue cere 8 1 Communication Wiring ieorscherecens erp ieatetiers shenacttecousu eo tenceass 8 1 Appendix A IED Specifications c eeeeeeeees A 1 Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal FROGQUGACY s enie A E Lan AE ENET TE AiE A 8 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves 5 A 10 External Input Pickup Filter ccccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 12 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 008 B 1 Settings and Ranges 2 c cc ceecceeceeseeeenteeeeneeeenveeseveceee B 1 Appendix C Hardware Description seee C 1 Appendix D Event Messages s seeeeeeeeeeees D 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol E 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile c cceee F 1 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings ee1ee G 1 viii L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50
114. Telephone Telephone Line Line Telephone System Figure 2 4 External Modem Link Desktop Computer Using an external modem access the relay s user interface through a telephone link between the relay and the computer Connect the serial port on the external modem to the Port 123 on the relay s rear panel Both devices are configured as RS 232 DCE devices with female connectors so the cable between the relay and the modem requires a crossover and a gender change Alternatively use the ERLPhase modem port adapter provided with the relay to make Port 123 appear the same as a PC s serial port A standard modem to PC serial cable can then be used to connect the modem and the relay For pin out details see Communication Port Details on page 2 15 Connect the modem to an analog telephone line or switch using a standard RJ 11 connector Configure the relay s Port 123 to work with a modem Log into the relay through Relay Control Panel go to Utilities gt Communication and select port 123 Set the Baud Rate as high as possible most modems handle 57 600 bps The Jnitialize setting allows the user to set the control codes sent to the modem at the start of each connection session The factory defaults are M0S0 0 amp B1 for an external modem and MO0S0 0 for an internal modem L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 7 2 Setup and Communications Internal 2 8 Analog Analog Port 118 RJ 11 modem Telephone Telephon
115. The MICS is conformant to the devices associated ICD IED Capability Description file according to part 6 of the IEC 61850 standards The layout of the presented tables within this document is confor mant to the part 7 series of the IEC 61850 standard specifications with the fol lowing exceptions The Trigger Options field is not presented The M O field is not present as the definitions are as deployed within the model e An additional column X is used to signify custom attributes Logical Device Definitions This IEC 61850 server device contains several Logical Devices Each Logical Device LD contains a data model built from instances of specific Logical Nodes LN and must consist of at least an instance of the LPHD Logical Node which is responsible for providing physical device information and an in stance of the LLNO Logical Node for addressing common issues across the Logical Device The IEC 61850 data model is contained within the Logical Devices detailed in the table below All LNs are categorized according to the following table to en sure that data model variables in them have respective scope of data informa tion Table N 18 Logical Devices Logical Device Comment Usage Protection Protection Domain FaultData Fault Data Domain Measurements Measurements Domain L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Table N 18 Logical Devices Sys
116. User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Phase Selector Criteria for lz and l The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase AG Fault AngleDiff_I2_I0_A lt 25 0 degrees BG Fault AngleDiff_I2_I0_B lt 25 0 degrees CG Fault AngleDiff_I2_I10_C lt 25 0 degrees Though AG type of fault will be declared for a BCG fault by the above angle criteria between J and Jp the characteristic of AG impedance prevents AG from tripping because the phase selector is used for supervision only i e the phase selector is not a tripping device Device 21P Supervision A 21P supervision logic is formed based on the above Phase Selector Criteria The phase to phase distance element is only allowed to operate if the faulted phase is not involved with the element 21P_AB Supervision Not AG Fault and Not BG Fault 21P_BC Supervision Not BG Fault and Not CG Fault 21P_CA Supervision Not CG Fault and Not AG Fault The Start of the Phase Selector The phase selector starts only when a fault occurs The start definition is if 310 is greater than the minimum of any enabled 21N zone s 3j9 supervision level setting begin the phase selector algorithm A buffer is used to track the pre trigger load current which is subtracted from the total current before checking the phase selector criteria During fault conditions the system frequency may change causing a drift in the angle difference bei
117. Using the IED Getting Started 3 1 Introduction This section provides information on the start up sequence and ways to inter face with the relay Descriptions of the Front Panel Display Terminal Mode and Metering Data are provided 3 2 Start up Sequence When the power supply is connected the following initialization initializing sequence takes place Table 3 1 Initialization Sequence TEST MODE red LED on when power applied RELAY FUNCTIONAL green LED on within 5 seconds after power applied TEST MODE red LED off then on within 10 seconds Front Display on on within 20 seconds after power applied TEST MODE red LED off within 20 seconds after power applied When the Relay Functional LED comes on it indicates that the DSP is actively protecting the system When the test mode LED goes off the relay is capable of recording and com municating with the user 3 3 Interfacing with the Relay The following ways can be used to interface with the relay e Front panel display e Terminal mode for maintenance and firmware upgrade e Relay Control Panel D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 1 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 4 Front Panel Display LED Lights 3 2 The front panel display of the IED allows the user to interact with the unit to obtain immediate system information User interface is provided through a graphical LCD screen LEDs and a push button keypad The level of
118. all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index ee ee 12 1 Binary Command Control relay 3 select 17 28 index 129 response Echo of request output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var Peer Function Codes oP Function Codes ie Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response T freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 29 response 00 04 start stop 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 29 response 00 04 start step 20 5 Counter 32 bit withoutflag 29 response 00 04 start stop 20 6 Counter 6 bit without flag 29 response 00 04 start step 21 0 Frozen Counter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag 29 response 00 04 start stop 21 2 Frozen Counter 6 bit with flag 29 response 00 04 _ start step 21 9 Frozen Counter 32 bit without flag 29 response 00 04 st
119. angle in lagging direction i e toward 0 At 21 to 19 difference expect 20 25 27 59 High Contact 10 Closed after 200 ms 7 Slowly ramp down the auxiliary voltage magnitude At 41 0 to 39 0 V expect 40 V 25 27 59 Low L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 49 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Contact 10 Open 8 Slowly ramp up the auxiliary voltage magnitude At 69 0 to 71 0 V expect 70 V 25 27 59 Low Contact 10 Open 8 Turn all voltage sources off End of Sync Check test 79 Recloser Settings Test e Number of Shots 4 First Reclose T1 2 0 seconds Second Reclose T2 4 0 seconds Third Reclose T3 6 0 seconds Fourth Reclose T4 8 0 seconds Close time Tp 0 3 second Lockout Reset TD 12 seconds Initiate Reset TDI 1 0 second Sync Control Enable Mode Main then Aux Block Reset TDB 1 0 seconds Follower Time TF 8 0 seconds Breaker Out Of Service TC 200 seconds Main Breaker EI Breaker Status a Aux Breaker EI2 Breaker Status a Follower Sequencer Close after Recloser Follower Time The following procedure allows the user to test the Main and Auxiliary 4 shot reclosers ending in 79 lockout The only test equipment required for this test is a 125 Vdc supply Output Contact 5 of the relay is used to simulate the Main Breaker a Contact and Output Contact 6 is used to simulate the Aux Breaker a Contact The Main Breaker Status is monitored by Ex
120. as 2 Configured Nominal Multiplier for voltage channels and as 40 Configured Nominal Multiplier for current channels see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions Appendix F 28 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 4 Octet String Points Static Steady State Group Number 110 Event Group Number 111 If configurable Capabilities amete Tictmethods 2 4 1 Event reporting mode Only most recent B All events 2 4 2 Octet Strings Included Always in Class 0 response B Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 4 3 Definition of Octet Fixed list shown in table below String Point List Configurable current list may be shown in table below Other explain Used for Event Log access as described below Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the Event Log text of the relay Object 110 always contains the most recent event in the relay Object 111 is the corresponding change event object As stated in the DNP specifications the variation of the response object repre sents the length of the string The string represents the ASCII values of the event text The first two characters in the string can be used to quickly identify fault location events Fault locator events begin with the characters FL 0x46 0x4C hex The following example shows a fault distance even
121. both measured and calculated analog values Table 3 4 Navigation of the LCD Screen Main Screen View Change Service Choice Menu Enter Password Main Menu V L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 3 Using the IED Getting Started Table 3 4 Navigation of the LCD Screen System V Relay Identification V Relay Comm Setup V Settings factory enabled C S System Parameters Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Metering V Analog v Analog Inputs V Line Quantities V External Inputs V Output Contacts V Logic V Logic Protections 1 V Logic Protections 2 V ProLogic V Group Logics v Virtual Inputs V Records V View Record List V Fault Recording C S Swing Recording C S Event Recording C S Fault Log Fault List Event Log v L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 5 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 6 Table 3 4 Navigation of the LCD Screen Event List Utilities V Setup v Timeouts V Time Settings V Set Manual Time V Set DST Time V External Inputs V Maintenance V Output Contacts Co
122. calibration and password Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor Exit port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 10 1 Current network configuration Port 119 MAC address 062105010431 Port 119 IP addres 192 168 180 45 Port 119 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Port 120 MAC address 0021A5010430 Port 120 IP addres 192 168 0 2 Port 120 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 1 IEC 61850 port 120 Do pon sant to change the IP address for port 119 fiiszooes 1 SCROLL CAPS MM Camtive ft echo Figure 5 7 Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 5 Data Communications Note that unit s IP address can be used on the IEC61850 client side for unique unit identification instead of a physical device PD Name The publisher con figuration is fixed and defined in the ICD file and available for reading to any IEC61850 client Subscriber functionality is also fixed and supported for the Virtual Inputs only L PRO 4000 User Manual 5 9 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 1 Introduction This section deals with the Offliner Settings software The Offliner settings software is used to create relay settings on a personal computer Offliner pro vides an easy way
123. compensation Series capacitor compensation End A 40 End B Capacitor located at the end of the line Enabled 40 Enabled 0 End A ang End B Capacitor located at the middle of the line Enabled 0 Enabled 0 Capacitance Coupled Voltage CCVT Transformer on 21 Devices D02706R02 50 When a fault occurs especially on a line with high source to impedance ratio SIR the CCVT secondary voltage can become quite different from the actual system voltage varying in both magnitude and phase due to the transient re sponse of the CCVT This transient response can cause device 21 overreach significantly A special CCVT transient compensation algorithm Patent Pend ing has been included in L PRO 4000 relay to address this issue The CCVT transient compensation algorithm uses a combination of techniques with digital filters vector averages and other means to rebuild the correct volt age from the transient distorted voltage waveforms This combination of tech niques provides a secure method for detecting and correcting CCVT transient phenomena On one hand it improves the reach accuracy of 21 devices dra matically during the period of the CCVT subsidence transient On the other hand it will not sacrifice the relay operation speed very much It does not add any additional delay when the SIR is low lt 1 2 In the worst case it adds about one cycle delay when the SIR is high gt 15 For the operation time det
124. element For all other faults the directional element will consider in order the negative sequence calculation the zero sequence calculation and the positive sequence calculation The directional element will only move from one calcu lation to the next calculation if insufficient sequence voltages and currents ex ist to make a valid calculation The negative sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured negative sequence impedance and the positive sequence line impedance angle entered in settings To perform this calculation the default minimum amount of negative sequence voltage required is 0 5 V secondary and the default min imum amount of negative sequence current required is 0 2 A secondary The zero sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured zero sequence impedance the zero sequence line impedance angle entered in settings To perform this calculation the default minimum amount of zero se quence voltage 3 required is 1 0 V secondary and the default minimum amount of zero sequence current 3 9 required is 0 2 A secondary D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 11 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Directional Element Outputs Directional Element Settings 4 12 The positive sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured positive sequence impedance based on measured current and the memory voltage output of the ring filter and the positive sequence line im
125. fault voltage angle D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 69 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D59AMMXU13 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59AMMXU13 Data Name Description D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 1 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 1 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 1 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 59 1 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 59 1 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude Appendix N 70 D59AMMXU13 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f D27MMMXU14 59 1 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node DZ7MMMXU14 Data Name Description D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 27 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 27 Main phase A voltage angle D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 27 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 27 Main phase B fault voltage angle D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 27 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude D27MMMXU14 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f D27AMMXUI15 27 Main phase C fault voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27AMMXU15 Dat
126. fiber optic port on the rear Port 120 located on the rear of the relay is available as an RJ 45 or ST fiber optic port DNP communications can be used with multiple masters when it is utilized with TCP For details on con necting to the Ethernet LAN see Network Link on page 2 5 L PRO 4000 User Manual 5 1 5 Data Communications SCADA Configuration and Settings 5 2 The data points available for DNP SCADA interface are user configurable Complete details regarding the DNP3 protocol emulation and data point lists can be found in DNP3 Device Profile in Appendix F The parameters for SCADA communications may be defined using L PRO 4000 Offliner If DNP3 LAN WAN communications were chosen the relay s network pa rameters need to be defined This is done via the Maintenance interface Note that this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to establish a network maintenance connection to the relay 1 Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance The fol lowing screen appears USB connection HyperTerminal He Edt Yew Cal Transfer Hel De s3 DOS E L PRO 4000 System Utility v1 0 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default c
127. field software updates e A control processor subsystem which manages the user interface and sys tem control features of the relay with e RAM and reprogrammable non volatile Flash memory Allows oper ation independent of the DSP processor and supports field software upgrades e Settings and recordings stored in non volatile memory e Runs a Real Time Operating System RTOS e Provides Ethernet ports and RS 232 ports for modem SCADA COM and USB interfaces e A time synchronism processor with automatic detection of modulated and un modulated IRIG B A high speed link is provided between the DSP and control processor sub systems Sophisticated fault detection and watchdog recovery hardware The MPB also provides the power supply for the entire unit The power supply operating range is 48 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz This wide operating range provides easier installation by eliminating pow er supply ordering options Digital Input This board provides 9 digital input channels Inputs are optically isolated ex Board DIB ternally wetted and factory preset to the customer s requested voltage level of 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc This board interfaces to the MPB D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix C 1 Appendix C Hardware Description Rear Panel Comm Board RPCB Output Contact Board LOCB Output Contact Board LOCBH Digital Input ole Board DIGIO Relay AC Analog Sensor Boards
128. for the logical node D5067MMXU18 Data Name 21N4 phase C fault current angle Description D5067MMXU18 MX A phsA cVal mag f 50 67 phase A fault current magnitude D5067MMXU18 MX A phsA cVal ang f 50 67 phase A fault current angle D5067MMXU18 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50 67 phase B fault current magnitude D5067MMXU18 MX A phsB cVal ang f 50 67 phase B fault current angle D5067MMXU18 MX A phsC cVal mag f 50 67 phase C fault current magnitude D5067MMXU18 MX A phsC cVal ang f D5167MMXU19 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D5167MMXU19 50 67 phase C fault current angle Data Name Description D5167MMXU19 MX A phsA cVal mag f 51 67 phase A fault current magnitude D5167MMXU19 MX A phsA cVal ang f 51 67 phase A fault current angle D5167MMXU19 MX A phsB cVal mag f 51 67 phase B fault current magnitude D5167MMXU19 MX A phsB cVal ang f 51 67 phase B fault current angle D5167MMXU19 MX A phsC cVal mag f 51 67 phase C fault current magnitude D5167MMXU19 MX A phsC cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual 51 67 phase C fault current angle D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D59M2MMXU20 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D99M2MMXU20 Data Name Description D59M2MMXU20 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 2 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude D59M2
129. general 59N Inverse Trip DTLPTOV6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DILPTOV6 Data Name Description DTLPTOV6 ST Str general SON DEF Alarm DTLPTOV6 ST Str dirGeneral 59N DEF Trip Direction set to unknown DTLPTOV6 ST Op general SON DEF Trip D68TrRPSB1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68TrRPSB1 Data Name Description D68TrRPSB1 ST Op general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B1RPSB2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B1RPSB2 Data Name Description D68B1RPSB2 ST Str general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B1RPSB2 ST Str dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction set to unknown D68B1RPSB2 ST BlkZn stVal 68 Zone 1 block Appendix N 94 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D68B2RPSB3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B2RPSB3 Data Name Description D68B2RPSB3 ST Str general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B2RPSB3 ST Str dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction set to unknown D68B2RPSB3 ST BlkZn stVal 68 Zone 2 block D68B3RPSB4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B3RPSB4 Data Name Description D68B3RPSB4 ST Str general 68 Power Swing Trip D68B3RPSB4 ST Str dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction set to unknown
130. if the user has selected the POTT scheme otherwise it is disabled If enabled the WI feature enhances the POTT tripping logic WI enables the POTT scheme to quickly isolate line faults where one end of the line has a high source of impedance During fault conditions where no weak source elements pick up the WI logic echoes back the permissive transfer trip signal received by the weak source If a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end AND 110 AND 111 and OR 115 echo a POTT signal back to the remote end The permissive transfer trip signal is required to last for durations greater than 20 ms A 3 ms time delay pickup and time delay dropout timer TWD2 determine the amount of time between permissive transfer trip receive signals that the scheme echoes back If the permissive transfer trip receive signal is constantly high the WI logic only echoes back for a time equal to TWD3 plus 3ms If the PT signal being received resets then starts up again after timer setting TWD2 a new per missive transfer trip signal echoes back The WI logic blocks when forward or reverse faults are detected the logic is also blocked for a loss of potential condition During a reverse or a forward fault condition the Zone 2 Zone 4 51N or SON 67 elements could pick up If any of these functions pick up they block the WI scheme by putting a high in put into inverted input of AND 110 The blocking condition is required last for L PRO 4000 Use
131. in service 4 1 Communication Aided Scheme 50 51N OC Carrier Trip and Block Logic The relay provides 4 communication aided tripping scheme options Permis sive Over Reaching Transfer Trip POTT a combination of POTT with Weak Infeed WI Directional Comparison Blocking DCB or Permissive Under Reaching Transfer trip PUTT are available to be used with external telecom munications devices for enhanced tripping of the protected line The combina tion of phase distance ground distance and neutral overcurrent elements provide flexible setting options for the selected communication aided tripping scheme Logic for 2 communication receivers can be used for 3 terminal lines or if the telecommunications use 2 separate communication channels The user can set the communications receivers to use one of 20 external inputs or one of the 24 ProLogic statements The same input cannot be shared between the 2 commu nication receivers The output matrix is used to configure the communications scheme send per missive trip or block and the communications scheme trip local tripping to any combination of the 21 available output contacts The user set dropout ex tension on output contacts is eliminated on any contact that is configured to op erate for the communication scheme send signal The user can provide the dropout time delay with timer setting TD3 The communications aided tripping scheme options use the general distance and overcu
132. interac tion and system access is controlled through a series of access level VIEW CHANGE and SERVICE with each requiring a unique password allowing dif fering levels of accessibility Additionally the IED front panel provides an RJ 45 Ethernet port and a USB Type B port used in general unit communications and controlled service access Display 16 LED Lights 6 Push Buttons USB Port 150 Ethernet Port 119 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display Table 3 2 Description of LED Lights Relay Functional Indicates when the relay is functional When the Relay Functional green LED goes on the rear Relay Inoperative contact changes to an open and the protective functions become functional IRIG B Functional Indicates the presence of a valid IRIG B time signal where the LED is on Service Required Indicates the relay needs service This LED can be the same state as the Relay Functional LED or can be of the opposite state depending on the nature of the problem The following items bring up this LED e DSP failure protection difficulties within the relay e Communication failure within the relay e Internal relay problems Test Mode Occurs when the relay output contacts are intentionally blocked Possible reasons are Relay initialization on startup e User interface processor has reset and is being tested The user cannot communicate with the relay through the ports until the front display becomes active and the TEST MO
133. is 90 degrees Determine this angle by drawing 2 lines from any point on the impedance locus to the di ameter of the characteristic Produce a tomato shaped characteristic by select ing an angle less than 90 degrees or a lens shaped characteristic with angles greater than 90 degrees 4 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Forward Directional Element Figure 4 3 Phase and Ground distance protection Quadrilateral Characteristics The shape of the Mho characteristic means that significant extensions are made to the relay characteristics in the R region of the R X plane for ground faults Restrict the reach in the R region for the phase distance relays where load en croachment is an issue The shaped Mho characteristic provides the best fit for the application keeping the number of relay settings at a minimum and pro vides the benefits associated with the Mho characteristic The Mho characteristic used by the relay is developed by the classical ap proach using the measurement of the angle between 2 vectors These vectors are defined as A IRZ yF 1 Erg 2 page KA Oly 3 where V is the actual line voltage for ground distance relays or the actual line to line voltage for the phase distance relay Iis defined as above for ground distance relays or the line to line current for phase distance relays Zset 1S the setting reach and Veris a positive sequence memory volt
134. negative sequence impedance zero sequence impedance or positive se quence impedance depending on relay settings and system conditions at the time of the fault The element declares a forward fault when the impedance de termined by the directional element is within 90 of the line impedance Forward Line Impedance Line Z Angle Figure 4 9 Fault Direction The directional element in the relay is always enabled The directional element actually consists of 3 separate internal elements a negative sequence element a zero sequence element and a positive sequence element The negative se quence and zero sequence elements use directly measured currents and voltag es The positive sequence element uses directly measured current and a memory voltage from the ring filter The sensitivity for the negative and zero sequence elements may be set by the user to correctly account for load condi tions and system configuration Both of these elements may be disabled as well The positive sequence element is always active L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Minimum Sensitivity Threshold oe Y Directional y Element gt Asserted EO gt Directional gt Element gt gt Valid Figure 4 10 Directional Element Logic For 3 phase faults the directional element will only use the positive sequence
135. node D4651MSQI10 Data Name Description D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f 46 51 Line Negative Sequence current magnitude D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f 46 51 Line Negative Sequence current angle D02706R02 50 D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f Not mapped D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f Not mapped D4651MSQI10 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped D21P1RFLO1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1RFLO1 Data Name Description D21P1RFLO1 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21P1 fault impedance magnitude D21P1RFLO1 MX FitZ cVal ang f 21P1 fault impedance angle D21P1RFLO1 MX FitDiskm mag f 21P1 fault distance D21P2RFLO2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P2RFLO2 Data Name Description D21P2RFLO2 MX FitZ cVal mag f 21P2 fault impedance magnitude D21P2RFLO2 MX FltZ cVal ang f 21P2 fault impedance angle D21P2RFLO2 MX FltDiskm mag f 21P2 fault distance L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 79 Appendix N 80 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21P3RFLO3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P3RFLO3 Data Name Description D21P3RFLO3 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21P3 fault impedance magnitude D21P3RFLO3 MX FltZ cVal ang f 21P3 fault impedance angle
136. of ground distance elements all 5 zones of 21N can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type Note that only one type can be used at a time The 21N can contain a mixture of Mho and Quadrilateral shapes for example the 21N1 and 21N2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and the 21N3 21N4 and 21N5 could be set to a Quadrilateral characteristic The Quadrilateral shape is parallel to the positive sequence line angle setting The user defined Mho Characteristic Angle is not selectable when a Quadrilat eral characteristic for that particular zone is defined All other settings are se lectable and user definable Top blinder of quadrilateral shape can be adjusted using Tilt Angle setting as shown in Figure 4 4 Mho Characteristic Shapes on page 4 4 Zones 3 4 and 5 reach can be set in either forward direction or reverse direction or offset as required All the distance functions are set in secondary ohms The available range of impedance settings is based on the nominal current specified when the relay was ordered The impedance reach ranges are given in Figure 4 1 Tilt Angle on page 4 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 1 4 Protection Functions and Specifications cerr ET Ft cals Tit angle Figure 4 1 Tilt Angle Figure 4 2 Phase and Ground distance protection Mho relay characteristic The shape of the phase and ground distance relays is adjustable For the circu lar Mho characteristic shape the characteristic angle
137. placed in the default directory C Program Files ERLPhase L PRO Offliner Settings or the user can choose the path during the Offliner software installation If an older ver sion of L PRO Offliner was previously installed on the PC then the default directory may be C Program Files APT L PRO Offliner Settings Open a sample file of the desired version Use File Save As to save the sample file to a new file name Then edit the setting file and the serial number save it and load it into the relay 39 66 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 7 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 5 RecordBase View Software A20793 2000 04 30_00 07 54a ih Sted Our a _ Ajsam Li Figure 6 4 RecordGraph Use RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a relay 1 Set the receive directory on the terminal program to point to a convenient directory on the PC s hard disk or network For example with HyperTer minal select Transfer gt Receive File to set the receive directory 2 Select one or more records on the relay using the List function in the Ter minal Mode s Records menu 3 Initiate transfer of the selected records by selecting R on the keyboard 4 Start the RecordBase View program and use the File gt Open menu command to open the downloaded record files located in the receive directory spec ified in step 1 For further instructions refer to the RecordBase View Manual a
138. point w o time Variation 6 double precision floating point w o time Variation 7 single precision floating point with time Variation 8 double precision floating point with time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 3 Event reporting mode Only most recent All events 2 3 4 Analog Inputs Included Always in Class 0 response Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 5 How Deadbands are A Global Fixed L PRO Offliner set B Configurable through DNP kK C Configurable via other means D Other explain Based on point Index column specifies which of the options applies B C or D 2 3 6 Analog Deadband BK Simple Algorithm Integrating simple just compares the difference from Other explain the previous reported value 2 3 7 Definition of Analog Fixed list shown in table below Complete list is L PRO Offliner Input Point List Configurable shown in the Other explain table below points excluded from the default configuration are marked with Appendix F 24 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec ondary voltage PT ratio for voltage channels and either 1 A or 5A secondary current CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT installed in the L PRO 3 Analog Inpu
139. ports 4 kV IEC EN 61000 4 5 Surge Communication ports 1 kV L PE IEC EN 60255 22 5 Signal ports 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L ac power port 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L dc power port 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L IEC EN 61000 4 6 Induced conducted RFI Signal ports 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 6 ac power port 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz dc power port 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz Earth ground ports 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 7 Power frequency Binary input ports Class A Differential 150 Vrms Common 300 Vrms Appendix A 6 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 4000 Specifications IEC EN 61000 4 8 Detailed Environmental Tests Magnetic leld Enclosure ports 40 A m continuous 1000 A m for 1 s IEC EN 61000 4 11 Voltage dips amp interrupts ac power port 30 for 1 period 60 for 50 periods 100 for 5 periods 100 for 50 peri ods dc power port 30 for 0 1 s 60 for 0 1 s 100 for 0 05 s IEC 60255 11 Voltage dips amp interrupts dc power port 100 reduction for up to 200 ms IEC EN 61000 4 12 Damped oscillatory Communication ports 1 0 kV Common 0 kV Diff IEC EN 60255 22 1 Signal ports 2 5 kV Common 1 kV Diff ac power port 2 5 kV Common 1 kV Diff dc power port 2 5 kV Common
140. selected initiation of the BFI column in the Output matrix will result in a 1 pole breaker fail ure initiation if a single phase trip by a protection function operates If a multi phase fault occurs a multi phase protection function will be initiated and the BF initiation will be a 3 pole breaker failure For this case all three poles of the breaker will be checked to see if they open correctly Breaker failure operation will result in 3 pole backup breaker tripping just like the single pole BF initiation 3 If the 1 3 Pole Scheme tripping option for the relay is selected the breaker failure initiation will be a combination of 1 and 2 above with single or three pole BF initiation as required by the fault detection The breaker failure function can also be initiated by an input to one of the ex ternal inputs from an outside protective relay or by a ProLogic input This input can be a phase segregated input that can come from a single pole trip from an external relay and is shown on the Scheme Selector screen The breaker failure logic uses a current detector that is user settable in the 50BF Setting screen to determine whether a pole is open or closed in the range of 0 1 50 A secondary There are two 2 breaker failure functions available per line breaker with adjustable pickup definite time delays from 0 01 to 99 9 seconds In any case the output of the Breaker Failure function must be set to close out put contacts to perform its fu
141. shot 1 event TP Close pulse time equals time from TP start PL9 event to TP end PL10 event TF Follow breaker time equals time from 52 1 a status PL2 event to 79 Au Auxiliary Reclose shot 1 event L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 19 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Figure L 36 Main and Aux Recloser operating sequence events Appendix L 20 Z Relay 4000 Control Panel Events File Edit View Help 52 2 a Status PL4 TP Start PL9 Low TP End PL10 High TP Start PL9 High TP End PL10 Low 79 3Ph Aux Reclose shot 1 52 1 a status PL2 TP Start PL9 Low TP End PL10 High TP Start PL9 High TP End PL10 Low 79 3Ph Main Reclose shot 1 R Spare 4 0UT4 Open Spare 3 0UT3 Open 52 1Trip PL1 Low 52 2 Trip PL3 Low 52 1 52 2 Trips79 VI5 52 1 a status PL2 52 2 a Status PL4 79 3Ph Initiated High 52 1Trip PL1 High 52 2 Trip PL3 High Spare 4 0UT4 Closed Spare 3 0UT3 Closed 2 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 VI5 Manual 79 VI6 Low Erase Main Menu Config Mgr Relay 4000 Control Panel Print Metering Utilities Current IED L43 14 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Trip 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 1 and after timer TC 52 2 follow breaker will move into the lead position 15 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79I
142. the relay contain static sensitive devices and are not user serviceable If the front of the relay is opened for any reason exposing the electronics take extreme care to ensure that the user and the relay are solidly grounded Generally an analog metering check as well as testing the I O External Inputs and Output Contacts is sufficient to ensure the functionality of the relay Fur ther tests can be performed on delivery and acceptance of the purchaser s op tion according to the published relay specifications in IED Settings and Ranges in Appendix B e 3 ac voltage sources variable frequency capability e 3 ac current sources e 1 ohmmeter 1 125 Vdc test supply L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 1 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Calibration Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A and nominal system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz This example uses 5 A 60 Hz The relay is calibrated before it leaves the factory but if component changes are made within the relay the user may need to do a re calibration Before beginning a new calibration establish the accuracy of the equipment being used To perform a calibration the user must be logged into the relay using Relay Control Panel at the Service access level to the front USB Port Proceed to the Utilities gt Analog Input Calibrate The Calibrate menu leads the user through every analog input and prompts the user to apply the
143. to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Id Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 3 21P Zone 3 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 15 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Id Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 4 Appendix B 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 21P Zone 4 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 2 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 5 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 5 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Id Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 5 21P Zone 5 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 20 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Reverse Reach 0 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 1 50 s 0 00 to 99 99 Id Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 Load Impedance common for 21N 21P and 68 Load Resistance R 20 0 ohm 150 0 to 150 0 Load Reactance X 15 0
144. used F iy This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 7 34 Simulating Main Breaker Close Command using Virtual Input in ProLogic ProLogic 2 This equation is used to reset the Main Breaker Status via ProLog ic 3 Opens Out 5 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 51 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide om om L E13 External Trip z aue Figure 7 35 Breaker Status Reset using ProLogic Ext Input 3 via Output Contact 5 ProLogic 3 This equation is set from ProLogic 1 Main Breaker Close Com mand OR ProLogic 9 Main Breaker Reclose Note that ProLogic 9 is mapped to Out 14 so Out 14 is used to indirectly provide ProLogic 9 availabil ity to ProLogic 1 through 8 ProLogic 9 changes the Main Breaker Status con tact Out 5 and apply a trip signal via ProLogic 4 Reset occurs when ProLogic 2 Breaker Status Reset is activated Main 52a Status 0 00 0 01 Ej PPL ane ose i Output Contact 14 4 PL 2 Bkr Status Reset 7 Figure 7 36 Main Breaker Status ProLogic 4 This equation applies the External Trip Closes Out 7 10 seconds after the Breaker Status ProLogic 3 goes high i e Main Breaker Status Closed L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Ext Trip Signal 10 00 0 00 PL 3 Main 52a Status ause Figure 7 37 Using ProLogic to give T
145. voltage magnitude D21P5MMXUS5 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21P5 phase C fault voltage angle D21P5MMXUS MX A phsA cVal mag f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21P5 phase A fault current magnitude Appendix N 65 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 66 D21P5MMXUS MX A phsA cVal ang f 21P5 phase A fault current angle D21P5MMXU5 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21P5 phase B fault current magnitude D21P5MMXUS MX A phsB cVal ang f 21P5 phase B fault current angle D21P5MMXUS MX A phsC cVal mag f 21P5 phase C fault current magnitude D21P5MMXUS MX A phsC cVal ang f D21INIMMXU6 21P5 phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21NIMMXU6 Data Name Description D21N1MMXU6 MX Hz mag f 21N1 fault frequency D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21N1 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21N1 Main phase A voltage angle D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21N1 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21N1 Main phase B fault voltage angle D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21N1 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21N1 Main phase C fault voltage angle D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21N1 Line phase A fault current magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21N1 Line phase A fault current a
146. www erlphase com Email info erlphase com Technical Support Email support erlphase com Tel 1 204 477 0591 L PRO 4000 User Manual Using This Guide This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the L PRO line protection relay It is intended to support the first time user and clarify the de tails of the equipment The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information Example Describes Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set tings submenu on the Start menu Right click Click the right mouse button Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information Indicates more screens p gt Indicates further drop down menu click to dis play list Y Indicates a warning D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual iii Acronyms D02706R02 50 ASG Active Setting Group CCVT Capacitance Coupled Voltage Transformer CID file extension CID for Configured IED Description CS Control Switch CT Current Transformer DCB Directional Comparison Blocking DCE Data Communication Equipment DIB Digital Input Board DIGIO Digital Input Output Board DMDA Dead Main Dead Aux DMLA Dead Main Live Aux DSP Digital signal processor DTE Data Terminal Equipment GFPCB Graphics Front Pan
147. 0 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class INS_1_Health Description Integer status CDC Class INS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment stVal Enum ST Health q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Common Data Class LPL_3_NamPIt Description Logical node name plate CDC Class LPL Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment vendor VisString255 DC swRev VisString255 DC d VisString255 DC configRev VisString255 DC IdNs VisString255 EX Common Data Class LPL_4_NamPIt Description Logical node name plate CDC Class LPL Attribute Type FC Enumeration vendor VisString255 DC swRev VisString255 DC d VisString255 DC L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 43 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class MV_1_TotW Description Measured value CDC Class MV Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X mag Struct MX AnalogueValue_2 q Quality MX t Timestamp MX Common Data Class WYE_1_W Description Phase to ground related measured values of a three phase system CDC Class WYE Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X phsA CMV_2_phsA phsB CMV_2_phsA phsC CMV_2_phsA Common Data Class WYE_1_Z Description Phase to ground related measured values of a three phase system CDC Class WYE Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comme
148. 0 00 60 Loss Of Potential Alarm 60 Disabled 11 Blocking 7 5 A 0 5 to 50 0 310 Blocking 1 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 Negative Sequence Monitoring Disabled Vnps 10 0 Vv 7 0 to 110 0 Inps 0 50 A 0 25 to 5 00 60 CT Supervision 60CTS Main Disabled nps Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 5 00 Vnps Pickup 7 00 Vv 7 00 to 110 00 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 03 to 99 99 60CTS Aux Disabled nps Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 5 00 Vnps Pickup 7 00 V 7 00 to 110 00 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 03 to 99 99 81 Over Under Frequency 81 1 Disabled Pickup 57 600 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 2 Disabled Pickup 57 000 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 3 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Pickup 61 800 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 4 Disabled Pickup 62 400 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 50LS Low Set Overcurrent 50LS Main Input 1 Disabled Pickup 50 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Auxiliary Input 2 Disabled Pickup 50 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Input 3 Disabled Pickup 50 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 50LS Input 4 Disabled Pickup 50 00 A 0 10 to 50
149. 0 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 01 to 99 99 51N Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 4 for ward 5 reverse 6 forward amp in scheme Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 14 B 0 0 p 0 02 TR 13 50 Directional Angle Setting Disabled Alpha 0 00 179 90 to 180 00 Beta 180 00 0 10 to 360 00 50N Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 50N Pickup Time Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 51N Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 51N Pickup Time Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 46 50 46 51 67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent 46 50 Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 3 for ward 4 reverse Pickup 2 50 A 0 50 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 01 to 99 99 46 51 Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 3 for ward 4 reverse Pickup 1 00 A 0 50 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 14 7 S B 0 0 g z p 0 02 E TR 13 50 z Directional Angle Setting Disabled Alpha 0 00 179 90 to 180 00 Beta 180 00 0 10 to 360 00 46 50 Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 46 50 Pickup Time Multiplier
150. 0 ST Ind10 stVal Target LED 10 State LEDGGIO10 ST iInd11 stVal Target LED 11 state LEDGGIO10 ST Ind12 stVal Alarm LED state LEDGGIO10 ST Ind13 stVal TSAIlImGGIO12 This section defines logical node data for the logical node TSAImGGIO12 Service Required LED state Data Name Description TSAIMGGIO12 ST ind stVal L PRO 4000 User Manual Time Synchronization Alarm D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 VIGGIO13 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node VIGGIO13 Data Name Description VIGGIO13 ST Ind1 stVal Virtual Input 1 VIGGIO13 ST Ind2 stVal Virtual Input 2 VIGGIO13 ST Ind3 stVal Virtual Input 3 VIGGIO13 ST Ind4 stVal Virtual Input 4 VIGGIO13 ST Ind5 stVal Virtual Input 5 VIGGIO13 ST Ind6 stVal Virtual Input 6 VIGGIO13 ST Ind7 stVal Virtual Input 7 VIGGIO13 ST Ind8 stVal Virtual Input 8 VIGGIO13 ST Ind9 stVal Virtual Input 9 VIGGIO13 ST Ind10 stVal Virtual Input 10 VIGGIO13 ST ind1 1 stVal Virtual Input 11 VIGGIO13 ST Ind12 stVal Virtual Input 12 VIGGIO13 ST Ind13 stVal Virtual Input 13 VIGGIO13 ST Ind14 stVal Virtual Input 14 VIGGIO13 ST Ind15 stVal Virtual Input 15 VIGGIO13 ST Ind16 stVal Virtual Input 16 VIGGIO13 ST Ind17 stVal Virtual Input 17 VIGGIO13 ST ind18 stVal Virtual Input 18 VIGGIO13 ST Ind19 stVal Virtua
151. 0 deg Series Compensation Enabled Compensabon 4 KO iV KO Override Enabled 067 Ko Zo Zi KO Magntude 3Z KO Angie 00 deg Mutual Compensation KM1 KM1 Mutual Line 1 Enabled KM1 Magntude KM1 Angie deg KM2 KM2 Mutual Line 2 Enabled KM2 Magntude KM2 Angie deg Figure 6 18 Line Parameters 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 11 Line Parameters Line Line to Line voltage 1 00 to 2000 00 kV primary Line Length km mile 0 50 to 2000 00 Sequence Impedance Positive Sequence Impedance Z1 ohm sec ondary Positive Sequence Angle Z1 deg Zero Sequence Impedance Z0 ohm 0 01 to 66 00 5A 0 05 to 330 00 1A 5 0 to 89 0 0 01 to 300 00 5A 0 05 to 1500 00 1A Zero Sequence Angle Z0 deg 5 0 to 89 0 Series Compensation Series compensation enabled Enable Disable L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 21 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 22 Table 6 11 Line Parameters compensation 0 0 to 70 0 KO KO Override Enable Disable KO Magnitude 0 00 to 10 00 KO Angle deg 180 0 to 180 0 Mutual Compensation KM1 KM1 Mutual Line 1 Enable Disable KM1 Magnitude 0 10 to 2 00 KM1 Angle deg 25 0 to 25 0 KM2 KM2 Mutual Line 2 Enable Disable KM2 Magnitude 0 10 to 2 00 KM2 Angle deg 25 0 to 25 0 Line Parameter Settings permit a parameter entry related to the li
152. 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Main Disabled Pickup Delay 1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay 2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 50BF Auxiliary Disabled Pickup Delay 1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay 2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent 50 Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 3 for ward 4 reverse Pickup 50 00 A 0 50 to 150 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 01 to 99 99 51 Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 3 for ward 4 reverse L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 15 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 16 Pickup 7 50 A 0 25 to 25 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 14 B 0 0 p 0 02 TR 1350 2 Directional Angle Setting Disabled Alpha 0 00 179 90 to 180 00 Beta 180 00 0 10 to 360 00 50 Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 50 Pickup Time Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 51 Pickup Current Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 51 Pickup Time Multiplier 1 00 times setting 0 10 to 2 00 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent 50N Disabled Directional Control forward 0 non direc tional 3 for ward 4 reverse Pickup 5 00 A 0 25 to 5
153. 00 0000 10 0000 Table 4 14 Table 4 13 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage setting functions 3V0 Pickup Minimum level operates device 59N Curve type Sets the type of inverse time curve TMS Time scaling factor for inverse time curve L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 14 Table 4 13 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage setting functions A B p Parameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time Table 4 15 59N Zero sequence overvoltage setting ranges 59N Inverse Time Delay Enable Disable Pickup Volt 5 00 to 150 00 Curve Type See Table 4 12 IEC and IEEE curves TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0 B 0 0000 to 10 0 p 0 01 to 10 0 TR 0 10 to 100 0 59N Definite Time Delay Enable Disable Pickup Volt 5 00 to 150 00 Pickup Delay Sec 0 00 to 99 99 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 31 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 27 Main The relay provides undervoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs Auxiliary These functions are definite time delay functions Undervoltage The definite time main undervoltage function looks at the phase to neutral voltage of all 3 phases to determine an undervoltage condition The fundamen tal RMS voltage is used for this calculation If any of the phase to neutral volt ages is below the set value the function starts the defini
154. 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle 65 Self check Fail 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 66 S 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 0000 67 Power Factor 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 0 NA 0 01 0 001 68 Voltage V1 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 69 Voltage VO 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 70 Current 12 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 71 Current 10 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 72 Pa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 0000 73 Pb 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 0000 74 Pc 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 0000 75 Qa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 0000 76 Qb 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 0000 77 Qe 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 0000 78 Sa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 0000 79 Sb 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 0000 80 Sc 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 0000 81 Power Factor a 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 0 NA 0 01 0 001 82 Power Factor b 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 0 NA 0 01 0 001 83 Power Factor c 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 0 NA 0 01 0 001 a The minimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and
155. 1 MX Z phsB cVal mag f L PRO 4000 User Manual Impedance phase B magnitude Appendix N 61 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 62 MAINMMXU1 MX Z phsB cVal ang f Impedance phase B angle MAINMMXU1 MX Z phsC cVal mag f Impedance phase C magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX Z phsC cVal ang f Impedance phase C angle MAINMMXU1 MX TotW mag f Total Active Power MAINMMXU1 MX TotVAr mag f Total Reactive Power MAINMMXU1 MX TotVA mag f Total Apparent Power MAINMMXU1 MX TotPF mag f Average Power Factor MAINMMXU1 MX Hz mag f AUXMMXU2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node AUXMMXU2 Frequency Data Name Description AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f Bus voltage phase A magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f Bus voltage phase A angle AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f Bus voltage phase B magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f Bus voltage phase B angle AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f Bus voltage phase C magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f Bus voltage phase C angle AUXMMXU2 MX A phsA cVal mag f Current 2 phase A magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX A phsA cVal ang f Current 2 phase A angle AUXMMXU2 MX A phsB cVal mag f Current 2 phase B magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX A phsB cVal ang f Current 2 phase B angle AUXMMXU2 MX A phsC cVal mag f Current 2 phase C magnitude AUXMMXU2 MX A
156. 1 Virtual Input 11 VI 12 Virtual Input 12 VI 13 Virtual Input 13 VI 14 Virtual Input 14 VI 15 Virtual Input 15 VI 16 Virtual Input 16 VI 17 Virtual Input 17 VI 18 Virtual Input 18 VI 19 Virtual Input 19 VI 20 Virtual Input 20 VI 21 Virtual Input 21 VI 22 Virtual Input 22 VI 23 Virtual Input 23 VI 24 Virtual Input 24 VI 25 Virtual Input 25 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 3 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 4 VI 26 Virtual Input 26 VI 27 Virtual Input 27 VI 28 Virtual Input 28 VI 29 Virtual Input 29 VI 30 Virtual Input 30 Setting Group Names Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 System Parameters Base MVA 100 00 MVA 1 00 to 2000 00 Phase Rotation ABC Aux Voltage Input Three Phase Target Latching Enabled Fault Location Display Enabled Fault Location Initiated by 21 Disabled Alarm Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Disabled Line Input Main CT Turns Ratio 240 00 11 Protection amp 1 00 to Recording 10000 00 Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 300 00 1 Protection amp 1 00 to Recording 10000 00 CCVT Tran
157. 12 Logging clause 14 Log Control block 30 GetLCBValues TP M NO 31 SetLCBValues TP M NO Log 32 QueryLogByTime TP M NO 33 QueryLogAfter TP M NO 34 GetLogStatusValues TP M NO c7 shall declare support for at least one query log by time or Query LogAfter L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 5 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 6 Table N 13 Generic Substation event model GSE 14 3 5 3 4 GOOSE CONTROL BLOCK 35 SendGOOSEMessage MC c8 YES S36 GetGOReference TP c9 S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP c9 38 GetGoCBValues TP O YES 39 SetGoCBValues TP O YES GSSE CONTROL BLOCK S40 SendGSSEMessage MC C8 NO S41 GetGsReference TP c9 NO 42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP c9 NO 43 GetGsCBValues TP O NO S44 SetGsCBValues TP O NO c8 shall declare support for at least one Send GOOSE Message or Send GSSE Message c9 shall declare support if TP association is available Table N 14 Transmission of sampled value model SVC Clause 16 Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage MC C10 NO S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O NO S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O NO Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage TP C10 NO S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O NO S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O NO C10 shall declare support for at least one Send MSV Message or Send USV Message L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation
158. 1RBRF1 Data Name Description D50BF1RBRF1 ST Str general 50BF Main 1 Trip D50BF1RBRF1 ST Str dirGeneral Not mapped set to unknown D50BF1RBRF1 ST OpEx general 50BF Main 1 Trip D50BF2RBRF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBF2RBRF2 Data Name Description D50BF2RBRF2 ST Str general 50BF Main 2 Trip D50BF2RBRF2 ST Str dirGeneral Not mapped set to unknown D50BF2RBRF2 ST OpEx general 50BF Main 2 Trip Appendix N 82 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D50BF3RBRF3 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBF3RBRF3 Data Name Description D50BF3RBRF3 ST Str general 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip D50BF3RBRF3 ST Str dirGeneral Not mapped set to unknown D50BF3RBRF3 ST OpEx general D50BF4RBRF4 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBF4RBRF4 Data Name Description D50BF4RBRF4 ST Str general 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip D50BF4RBRF4 ST Str dirGeneral Not mapped set to unknown D50BF4RBRF4 ST OpEx general CBFIRBRF5 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFIRBRFS Data Name Description CBFIRBRF5 ST Str general 50BF Initiation CBFIRBRF5 ST Str dirGeneral
159. 2 Closed 2010Aug03 703 44 52 2 Close 52 CS VI3 High 2010Aug03 2 03 42 Spare 1 0UT1 Open 2010Aug03 2 03 42 52 1 Close 52 CS I1 Low 2010Aug03 7 03 41 52 1 a status PL2 High 2010Aug03 7 03 41 Spare 1 0UT1 Closed 2010Aaug03 2 03 41 2 1 Close 52 CS I1 High Erase Print Main Menu Config Mgr Metering Utilities Events Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Events 4 Figure L 34 79 3Ph Initiated High Appendix L 18 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 12 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79I using the Pulse On action for the Virtual Input 5 This will trip both breakers and initiate the reclosing sequence Z Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities File Help Control Virtual Inputs Virtual Input 5 X Latch Off Latch On K 4 DDI Unit Identification Communication Time A External Input A Virtual Inputs r Saye Close Main Menu Config Mgr Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 l Getting Events 7 Figure L 35 select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79I using the Pulse On action 13 Check the event log and confirm that 52 1was the first breaker and 52 2 was the second breaker Check open interval time and follower time the close pulse can be measured from the time between PL9 and PL10 going high T1 Open interval time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Main Reclose
160. 2 ProLogic 1 52 1 Trip ProLogic 3 52 2 Trip M Enabled Name 52 2 Trip OR Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds TE eo 0 Dropout Delay 0 00 seconds L 0 1 1 IV Target Enabled Input A WI 4 52 2 Trip 52 CS Input B VIS 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 Figure L 23 ProLogic 3 52 2 Trip L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Circuit Breaker ProLogic statement 2 and 4 are used to provide a simulated logic point for the Simulator Logic circuit breaker contact a status The output of this logic is used as the input for the 52 Breaker Status see 79 Recloser Settings The 79 Main Reclose logic point and VI1 provide the close signal ProLogic provides the trip signal The pickup and dropout time delays are used to simulate breaker tripping and closing times ProLogic 2 52 1 a status V Enabled Rene 52 1 a status NXOR Pickup Delay 0 20 Seconds Dropout Delay 0 20 seconds IV Target Enabled Input amp 7aMmainReclose gt Input B YI 1 52 1 Close 52 CS Input C PL 1 52 1 Trip x Input D miam Figure L 24 ProLogic 2 52 1 a Status lolol 2e ProLogic 4 52 2 a Status M Enabled Name 52 2 a Status NXOR Pickup Delay 0 20 seconds 0 Dropout Delay 9 20 seconds olo oj o 0 1 JV Target Enabled 1 Inpu
161. 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 52 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica tions 53 Active Setting 2 1 8 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 Group Number D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Transmitted Value Scaling x Default Class Resolution Assigned to ai 5 d Multiplier F oe Name Events Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units default Description x 1 2 3 or none maximal a 54 Fault Information none 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 See description below on DNP Time High 16 how to access Fault Informa bits tion 55 Fault Information none 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 DNP Time Middle 16 bits 56 Fault Information none 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 DNP Time Low 16 bits 57 Fault Information none 0 Configurable 0 1 0 0 Configura 0 1 Fault Distance ble 58 Fault Information none 0 15 1 0 0 0 NA 0 Type 59 la Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 0 0 01 nitude 60 la Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle 61 b Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 0 0 01 nitude 62 Ib Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 Angle 63 Ic Summated Mag 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 0 0 01 nitude 64 Ic Summated 2 18 000 18 000 0
162. 2 PTOC IEC61850 7 4 2003 RPSB1 RPSB IEC61850 7 4 2003 RPSB2 RPSB IEC61850 7 4 2003 PSCH1 PSCH IEC61850 7 4 2003 PSCH2 PSCH IEC61850 7 4 2003 RFLO1 RFLO IEC61850 7 4 2003 MMXU1 MMXU IEC61850 7 4 2003 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 13 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 14 MMXU2 MMXU IEC61850 7 4 2003 MMXU3 MMXU IEC61850 7 4 2003 MMXU4 MMXU IEC61850 7 4 2003 MMXU5 MMXU IEC61850 7 4 2003 MSQI1 MSQI IEC61850 7 4 2003 MSQI2 MSQI IEC61850 7 4 2003 MSQI3 MSQI IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO1 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO2 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO3 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO4 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO5 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO6 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO7 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO8 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO9 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO10 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 GGIO11 GGIO IEC61850 7 4 2003 RDRE1 RDRE IEC61850 7 4 2003 Logical Node LPHD1 Description Physical Device Information LN Class LPHD Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X PhyNam DPL_2_PhyNam Device Physical Name Plate PhyHealth INS_2_PhyHealth Physical Device Health Proxy SPS_1_Proxy Indicates if this device is proxy L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Logical Node LPHD2 Description Physical Device Information LN Class LPHD Appendix N IEC61850
163. 2706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 25 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Notes Security Margin 0 5 to 1 cycle or a percentage of total expected time to account for errors in scheme timing assumptions Parallel Line applications fault contribution can come from unfaulted line appearing as a Zone 2 fault at one end and zone 4 reverse fault at the other end Depending on the location of the fault on the faulted line and which breaker clears first the current may change direction and the 2 ter minals on the unfaulted line may change state from forward to reverse and reverse to forward The unfaulted line contribution may come either end on a networked system Appendix L 26 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix M Failure Modes User Inputs DSP MPC TE Laptop or Remote Digital Signal Micro Connection Processor Processor Outputs A B C D E DSP DSP DSP MPC MPC MPC System Self Comm Self System Fail check Fail check Fail Fail Fail M 1 Actions A DSP System Failure The Relay Functional LED changes from green to off The Master Relay is de energized Two ofits contacts open disconnecting power to the other auxiliary relays A separate contact labeled Relay Inoperative on the rear panel closes to activate a remote alarm The watch dog repeatedly attempts to re start the DSP for diagnostic purposes The Relay Functional LED stays off and the relays remain de energized even for a successful
164. 27MnPTUV1 ST Str dirPhsA 27 Main phase A Direction set to unknown D27MnPTUV1 ST Str phsB 27 Main phase B Trip D27MnPTUV1 ST Str dirPhsB 27 Main phase B Direction set to unknown D27MnPTUV1 ST Str phsC 27 Main phase C Trip D27MnPTUV1 ST Str dirPhsC 27 Main phase C Direction set to unknown Appendix N 88 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D27AuxPTUV2 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27AuxPTUV 2 Data Name Description D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str general 27 Auxiliary Trip D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str dirGeneral 27 Auxiliary Direction set to unknown D27AuxPTUV2 ST Op general 27 Auxiliary Trip D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str phsA 27 Auxiliary phase A Trip D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str dirPhsA 27 Auxiliary phase A Direction set to unknown D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str phsB 27 Auxiliary phase B Trip D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str dirPhsB 27 Auxiliary phase B Direction set to unknown D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str phsC 27 Auxiliary phase C Trip D27AuxPTUV2 ST Str dirPhsC 27 Auxiliary phase C Direction set to unknown D50LS1PIOC1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LS1PIOC1 Data Name Description D50LS1PIOC1 ST Op general 50LS Main Trip D50LS1PIOC1 ST Op phsA 50LS Main phase A Trip D50LS1PIOC1 ST Op phsB 50LS Main phase B Trip D50
165. 3 cVal ang f 21N4 Line Zero Sequence current angle D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 75 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 76 D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f 21N4 Main Zero Sequence voltage magni tude D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqvV c3 cVal ang f 21N4 Main Zero Sequence voltage angle D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV seqT Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N5MSQI5 Data Name Description D21N5MSQI5 MxX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MxX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 21N5 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f 21N5 Line Zero Sequence current angle D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqvV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f 21N5 Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqvV c3 cVal ang f 21N5 Main Zero Sequence voltage ang
166. 32 DCE female DB9 Used for e User interface access through a direct serial connection Default Setting 9600 baud N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit e User interface access through an external modem The optional ERLPhase Modem Adapter converts this port to a Data Terminal Equipment DTE to simplify connection to an external modem L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 15 Table 2 5 Signal connections to pins on Relay Port Signal Name Direction PC lt gt Relay Pin on the Relay Port DCD amp 1 RxD lt 2 TxD gt 3 DTR gt 4 Common 5 DSR 6 RTS gt 7 CTS lt 8 No connection 9 Notes Relay is DCE PC is DTE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay Table 2 6 Cable Pin Connections Male DB 9 Cable End for Relay Port Female DB 9 Cable End for Computer Port Pin on Cable Pin on Cable 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications Table 2 7 Signal name connections to pins on Modem Adapter Signal Name Direction Modem lt gt Relay Pin on the Modem Adapter DCD gt 1 RxD gt 2 TxD lt 3 DTR lt 4 Common 5 DSR gt 6 RTS lt 7 CTS gt 8 No connection 9 Notes Relay with modem adapter is DTE modem is DCE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 17 3
167. 4 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 1 Phase Mho Operating Times Phase to Phase Faults Appendix A 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults 1 6 m 1 4 1 2 g 1 e SIR 30 8 Sa SIR 10 SIR1 E o6 SIR 0 1 0 4 0 2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 2 Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults L PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults il 1 4 1 2 gai g k SIR 30 5 SIR 10 0 8 z SIR1 j 0 6 x SIR 0 1 0 4 0 2 0 20 40 60 80 100 Fault Location of Z1 Reach Figure A 3 Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line to Ground Faults D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 9 Appendix A IED Specifications A 2 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves Figure A 4 Time delay Error at 0 2 seconds Figure A 5 Time Delay Error at 1 second and Figure A 6 Time Delay Error at 10 seconds show operating times for the relay frequency rate of change elements at different time delay settings
168. 5 ST Op general 46 50 Trip L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D51PTOCI1 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51PTOC1 Data Name Description D51PTOC1 ST Str general 51 Alarm D51PTOC1 ST Str dirGeneral 51 Trip Direction set to unknown D51PTOC1 ST Op general 51 Trip D51PTOC1 ST Op phsA 51 Trip phase A D51PTOC1 ST Op phsB 51 Trip phase B D51PTOC1 ST Op phsC 51 Trip phase C D51NPTOC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NPTOC2 Data Name Description D51NPTOC2 ST Str general 51N Alarm D51NPTOC2 ST Str dirGeneral 51N Trip Direction set to unknown D51NPTOC2 ST Op general D46_51PTOC3 51N Trip This section defines logical node data for the logical node D46_51PTOC3 Data Name Description D46_51PTOC3 ST Str general 46 51 Alarm D46_51PIOC3 ST Str dirGeneral 46 51 Trip Direction set to unknown D46_51PTOC3 ST Op general 46 51 Trip L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 91 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation DS59MPTOVI This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS9MPTOV1 Data Name Description D59MPTOV1 ST Str general 59 1 Main Trip D59MPTOV1 ST Str dirGeneral 59 1 Main Trip Direction set to unknown D59M
169. 5 is used to trip circuit breakers 52 1 and 52 2 and to provide recloser initiation Virtual Input 6 is used to provide recloser initiation without any tripping used to help test logic Virtual Input Names 4 521 Close52 cS gg JSCADA11 O Virtualingut21 2 s21trips2cs 42 scaom2 22 Virtuana 3 522cose52c5s 13 scana O a3 Virtuana 4 52 2 Trips2c5s 14 scaba 2g Virtua 5 52 1 52 2Trip879 gg SCADA1S o as Virtuanpt25 e Manuas 4e SCADA16 o ag Virtualinput 2 7 79CSEnableDisable 47 SCADAIT a Virtualinput27 a scanas i t iY lg Vitualint 2G a scanas ag scaba ag Virtuana 10 scanat lt scana O ao Virtuana Figure L 21 Virtual Inputs L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 11 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Main and Auxiliary Circuit Breaker Trip Logic Appendix L 12 ProLogic statement 1 and 3 are used to provide a common tripping logic point for the circuit breaker this is analogous to creating a dc trip bus to gather the trip and no reclose or trip and reclose signals VI2 and VI4 are VI2 for main and VI4 for auxiliary the trip and no reclose while VI5 is the trip and reclose common to main and auxiliary signal ProLogic 1 52 1 Trip M Enabled Name 52 1 Trip AND Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds 0 00 Dropout Delay seconds JV Target Enabled Input A f V1 2 52 1 Trip 2 CS x Input V15 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 Figure L 2
170. 50 standard specifications ACSI basic conformance statement The basic conformance statement shall be as defined in Table N 1 Basic Con formance Statement Table N 1 Basic Conformance Statement Server Publisher Remarks Client Server Roles B11 Server Side of two party applica c1 YES tion association B12 Client Side of two party application NO association SCSMs supported B21 SCSM IEC 61850 8 1 used YES B22 SCSM IEC 61850 9 1 used NO B23 SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used NO B24 SCSM other NO Generic Substation event Model GSE B31 Publisher side O YES B32 Subscriber Side YES Transmission of Sampled value model SVC B41 Publisher side O NO B42 Subscriber side NO c1 Shall be M if support for Logical device model has been declared O Optional M Mandatory L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 1 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation ACSI models conformance statement The ASCI models conformance statement shall be as defined in Table N 2 ACSI models Conformance Statement Table N 2 ACSI models Conformance Statement Publisher Remarks If Sever side B11 supported M1 Logical Device c2 YES M2 Logical Node c3 YES M3 Data c4 YES M4 Data Set c5 YES M5 Substitution O YES M6 Setting group control NO Reporting M7 Buffered report control O YES M7 1 Sequence number YES M7 2 Report time s
171. BREE MM M rere SNN Aem EB BSERBRSRSRSEREEREB EBB BBA GB Rove crim PHB BERBERS GB BB B B GB rerettens Figure 6 23 Output Matrix The output contact matrix determines which function initiates which output re lay All output relays have an individual user selectable stretch time except those outputs identified as communication initiation outputs They can have their time delay characteristics changed Functions also initiate recording as re quired For a particular function to operate correctly it must be enabled and must also have its logic output assigned to at least one output contact if it is involved in a tripping function Print the entire output matrix by selecting Print under the File menu This print out is produced on 2 pages L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Settings Summary 6 Offliner Settings Software L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help FF RAAAE Identification Relay Analog Inputs C External Inputs Output Contacts Virtual Inputs _ Setting Groups System Parameters SCADA Communication DNP Configuration Point Map Class Data SCADA Settings Summary Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Gro Line Parameters Scheme Selector _ Breaker Status Directional Element Protection Functions Z Circle Trigger ProLogic Group Logic Output Ma
172. C l l l m E l r 10 OOOOoOoo0oo oOo il ml oO i im 000 aces I EE JOOOUOOOOO WI 4 52 2 Trip 52 CS VAS 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 YI 6 Manual 78 VI 7 7905 Enable Disable VI 8 virtual Input 8 VIS virtual Input 9 OOOOO CATT JOHOOOOAOH i a N JOOOOOOOOO JOOO sOOOO Figure L 18 Output Matrix The 79 can also automatically move the follow breaker into the lead position if the lead breaker has been out of service for an extended period of time The out of service indication is also used to prevent reclosing attempts to the main or auxiliary breaker In our example a breaker has to be opened and stay open for a time of 120 0 seconds TC The 79 can also be configured with the follow breaker switch setting In this example we are using the TF follow time of 5 0 seconds for the 2nd breaker open interval The user can use the recloser reset time of TD by selecting the close after recloser reset time setting 52 Breaker Status Main Breaker Aux Breaker 7 This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Breaker Status is used in the Syne Check and Recloser functions Figure L 19 Breaker Status 52 Breaker Status can use any external input or ProLogic statement The re clos
173. C 12 3km Trip 21P3 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P4 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P5 ABC 12 3km Trip The possible phase information for 21P1 21P5 will be AB BC CA AB BC AB CA CA BC ABC ABG BCG CAG ABGBC BCGCA CAGAB ABCG 21N1 AG 12 3km Trip 21N2 AG 12 3km Trip 21N3 AG 12 3km Trip 21N4 AG 12 3km Trip 21N5 AG 12 3km Trip The possible phase information for 21N1 N5 will be AG BG CG ABG BCG CAG ABCG P2 ABC 12 3km Alarm P3 ABC 12 3km Alarm P4 ABC 12 3km Alarm P5 ABC 12 3km Alarm The possible phase information for 21P2 21P5 will be AB BC CA AB BC AB CA CA BC ABC ABG BCG CAG ABGBC BCGCA CAGAB ABCG 21N2 AG 12 3km Alarm 21N3 AG 12 3km Alarm The possible phase information for 21N2 N5 and 50N 51N will be AG L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N4 AG 12 3km Alarm BG 21N5 AG 12 3km Alarm CG 51N AG 12 3km Trip ABG 50N AG 12 3km Trip BCG CAG ABCG 46 51 Trip 46 50 Trip 51 ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A 50 ABC Trip B Cc AB BC CA ABC 51N Alarm 46 51 Alarm Appendix D 1 Appendix D Event Messages Appendix D 2 L PRO Event Messages 51 ABC Alarm The possible phase information will be A B Cc AB BC CA ABC Impedance Circle Trigger 68 Power Swing Trip Trip or Block based on 68 mode setting PU
174. Current Logical Node MMXU5 Description Measurements LN Class MMXU Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate PhV WYE_1_Z Phase to Ground Voltage A WYE_1_Z Phase Current L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 29 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 30 Logical Node MSQI1 Description Sequence and imbalance LN Class MSQI Attribute Attr Type Explanation X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate SeqA SEQ_4 SeqA Positive Negative and Zero Sequence Current Seqv SEQ_4 SeqA Positive Negative and Zero Sequence Current Logical Node MSQI2 Description Sequence and imbalance LN Class MSQI Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate SeqA SEQ_4 SeqA Positive Negative and Zero Sequence Current L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node MSQI3 Description Sequence and imbalance LN Class MSQI Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate SeqA SEQ_4
175. D02706R02 50 D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f Not mapped D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f Not mapped D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 77 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 78 DS0N67MSQI8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSON67MSQI8 Data Name Description D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 50N 67 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f 50N 67 Line Zero Sequence current angle D50N67MSQI8 MX SeqA seqT D51N67MSQI9 Not mapped This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51N67MSQI9 Data Name Description D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 51N 67 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f 51N 67 Line Zero Sequence current angle D51N67MSQI9 MX SeqA seqT L PRO 4000 User Manual Not mapped D02706R02 50 D4651MSQI10 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical
176. D81_4PTUF4 PTUF1 Underfrequency Protection D81_1PFRC1 PFRC1 Rate of change of frequency Protection D81_2PFRC2 PFRC1 Rate of change of frequency Protection D81_3PFRC3 PFRC1 Rate of change of frequency Protection D81_4PFRC4 PFRC1 Rate of change of frequency Protection DisSchPSCH1 PSCH1 Protection scheme Protection DEFSchPSCH2 PSCH2 Protection scheme Protection PTFuseGGIO6 GGIO6 Generic process I O Protection CTSGGIO7 GGIO7 Generic process I O L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Protection SOTFGGIO8 GGIO8 Generic process I O FaultData D21P1RFLO1 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21P2RFLO2 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21P3RFLO3 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21P4RFLO4 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21P5RFLO5 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21N1RFLO6 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21N2RFLO7 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21N3RFLO8 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21N4RFLO9 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21N5RFLO10 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData DSCHRFLO11 RFLO1 Fault locator FaultData D21P1MMXU1 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21P2MMXU2 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21P3MMXU3 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21P4MMXU4 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21P5MMXU5 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21N1MMXU6 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21N2MMXU7 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D50LSMMMXU8 MMXU4 Measur
177. DE LED goes out Normally the red Target LED remains off after this start up unless the relay had unviewed target messages L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 3 Using the IED Getting Started Table 3 2 Description of LED Lights Alarm Occurs when an enabled relay function picks up The red Alarm LED should be off if there are no inputs to the relay If the Alarm LED is on check the event log messages which are available through the menu system Target LED Number Description Default values 1 Any device 21P trip operation phase distance 21P1 21P2 21P3 21P4 2 Any device 21N trip operation ground distance 21N1 21N2 21N3 21N4 3 Any device 50 or 51 trip operation phase overcurrent 50 or 51 neutral overcurrent 50N or 51N negative sequence overcurrent 46 50 or 46 51 4 Any device 50BF trip operation breaker failure 50BF Main 1 50BF Main 2 50BF Aux 1 50BF Aux 2 5 Any device 81 trip operation over under frequency 81 1 81 2 81 3 81 4 6 Switch On To Fault trip operation 7 Communication Scheme trip operation 8 Device 68 trip operation Power Swing trip 9 ProLogic 1 8 10 ProLogic 9 16 11 ProLogic 17 24 Phase segregated Trip LED Indications user configurable are available for the following functions e Distance Carrier Trip e Backup Overcurrent e Overvoltage amp undervoltage e CB Fail Protection
178. Degrees 0 1 0 0 32 Bus Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 33 Bus Vb Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 34 Bus Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 35 Bus Vc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 36 Frequency 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 001 1 0 0 0 Hz 0 01 0 001 37 P 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 0000 38 Q 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 0000 39 Voltage V1 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 0000 40 Current 11 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 41 Line Za Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 Om 1 0 0 01 42 Line Za Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 43 Line Zb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 Om 1 0 0 01 44 Line Zb Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 45 Line Zc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 Om 1 0 0 01 46 Line Zc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 degrees 0 1 0 01 47 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 48 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 49 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 50 Not used 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 NA NA Retained for legacy applica ions 51 Not used
179. Drawing 3U L PRO 4000 User Manual L 326 212 18 547 zl 3 f 5 4 amp A o FERL Appendix G 1 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings Se eH AA PN AAN fo 3 7 a T g E Bs Bs Apn am 27 88 gs 8 8 Ld g 8 i i A A A A g yh H y a g 7A o 5 b s dL il D k 3 2 g g Q Q o o 2 a 5 D fi 7 z amp w E 6 s oe D P f Figure G 1 Mechanical Drawing 4U Appendix G 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 41 epeueg u apeyy Appendix H 1 ipo kbdebbbbebbbkdbebbbkbbbkbdidbekbdddd
180. ERL L PRO 4000 Transmission Line Protection Relay User Manual Version 2 5 Rev 0 Preface Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2014 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd is strictly forbidden This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes detailed drawings and operation Users should evaluate the information in the context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular applications ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental indirect or consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance with accepted engineering practices ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the completeness of the information All trademarks used in association with B PRO B PRO Multi Busbar Multi Busbar Protection F PRO iTMU L PRO ProLogic S PRO T PRO TESLA I O Expansion Module TESLA Control Panel Relay Control Panel RecordGraph and RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation HyperTerminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon Contact Information D02706R02 50 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Website
181. Generic process I O System OCGGIO4 GGIO4 Generic process I O System SChAImMGGIO5 GGIO10 Generic process I O System LEDGGIO10 GGIO9 Generic process I O System TSAlmGGIO12 GGIO10 Generic process I O System VIGGIO13 GGIO5 Generic process I O Recorder RDRE1 RDRE1 Disturbance recorder function Virtuallnputs SUBSCRGGIO1 GGIO11 Generic process I O L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node Definitions The definition tables for each of the Logical Nodes in the top level data model are presented in the following sub sections The following table presents a summary of the Logical Node templates used across the Logical Devices within the overall IEC 61850 product data model LN Type LN Class Name Space LPHD1 LPHD IEC61850 7 4 2003 LPHD2 LPHD IEC61850 7 4 2003 LLNO LLNO IEC61850 7 4 2003 LLNO1 LLNO1 IEC61850 7 4 2003 PDIS1 PDIS IEC61850 7 4 2003 PDIS2 PDIS IEC61850 7 4 2003 PDIS3 PDIS IEC61850 7 4 2003 RSYN1 RSYN IEC61850 7 4 2003 RREC1 RREC IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTOV1 PTOV IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTOV2 PTOV IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTUV1 PTUV IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTOF1 PTOF IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTUF1 PTUF IEC61850 7 4 2003 PFRC1 PFRC IEC61850 7 4 2003 PIOC1 PIOC IEC61850 7 4 2003 PIOC2 PIOC IEC61850 7 4 2003 PIOC3 PIOC IEC61850 7 4 2003 RBRF1 RBRF IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTOC1 PTOC IEC61850 7 4 2003 PTOC
182. Group 1 Setting Group 1 Line Parameters Scheme Selector C Breaker Status M Directional Element 2 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Comments Figure 6 17 Setting Groups Comments The relay has 8 setting groups SG The user can change all relay setting pa rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each setting group Use any one of the 16 available Group Logic Statements per setting group to perform Setting Group changes The Group Logic state ments are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions the sole function is to activate one ofthe 8 setting groups and the processing is in a slower half second cycle Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic statements Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs with Boolean state ments one latch state and one pickup delay timer View the active setting group ASG from the Terminal Mode from the front panel or from a record stored by the relay the active setting group is stored with the record 6 20 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Line Parameters Line Parameters Line Line to Line Votage 230 00 kV Pri Line Length 100 00 km Sequence impedance Positive Sequence impedance Z1 10 00 ohm Positive Sequence Angie Z1 80 0 deg Zero Sequence impedance Z0 30 00 ohm Zero Sequence Angie Z0 80
183. Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X PhyNam DPL_2_PhyNam Device Physical Name Plate PhyHealth INS_2_PhyHealth Physical Device Health Proxy SPS_1_Proxy Indicates if this device is proxy Logical Node LLNO Description Logical Node 0 LN Class LLNO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_3_NamPIt Name Plate Logical Node LLNO1 Description Logical Node 0 LN Class LLNO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_3_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_3_NamPIt Name Plate D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 15 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 16 Logical Node MMXU1 Description Measurements LN Class MMXU Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate TotW MV_1_TotW Total Active Power Total P TotVAr MV_1_ TotW Total Reactive Power Total Q TotVA MV_1_TotW Total Apparent Power Total S TotPF MV_1_TotW Average Power Factor Total PF Hz MV_1_ TotW Frequency PhV WYE_1_Z Phase to Ground Voltage A WYE_1_Z Phase Currents WwW WYE_1_W Phase Active Power W VAr WYE_1_W Phase Reactive Power Q VA WYE_1_W Phase Apparent Power S PF WYE_1
184. Inactive Active 136 79 3 Phase Lead Lockout Inactive Active 137 79 3 Phase Follow Lockout Inactive Active 138 79 1 Phase A Main Reclose Inactive Active 139 79 1 Phase B Main Reclose Inactive Active 140 79 1 Phase C Main Reclose Inactive Active 141 79 1 Phase A Aux Reclose Inactive Active 142 79 1 Phase B Aux Reclose Inactive Active 143 79 1 Phase C Aux Reclose Inactive Active 144 79 1 Phase Lead Lockout Inactive Active 145 79 1 Phase Follow Lockout Inactive Active 146 79 1 Phase Initiated Inactive Active 147 79 1 Phase Blocked Inactive Active 148 1 Phase Open Timeout Inactive Active 149 1 Phase Fault Lockout Inactive Active 150 3 Phase Fault Lockout Inactive Active 151 1 3 Phase Fault Lockout Inactive Active 152 DEF Scheme Trip Inactive Active 153 DEF Scheme Send Inactive Active 154 ProLogic13 Inactive Active 155 ProLogic14 Inactive Active 156 ProLogic15 Inactive Active 157 ProLogic16 Inactive Active 158 ProLogic17 Inactive Active 159 ProLogic18 Inactive Active 160 ProLogic19 Inactive Active 161 ProLogic20 Inactive Active 162 ProLogic21 Inactive Active 163 ProLogic22 Inactive Active 164 ProLogic23 Inactive Active 165 ProLogic24 Inactive Active 166 IRIG B Signal Loss Inactive Active 167 27 Main A Trip Inactive Active 168 27 Main B Trip Inactive Active 169 27 Main C Trip Inactive Active D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 17 Appendix F DNP3 Device
185. Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 15 ProLogic 15 ProLogic 15 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 16 ProLogic 16 ProLogic 16 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 17 ProLogic 17 ProLogic 17 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 23 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 18 ProLogic 18
186. L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Switch On To Switch On To Fault can be configured to operate based on two methods Fault Test 1 Close Command Circuit breaker close pulse 2 Status Monitoring Circuit breaker status Close Pulse Enable Breaker signal Close Pulse alba prm ms SOlLa RMS lt 4 nominal RMS fixed SOILb RMS SS on gt ag 50lLc RMS Status Monitoring Enable gt 4 Inominal 50 La RMS a J on RMS fixed SOILb RMS j 50llc RMS 7 Breaker signal S2A Main 52A Aux Enable Undervoltage monitoring SOTF Trip 27 Under voltage 1 50La Trip 50Lb Trip SOL Trip 50N Trip 21P2 Alarm on S 21N2 Alarm amp 21Zone 2 Enable 1_ 2 Harmonic Block IL2b IL1b IL2 ILl 2 Harmonic Restraint Enable Figure 7 19 Switch On To Fault Logic D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 27 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 28 Switch On To Fault Test Procedure for Close Command Method Switch On To Fault SOTF IV Enabled Breaker Signat Close Command Close Command Pulse EI 1 El Spare 1 Status Monitoring Main Breaker Status Aux Breaker Status Pole Dead Pickup Timer 0 2 s Enable Duration o2 s Device 50 Pickup 10 A Device 50N Pickup 25 A Undervoltage 27 Supervision V Enabied Device 27 Pickup 25 0 V Second Harmonic Restraint I
187. LS1PIOC1 ST Op phsC 50LS Main phase C Trip D50LS2PIOC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS50LS2PIOC2 Data Name Description D50LS2PIOC2 ST Op general 50LS Auxiliary Trip D50LS2PIOC2 ST Op phsA 50LS Auxiliary phase A Trip D50LS2PIOC2 ST Op phsB 50LS Auxiliary phase B Trip D50LS2PIOC2 ST Op phsC 50LS Auxiliary phase C Trip L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 89 Appendix N 90 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation DSOPIOC3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50PIOC3 Data Name Description D50PIOC3 ST Str general 50 Trip D50PIOC3 ST Str dirGeneral 50 Trip Direction set to unknown DSONPIOC4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSONPIOC4 D50PIOC3 ST Op general 50 Trip D50PIOC3 ST Op phsA 50 Trip phase A Trip D50PIOC3 ST Op phsB 50 Trip phase B Trip D50PIOC3 ST Op phsC 50 Trip phase C Trip Data Name Description D50NPIOC4 ST Str general 50N Trip D50NPIOC4 ST Str dirGeneral 50N Trip Direction set to unknown D50NPIOC4 ST Op general 50N Trip D46_50PIOCS This section defines logical node data for the logical node D46_50PIOCS5 Data Name Description D46_50PIOC5 ST Str general 46 50 Trip D46_50PIOC5 ST Str dirGeneral 46 50 Trip Direction set to unknown D46_50PIOC
188. MMXU20 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 2 Main phase A voltage angle D59M2MMXU20 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 2 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude D59M2MMXU20 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 59 2 Main phase B fault voltage angle D59M2MMXU20 MX PhV phsC cVal magSf 59 2 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude D59M2MMXU20 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f D59A2MMXU21 59 2 Main phase C fault voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A2MMXU21 Data Name Description D59A2MMXU21 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 2 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude D59A2MMXU21 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 2 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle D59A2MMXU21 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 2 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude D59A2MMXU21 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 59 2 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle D59A2MMXU21 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 59 2 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude D59A2MMXU21 MX PhVS phsC cVal ang f D21NIMSQU 59 2 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1MSQI1 Data Name Description D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 21N1 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqA c3 cVal a
189. Modbus is available exclusively via a direct serial link Serial Modbus communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122 an RS 232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay An external RS 232 to RS 485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS 485 network For de tails on connecting to serial Port see Communicating with the Relay Intelli gent Electronic Device IED on page 2 2 and Communication Port Details on page 2 15 The data points available for Modbus SCADA interface are fixed and are not selectable by the user Complete details regarding the Modbus protocol emu lation and data point lists can be found in Modbus RTU Communication Pro tocol in Appendix E The relay supports a DNP3 Level 2 SCADA connection DNP3 is available via a direct serial link or an Ethernet LAN connection using either TCP or UDP Serial DNP communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122 Port 122 is an RS 232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay An ex ternal RS 232 to RS 485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port see Communicating with the Relay Intelligent Electronic Device IED on page 2 2 and Commu nication Port Details on page 2 15 Network DNP communications can be utilized via physical LAN Port 119 or Port 120 Port 119 is available as a RJ 45 port on the front of the relay and as an RJ 45 or ST
190. N 51N Neutral Overcurrent Test D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 59 Aux 2 O V Monitor contacts Output 11 59 Aux 2 Trip Output 12 59 Aux 1 Trip Output 13 59 Main 2 Trip Output 14 59 Main 1 Trip Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 324 amp 330 66 4 V lt 0 Ph B 331 66 4 V lt 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V lt 120 Ph N 327 and 333 Observe 59 Main 1 O V Low 59 Main 2 O V Low 59 Aux 1 O V Low 59 Aux 2 O V Low Increase A Phase voltage At 70 0 to 74 0 V expect 72 V 59 Aux 1 amp 2 O V High Contact 11 amp 12 Closed 59 Main amp 2 O V remains Low Contact 13 amp 14 Open With A Phase voltage still increased increase B and C phase Voltage At 70 to 74 V expect 72 V 59 Aux 1 amp 2 O V High 59 Main amp 2 O V High Contact 13 amp 14 Closed End of 59 test Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test Settings Both Non directional e 50N Pickup 10 0 A e 51N Pickup 1 0 A Time Curve IEEE Moderately Inverse A 0 0103 B 0 0228 p 0 02 TMS 3 0 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 35 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide SON directional control If Directional or combined T must be greater than 10 ms 286 l A Out6 50 310 0 51N directional control 51310 5ms 0 Alarm Timer is active only if it s directional or c
191. N2MSQI2 Mx SeqV seqT Not mapped Appendix N 74 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D21N3MSQI3 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N3MSQIJ3 Data Name Description D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 21N3 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f 21N3 Line Zero Sequence current angle D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f 21N3 Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV c3 cVal ang f 21N3 Main Zero Sequence voltage angle D21N3MSQI3 MX SeqV seqT Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N4MSQI4 Data Name Description D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 21N4 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D21N4MSQI4 MX SeqA c
192. NS_1_Intin Description Integer status CDC Class INS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X stVal INT32 ST q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Appendix N 48 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class SPC_2_RcdTrg Description Controllable single point CDC Class SPC Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X stVal BOOLEAN ST t q Quality ST t Timestamp ST ctIModel Enum CF ctIModel D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 49 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Com mon Data Common data attribute types known herein as components are defined for use Attribute Type in the Common Data Classes defined in the sections above definitions Component INCCancel_2 Comment Controllable integer status Attribute Type Structure Comment x ctlVal INT32 origin Struct Originator_2 ctINum INT8U T Timestamp Test BOOLEAN Component Vector_3 Comment Complex Vector w r t Floating Point Magnitude and Angle val ues Parent Type Vector Attribute mag Type Struct Structure AnalogueValue_2 Comment XxX The magnitude of the complex value Component Vector_4 Comment Complex Vector w r t Floating Point Magnitude and Angle val ues Parent Type Vector Attribute Type Structure Comment X mag Struct AnalogueValue_2 The magnitude of t
193. Name Plate CDC Class DPL Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment vendor VisString255 DC hwRev VisString255 DC swRev VisString255 DC serNum VisString255 DC Model VisString255 DC Common Data Class INS_2_PhyHealth Description Integer status CDC Class INS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment stVal Enum ST PhyHealth q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Common Data Class SPS_1_Proxy Description Single point status CDC Class SPS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment stVal BOOLEAN ST q Quality ST t Timestamp ST L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 41 Appendix N 42 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class INC_2_ Mod Description Controllable integer status CDC Class INC Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment stVal Enum ST Mod q Quality ST t Timestamp ST ctlModel Enum CF ctlModel Common Data Class INC_3_Mod Description Controllable integer status CDC Class INC Attribute Type FC Enumeration Struct Comment Cancel Struct co INCCancel_2 stVal Enum ST Mod q Quality ST t Timestamp ST ctlModel Enum CF ctlModel Common Data Class INS_1_Beh Description Integer status CDC Class INS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment stVal Enum ST Beh q Quality ST t Timestamp ST L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 5
194. Nominal System Frequency 60Hz Relay ID Junti Comments Date Created Modified 01 Oct 16 09 26 13 Station Name Station Name Station Number 1 Location Location Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 al sip Seting Group Comments APT L PRO Offliner Settings v6 Setting Group 2 4 Figure 6 25 View Setting Summary in RecordBase View L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 1 Introduction The acceptance test section is a guide for testing any and all protection ele ments in the relay These tests should be performed upon first delivery of the relay prior to applying in service settings Once in service settings are applied ERLPhase recommends that the user test enabled functions to ensure the de signed application is fulfilled This section deals with the Acceptance Testing and the L PRO Acceptance Test Procedure First the acceptance testing describes the test equipment requirements calibra tion methods testing the external inputs and testing the output relay contacts Next a step by step test procedure for testing all the relay devices is outlined 7 2 Acceptance Testing Test Equipment Requirements D02706R02 50 ERLPhase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory A visual inspec tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re lay was not damaged during shipping The electronics in
195. Open Closed None None 8 Output contact 9 Open Closed None None 9 Output contact 10 Open Closed None None 10 Output contact 11 Open Closed None None 11 Output contact 12 Open Closed None None 12 Output contact 13 Open Closed None None 13 Output contact 14 Open Closed None None 14 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s 15 Virtual Input 2 Y Y Y bi Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s 16 Virtual Input 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s 17 Virtual Input 4 Y Y Y b Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s 18 Virtual Input 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none c 2 f o Q fo D x 2 E Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z zj value is 0 value is 1 g lglg EEIE 2 2 g 38l l ls Z S 7 8 9joloj jl l l a jS z 33l j2 3 l lel 5 D 3 5 T T 2 G a 9 A aqa s as as 4as a rFjyoj ojo 19 V
196. P y 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change Four frequency elements are provided with adjustable definite time delays Frequency is determined from the main voltage input 3 phase voltage The relay takes in currents from main auxiliary CTs and 2 additional CT in puts 5OLS Input 3 and 50LS Input 4 These individual overcurrent devices can be used with ProLogic to create logic 50LS Input 3 and 50LS Input 4 are not available in the Output Matrix Ad Low Set Overcurrent Figure 4 22 Low Set Overcurrent 50 l1a RMS 50 11b RMS 50 l1c RMS L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Main Input 1 Table 4 20 50LS Low Set Overcurrent Settings Enable Disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Auxiliary Input 2 Enable Disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Input 3 Enable Disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Input 4 Enable Disable Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 37 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker Failure Main Enabled Protect
197. PL 3 ProLogic 3 CPL 4 ProLogic 4 CPL 5 ProLogic 5 CPL 6 ProLogic 6 CPL 7 ProLogic 7 CPL 8 ProLogic 8 CPL 3 ProLogic 3 CPL 10 ProLogic 10 CPL 11 ProLogic 11 CPL 12 ProLogic 12 CPL 13 ProLogic 13 IPL 14 ProLogic 14 CPL 15 ProLogic 15 CPL 16 ProLogic 16 CPL 17 ProLogic 17 CPL 18 ProLogic 18 CPL 19 ProLogic 19 C PL 20 ProLogic 20 CPL 21 ProLogic 21 CPL 22 ProLogic 22 CUPL 23 ProLogic 23 PL 24 ProLogic 24 1 Group Logic M Output Matrix f gt lt L PRO Offliner IV Enabled Name Show Line Breaker Pickup Delay _0 05_s Dropout Delay 100 s Target Enabled SOLS Main Input 1 AND KEKEE Ei SOLS Aux Input 2 Output Contact 14 Unused 0 gt be tel tel el Le InputE lt Unused 0 gt This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Settings v402 Figure 6 22 ProLogic Setting Group 1 _ Apply ProLogic to multiple inputs to create an output based on qualified in puts ProLogic enables up to 24 ProLogic control statements and programs those logics to output contacts The user can name the function being created and set a pickup and dropout delay Start with input A by selecting any of the L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software relay functions using the list for up to 5 poss
198. PTOV1 ST Str phsA 59 1 Main phase A Trip D59MPTOV1 ST Str dirPhsA 59 1 Main phase A Trip Direction set to unknown D59MPTOV1 ST Str phsB 59 1 Main phase B Trip D59MPTOV1 ST Str dirPhsB 59 1 Main phase B Trip Direction set to unknown D59MPTOV1 ST Str phsC 59 1 Main phase C Trip D59MPTOV1 ST Str dirPhsC 59 1 Main phase C Trip Direction set to unknown D59APTOV2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS9APTOV2 Data Name Description D59APTOV2 ST Str general 59 1 Auxiliary Trip D59APTOV2 ST Str dirGeneral 59 1 Auxiliary Trip Direction set to unknown D59APTOV2 ST Str phsA 59 1 Auxiliary phase A Trip D59APTOV2 ST Str dirPhsA 59 1 Auxiliary phase A Trip Direction set to unknown D59APTOV2 ST Str phsB 59 1 Auxiliary phase B Trip D59APTOV2 ST Str dirPhsB 59 1 Auxiliary phase B Trip Direction set to unknown D59APTOV2 ST Str phsC 59 1 Auxiliary phase C Trip D59APTOV2 ST Str dirPhsC 59 1 Auxiliary phase C Trip Direction set to unknown Appendix N 92 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D59M2PTOV3 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59M2PTOV3 Data Name Description D59M2PTOV3 ST Str general 59 2 Main Trip D59M2PTOV3 ST Str dirGeneral 59 2 Main Trip Direction set to unknown D59M2PTOV3 ST Str phsA 59 2 Main phase A Tri
199. Phase External Single Phase Main C lt disabled gt Phase External Three Phase Main 3 lt disabled gt Phase External Single Phase Aux A lt disabled gt Phase External Single Phase Aux B lt disabled gt Phase External Single Phase Aux C lt disabled gt Phase External Three Phase Aux 3 lt disabled gt Phase 50N 67F Overcurrent Carrier Trip Action lt diabled gt Direction Forward 310 Pickup 1 0 0 2 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 020 0 005 to 99 990 50N 67R Overcurrent Carrier Block Action lt diabled gt Direction Reverse 310 Pickup 1 0 0 2 to 50 0 Pickup Delay 0 020 0 005 to 99 990 52 Breaker Status Main Breaker El 3 El Spare 3 Aux Breaker lt disabled gt Directional Element Directional Element Override Disabled Negative Seq Directional Element Enabled V2 Sensitivity Level 0 5 0 5 to 5 0 12 Sensitivity Level 0 2 0 1 to 1 0 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Zero Seq Directional Element Enabled 3V0 Sensitivity Level 1 0 Vv 1 0 to 10 0 310 Sensitivity Level 0 2 A 0 2 to 2 0 Protection Summary 21P Zone 1 Disabled 21P Zone 2 Disabled 21P Zone 3 Disabled 21P Zone 4 Disabled 21P Zone 5 Disabled Load Encroachment Disabled 21N Zone 1 Disabled 21N Zone 2 Disabled 21N Zone 3 Disabled 21N Zone 4 Disabled 21N Zone 5 D
200. Power External Inputs Optional I O 1 111 External 7 Output Contacts i Reactive Power Active Setting Group 1 Inputs Output Contacts Figure 1 1 L PRO Relay Function Line Diagram SOLS Low set overcurrent PL ProLogic WI Weak infeed 1 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 1 Overview 1 2 Front View fe L PRO LINE PROTECTION RELA 2 RELAY FUNCTIONAL 3 IRIG B FUNCTIONAL r SERVICE REQUIRED ALARM TEST MODE 119 150 400BASE T USB z o ERL 1 Front display of time alarms and relay target 2 LEDs indicating status of relay 3 USB Port 150 for maintenance interface 4 Push buttons to manipulate information on settings display and to clear targets 5 11 Target Programmable LEDs 6 Ethernet Port 119 Figure 1 2 L PRO Relay Front View 3U L PRO LINE PROTECTION RELAY RELAY FUNCTIONAL IRIG B FUNCTIONAL SERVICE REQUIRED ALARM TEST MODE 119 150 100BASE T _USB P a s le e Front display of time alarms and relay target LEDs indicating status of relay USB Port 150 for maintenance interface Push buttons to manipulate information on settings display and to clear targets 11 Target Programmable LEDs Ethernet Port 119 ORAON Figure 1 3 L PRO Relay Front View 4U D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 1 3 1 Overview 1 3 Rear View
201. ProRx SPS_1_Proxy Teleprotection signal transmitted Str ACD_5 Sir Carrier Send Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node RFLO1 Description Fault locator LN Class RFLO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate FItZ CMV_3_phsA Fault Impedance FitDiskm MV_1_ TotW Fault Distance in km D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 27 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 28 Logical Node MMXU2 Description Measurements LN Class MMXU Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Hz MV_1_TotW Frequency PhV WYE_1_Z Phase to Ground Voltage A WYE_1_Z Phase Current Logical Node MMXU3 Description Measurements LN Class MMXU Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate PhV WYE_1_Z Phase to Ground Voltage L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node MMXU4 Description Measurements LN Class MMXU Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate A WYE_1_Z Phase
202. RASB Relay AC Analog es Board RAIB Graphics Front Panel Comm Board GFPCB Graphics Front Panel Display Board GFPDB Appendix C 2 The RPCB provides the relay with two RS 232 ports Ports 122 and 123 DB9F IRIG B time synchronization input Port 121 male BNC internal modem connection Port 118 RJ 11 and two Ethernet ports Ports 119 and 120 RJ 45 or JOOBASE FX MM 1300nm ST depending upon order specifi cation The RPCB interfaces to the MPB Port 119 is the exception in that it interfaces to the GFPCB where it shares an internal switch with the front panel LAN port The switch then interfaces to the MPB The LOCB provides 14 normally open contact outputs for relaying alarms and control It also provides one normally closed output contact for relay inopera tive indication This board interfaces to the MPB The LOCBH provides the following output contacts for relaying alarms and control e One normally closed relay inoperative indicator normal output contact 6 user defined normal output contacts with both normally open and nor mally closed terminals made available to the user e 4 user defined high current fast interrupting HCFT output contacts The LOCBH interfaces to the MPB The DIGIO provides 11 digital input channels Inputs are optically isolated ex ternally wetted and factory preset to the customer s requested voltage level of 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc The DIGIO also provide 7 normally open conta
203. Send Trip Scheme Protection PTFuseGGIO6 Generic process I O PT Fuse Failure operation Protection CTSGGIO7 60CTS 60CTS status Protection SOTFGGIO8 Generic process I O SOTF SOTF Trip System PLGGIO1 Generic process I O ProLogic functions from 1 through 24 System SGGGIO2 Generic process I O Active setting group System EIGGIO3 Generic process I O External Inputs from 1 through 20 System OCGGIO4 Generic process I O Output Contacts from 1 through 21 System SChAImGGIO5 Generic process I O SelfCheck Fail Alarm System LEDGGIO10 Generic process I O Front Panel LED state Target from 1 through 11 ALARM SERVICE REQUIRED System TSAlmGGIO12 Generic process I O Time Synchronization Alarm System VIGGIO13 Generic process I O Virtual Inputs from 1 through 30 Virtuallnputs SUBSCRGGIO1 Generic process I O External GOOSE Virtual Inputs from 1 through 30 D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node Specifications The following sections provide detailed spec information on the L PRO logical device and logical nodes as defined in the Table N 19 L PRO Logical Nodes Measurement Logical Device MAINMMXUI1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node MAINMMXU1 Data Name Description MAINMMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f Line voltage phase A magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f Line voltage phase A angle MAINMMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f Line voltage phase B magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX PhV p
204. T 310 TMS B 4 310 BS L Pickup For 3 9 lt pickup r 8 TR l a 310 y L Pickup T 310 TMS All parameters for Equations 5 and 6 are defined in Table 4 24 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings on page 43 Table 4 24 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings 50N Enable Disable Directional Directional non directional combined Forward and Reverse Pickup 3l9 0 25 to 50 00 5 A 0 05 to 10 00 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 51N Enable Disable Directional Directional non directional combined direction in scheme Forward and Reverse Pickup 31g 0 25 to 50 00 5 A 0 05 to 10 00 1 A Curve Type For details see Table 4 22 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 40 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 B 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 01 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 Directional Angle Setting Alpha 179 90 to 180 00 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 43 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 46 50 46 51 67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent 4 44 Table 4 24 50N 51N 67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings Beta 0 10 to 360 00 Phase Setting Multiplier for Single Phase Open Pole Condition 50N Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 50N Pickup Time Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 51N Pickup Current Multiplier 0 10 to 2 00 0 10 to 2 00 51N Pickup Time Mu
205. TT ABCG 12 3 km Trip DCB ABCG 12 3 km Trip POTT ABCG 12 3 km Trip POTT WI ABCG 12 3 km Trip The possible phase information is AG BG CG ABG BCG CAG AB BC CA AB BC AB CA CA BC ABC ABCG ABGBC BCGCA CAGAB Weak Infeed WI is not available unless POTT is selected DEF Trip 59NDef Trip 59Ninv Trip PUTT ABCG Send POTT ABCG Send POTT WI ABCG Send DCB ABCG Send The possible phase information is AG BG CG ABG BCG CAG ABCG Weak Infeed WI is not available unless POTT is selected DEF Send SOTF ABC The possible phase information for the Switch On To Fault will be A B Cc AB BC CA ABC ProLogic Name PLn ProLogic outputs names are user assigned Extern Input Name Eln High External Input names are user assigned Extern Input Name Eln Low External Input names are user assigned Virtual Input Name VIn High Virtual Input names are user assigned Virtual Input Name VIn Low Virtual Input names are user assigned Output Contact Name OCn High Output Contact names are user assigned Output Contact Name OCn Low Output Contacts names are user assigned 59N Def Alarm 59N Inv Alarm L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix D Event Messages L PRO Event Messages 60 LOP ABC Alarm The possible phase i
206. Using This G de ireen ia i iii Acronyms cect2axscvasedescadiedetiogan e a E a aa V Table of Contents ccccccccccceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeess vii Version Compatibility cccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetes xi PC System Requirements and Software Installation xiii T Oye W a n ieee a a a aaa R 1 1 Mahalo Eeto n EE E ETE 1 1 FrOnt AE E TT 1 3 Rear VieW assise E T a dass Ea 1 4 Model Options Ordering ccccccscesceececeseeeeeessneeeeeeees 1 6 2 Setup and Communications ccccsseeseeeeeeeees 2 1 Introd UCHON E E EE 2 1 Power Supply ccccccccccccceccceccceecceeecececeeceeeceeceeeeeeeseness 2 1 Time SOUICES oe cece cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeedeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeseeenees 2 2 Communicating with the Relay Intelligent Electronic Device ED rcs Sees tian ostlene a aa a A Pea pE 2 2 USB LINK E S 2 3 Network K r a a a a e n EE E a 2 5 Direct Senal Linkas d ia a a E aaea 2 6 Modem Link e aa ipea Tene aeaa aaa Aee TERE ia 2 7 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Men saner hage a ar a iaa 2 9 Firmware Update ccccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeens 2 12 Setting the Baud Rate ccc cccccccccieeceeeeeesensnteeeeeeneeeeneeeee 2 13 Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services 2 14 Communication Port Details ccccceccsscceeceeeeeteeeees 2 15 3 Using the IED Getting Started ccceeeees 3 1 Introduction
207. V Enabled Second Harmonic to 2 1 Ratio 0 2 Fundamental Current ratio Figure 7 20 Switch On To Fault setting for Close Command Offliner 1 3 Objective of this test is to observe the basic operation of the logic Disable 50 50N 21P2 and 21N2 functions Instantaneously step three phase current from 0 to 1 05 A to Ph A 300 301 1 05 A lt 30 Ph B 302 303 1 05 A lt 90 Ph C 304 305 1 05 A lt 150 Voltage from 0 to 20 V to Ph A 330 333 20 0 V lt 0 Ph B 331 333 20 0 V lt 120 Ph C 332 333 20 0 V lt 120 AND External Input 1 from Low to High Analog inputs can be delayed by 1 3 cycles to simulate the delay in circuit breaker operation Observe target Switch On To Fault on ABC End of Switch On To Fault Close Command test L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Switch On To Fault Test Procedure for Status Monitoring Method Switch On To Fault SOTF I Enabled Breaker Signal Status Monitoring gt Close Command Pulse Status Monitoring Main Breaker Status El 1 El Spare 1 Aux Breaker Status Pole Dead Pickup Timer 02s Enable Duration 02 s Device 50 Pickup 10 A Device SON Pickup 25 A 1 Undervottage 27 Supervision IV Enabled Device 27 Pickup 25 0 V Second Harmonic Restraint IV Enabled Second Harmonic to 2 11 Ratio 0 2 Fundamental Current ratio F
208. Vnps 10 0 V Inps 0 5 A 4 Repeat step 1 Observe 60 Alarm High 5 Reduce all sources to 0 End of 60 test L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 13 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 21P1 Phase Zone Single Phase Under Impedance Test tested as 3 phase fault Distance Test Settings e Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance 100 of line 5 9 Q e Positive Sequence Line Angle 80 e 21P1 4 72 Q Maximum Reach 80 of line at maximum torque angle of 80 Time Delay 0 expect 1 3 cycles 22 ms or less e Delta Current Supervision 7 0 A minimum phasor difference between any 2 phases to allow 21P Trip Directional Element 21P Zbc 50 Ibc Directional Element 21P Generic Phase Distance Directional Element Logic any zone Figure 7 11 Phase Distance Logic 21P Preliminary Calculations Since this is a balanced 3 phase test there is no Zero Sequence Current so Z is calculated as Z V Phase 17 I phase where Z Phase Impedance V phase Phase Voltage TPhase Phase Current The minimum 3 phase current required is Remember IpDejta is the phasor difference between any 2 phase currents add 5 to ensure the Minimum Ipejasypervision Logic is high for this test 7 14 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide I I DeltaSupervision min pe Se es i 3 3 where x 105 percent _ 7 0 x 1 05_ Xb omps 18 Inin M
209. XU2 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21P2 phase C fault current magnitude D21P2MMXU2 MX A phsC cVal ang f D21P3MMXU3 21P2 phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P3MMXU3 Data Name Description D21P3MMXU3 MxX Hz mag f 21P3 fault frequency D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21P3 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21P3 phase A voltage angle D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21P3 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21P3 phase B fault voltage angle D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21P3 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21P3MMXU3 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21P3 phase C fault voltage angle D21P3MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21P3 phase A fault current magnitude D21P3MMXU3 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21P3 phase A fault current angle D21P3MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21P3 phase B fault current magnitude D21P3MMXU3 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21P3 phase B fault current angle L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21P3MMXU3 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21P3 phase C fault current magnitude D21P3MMXU3 Mx A phsC cVal ang f D21P4MMXU4 21P3 phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 PAMMXU4 Data Name Description D21P4MMXU4 MX Hz m
210. _1PTUF1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 Underfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_1PTUF1 ST Op general 81 1 Underfrequency Trip D81_2PTUF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_2PTUF2 Data Name Description D81_2PTUF2 ST Str general 81 2 Underfrequency Trip D81_2PTUF2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 Underfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_2PTUF2 ST Op general L PRO 4000 User Manual 81 2 Underfrequency Trip D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D81_3PTUF3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_3PTUF3 Data Name Description D81_3PTUF3 ST Str general 81 3 Underfrequency Trip D81_3PTUF3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 Underfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_3PTUF3 ST Op general 81 3 Underfrequency Trip D81_4PTUF4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_ 4PTUF4 Data Name Description D81_4PTUF4 ST Str general 81 4 Underfrequency Trip D81_4PTUF4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 Underfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_4PTUF4 ST Op general 81 4 Underfrequency Trip DisSchPSCH1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DisSchPSCH1 Data Name Description DisSchPSCH1 ST ProTx stVal Set to FALSE DisSchPSCH1 ST ProRx stVal Distance Scheme Received DisSchPSCH1 ST Str ge
211. _Proxy General indication binary input Ind21 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind22 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind23 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind24 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Logical Node GGIO2 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Intin INS_1_IntIn Integer status input L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node GGIO3 Description Generic process I O D02706R02 50 LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy
212. _W Phase power factor Z WYE_1_Z Phase to Ground Impedance Z L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node PDIS1 Description Distance LN Class PDIS Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_6_Op Operate Logical Node PDIS2 Description Distance LN Class PDIS Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_5 Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 17 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 18 Logical Node PDIS3 Description Distance LN Class PDIS Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node RSYN1 Description Synchronism check or synchronising LN Class RSYN Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Rel SPS_1_Proxy Release L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node RREC1 Description Autoreclosing
213. a Name Description D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 27 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 27 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 27 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 27 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 27 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude D27AMMXU15 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual 27 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D21IN3MMXU16 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 N3MMXUI6 Data Name Description D21N3MMXU16 MX Hz mag f 21N3 fault frequency D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21N3 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21N3 phase A voltage angle D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21N3 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21N3 phase B fault voltage angle D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21N3 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21N3 phase C fault voltage angle D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21N3 phase A fault current magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21N3 phase A fault current angle D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21N3 phase B fa
214. a Scheme Trip for at least as long as it would take a Blocking Signal to arrive from the remote end Should be set longer than the remote end 21 4R OR 50 67R detection time 1 cycle Blocking Channel Time Security Margin Table 1 4 POTT Scheme Timers Timer Considerations TL1 TL1 is intended for Parallel Line applications Delays or prevents scheme trip upon detection of a current reversal at the local end Time Delay should be set to less than Remote End 21 2 Detection Time 25msec Total End to End Channel Time TD1 Also for Parallel Line Applications Extends current reversal blocking of the Scheme Trip and Send Should be set such that it will not block the local relay if the fault becomes forward and internal However it needs to be set long enough to allow the permissive trip from the remote end to de assert in the event that the remote fault reverses remote external reverse fault So set local TD2 to Remote 21 2 Reset Time Channel Reset Time Security Margin Table 1 5 Scheme Selector Timers Timer Considerations TL3 Local fault duration must be greater than this time in order to produce a Scheme Send POTT and PUTT Permissive Trip DCB Block Signal derived from 21 4R OR 50N 67R AND NOT 21 2 TD3 Stretches the Scheme Send signal to ensure that it s received by the remote end relay Set longer than the channel pickup delay D0
215. ag f 21P4 fault frequency D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21P4 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21P4 phase A voltage angle D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21P4 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21P4 phase B fault voltage angle D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21P4 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21P4 phase C fault voltage angle D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21P4 phase A fault current magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21P4 phase A fault current angle D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21P4 phase B fault current magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21P4 phase B fault current angle D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21P4 phase C fault current magnitude D21P4MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f D21P5MMXUS5 21P4 phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 PSMMXUS Data Name Description D21P5MMXU5 MX Hz mag f 21P5 fault frequency D21P5MMXUS MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21P5 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21P5MMXUS5 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21P5 phase A voltage angle D21P5MMXUS MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21P5 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21P5MMXUS5 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21P5 phase B fault voltage angle D21P5MMXU5 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21P5 phase C fault
216. age stored within the relay V fis the polarizing quantity for the Mho elements and is more completely described in Relay Method of Memory Polarization on page 4 7 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 3 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Load Encroachment LE 4 4 To make the reach of the ground distance relay relate to the line positive se quence impedance the classical K factor is used This factor is defined as T fi 4 The relay includes a directional element to supervise the phase 21P and ground 21N Mho elements for all five Zones 21P1 to 21P5 and 21N1 to 21N5 The directional element improves security of the Mho elements for re verse faults such as bus faults phase phase faults during high load conditions The directional element does not supervise Zone 3 Zone 4 and Zone 5 ele ments if these zones are set as offset characteristic The directional element is described in Directional Element on page 4 10 Line angle Line angle Circle 90 Tomato lt 90 Lens gt 90 Figure 4 4 Mho Characteristic Shapes The load impedance may enter into the protection zones permanently or tem porarily due to system condition This is observed in very long lines or heavily loaded medium lines will have issue This is a normal load conditions and it is not an abnormal fault conditions Therefore the relay should not initiate any trip command during this condition The relay should identify prop
217. agnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsC cVal ang f D50LSMMMXU8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOLSMMMXU8 21N2 Line phase C fault current angle Data Name Description D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsA cVal mag f 50LS Main phase A fault current magnitude D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsA cVal ang f 50LS Main phase A fault current angle D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50LS Main phase B fault current magnitude D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsB cVal ang f 50LS Main phase B fault current angle D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsC cVal mag f 50LS Main phase C fault current magnitude D50LSMMMXU8 MX A phsC cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual 50LS Main phase C fault current angle Appendix N 67 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 68 D50LSAMMXU9 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOLSAMMXU9 Data Name Description D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsA cVal mag f 50LS Auxiliary phase A fault current magnitude D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsA cVal ang f 50LS Auxiliary phase A fault current angle D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50LS Auxiliary phase B fault current magnitude D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsB cVal ang f 50LS Auxiliary phase B fault current angle D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsC cVal mag f 50LS Auxiliary phase C fault current magnitude D50LSAMMXU9 MX A phsC cVal ang f D21INSMMXU10 50LS Auxiliary phase C fault current angle This sect
218. ails refer to IED Specifications in Appendix A This compensation algorithm can be enabled or disabled through settings Note that this algorithm is applied to all 21 devices once it is enabled For the applications without CCVTs this compensation al gorithm should be disabled so as to eliminate the possible additional delay introduced by this algorithm L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 17 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 68 Power Swing 4 18 The Power Swing function can be used as a tripping or blocking function This function consists of 2 sets of inner and outer impedance Zones on the R X plane for details see If the user selects Device 68 to block for Power Swing conditions the relay energizes the front panel alarm LED when the 68 ele ments are blocking If the user selects the 68 to trip for Power Swing conditions the relay energizes the front panel target light on page 4 18 Set the Power swing zones to different values and to have the Power Swing function operate for different system conditions The Power swing zones are quadrilateral char acteristic and the reactance lines with the same angle as the angle chosen for the line positive sequence impedance Outputs from the outer and the inner power swing zones are available on the output matrix for use with other types of Power Swing schemes or for monitoring Figure 4 12 Power Swing Characteristic The basic Power Swing scheme looks at the positive seq
219. al Element indication in ProLogic equations The directional element also provides the Directional Valid output for use in ProLogic equations This output asserts when any one of the active sequence impedance calculations has sufficient in put quantities to make a valid direction determination regardless of the actual direction The Directional Valid output will always be asserted except in the rare case where system voltage has gone to 0 for more than 30 cycles as pre viously described The 2 outputs can be combined in a ProLogic equation to e a secure reverse directional output from the relay for example Directional Element o Directional Valid j Reverse Fault Figure 4 11 Directional Element The default setting of the directional element in the relay should be correct for most applications The default settings enable both the negative sequence and zero sequence calculations with the minimum sensitivities as described There are some applications where it may be advisable to change the sensitivity thresholds for the negative sequence or zero sequence calculations or it may be desirable to disable one or both of these elements Selecting Directional Element Override Enabled allows user settings for the negative sequence and zero sequence directional elements L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 21P and 21N Phase Selector D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The
220. and an external input as qualifiers see example Using ProLogic to Qual ify Group Logic Statements in Appendix L on page Appendix L 8 Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 V Enabled Name Group Logic 1 Setting Group to Activate sc 2 Setting Group 2 zy HE 0 Pickup Delay 0 seconds ana 0 1 0 0 i il 41 Input A PL 10 ProLogic 10 Input B PL 8 Block Group Logic Input C El 4 43CS Local Remote x Figure L 3 Group Logic 1 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 3 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Setting Group 2 Logic Statements When setting group 2 becomes active either through a setting group change or is the default group after relay power up ProLogic 9 becomes high after the 10 00 second delay if external input one is low The example shows ProLogic 9 set for a 0 26 second dropout time to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer allowing for the slower processing thread where Group Logic is processed and providing a definite timed pulse to the group logic ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 M Enabled Name ProLogic 9 AND Pickup Delay 10 00 seconds 0 Dropout Delay 0 26 seconds z 1 IV Target Enabled e o 9 9 Out Input A El1 Selector 1 Figure L 4 ProLogic 9 Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0 52 seconds ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10
221. ange 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe Let system choose Master only 1 3 12 Destination UDP port None NA for initial unsolicited null Fixed at 20 000 responses UDP only Configurable range to Outstations Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 5 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 3 13 Destination UDP port None 20 000 L PRO Offliner for responses Fixed at 20 000 Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe Use source port number 1 3 14 Multiple master k Supports multiple masters Outstations only Method 1 based L PRO Offliner connections If supported the following methods may be on IP address Outstations Only used x Method 1 based on IP address required k Method 2 based on IP port number recommended k Method 3 browsing for static data optional 1 3 15 Time synchronization support DNP3 LAN procedure function code 24 DNP3 Write Time not recommended over LAN Other explain Not Supported Appendix F 6 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile F aye If configurable 1 4 Link Layer Capabilities Current Value ligtimethods 1 4 1 Data Link
222. anging from 0 to more than 4 of nominal or any pole Breaker status is changing from open to close Both options have a common Pick up delay i e timer B1 which will allow to extend the SOTF function enabled up to the desired settable duration Typ ically this timer value shall be equal to Zone 2 time delay setting Under voltage supervision is available as an option to include into the logic User can also enable or disable 21P2 and 21N2 monitoring During SOTF Enabled condition if any 50 Trip or 50N Trip or Zone 2 21N2 or 21P2 alarm picked up condition happens then the relay will go for an in stantaneous 3 pole SOTF Trip In addition to the above options the SOTF function has a second harmonic re straint logic which allows the line to be more easily energized if the line is T tapped with an online reactor or transformer Energization of the line with the T tapped device results in second harmonics that allows the line to be ener gized Ifa fault exists that exceeds the line high set overcurrent devices the line is allowed to trip Table 4 8 Switch On To Fault Settings Switch On To Fault Enable Disable Breaker Signal Close Command Status Monitoring Close Pulse El1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 This setting shall be enabled when the Breaker signal setting is selected as Close Command Main Breaker Status El1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 This setting shall be enabled when the Breaker signal setti
223. angle of C A voltage always 150 Reduction 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Fault V 103 5V 920V 805V 69 0V 57 5V 46 0V 34 5V 23 0V 11 5V Fault Volt Angle 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 Voltage C A 61 5V 56 7V 522V 479V 43 9V 404V 374V 35 1V_ 33 7V C Angle 117 3 114 2 110 5 106 1 100 9 94 7 87 5 79 1 69 8 A Angle 2 7 5 8 9 5 13 9 19 1 25 3 32 5 40 9 50 2 D02706R02 50 For this B C test a minimum fault voltage of 23 6 V is required as calculated in B C Fault Voltage Injections for details see Table 7 15 B C Fault Voltage Injections on page 7 19 Select the next highest voltage In this case 34 5 V 70 reduction is used L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide The following formulae were used to calculate the voltages for the tables they may be used for any other desired fault voltage 2 a 24 Test voltage magnitude emn e where V Fault phase to phase fault voltage V Nominal phase to neutral nominal voltage Test Phase Angle Offset the nominal phase angles toward the other faulted phase angle by 25 60 atan V Fault Nomina Example of this calculation using the 70 voltage reduction from the B C fault for details see Table 7 15 B C Fault Voltage Injections on page 7 19 Phase B C voltage angle 90 with respect to A N voltage phasor Fault Voltage
224. appropriate quantity E Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities Calibrate AC channel Chan Name Offset Gain Ee cht Main JA Applied Signal Ch2 Main IB Cok ch3 Main IC ch4 Aux IA 6 9 to 108 032 ore ae Calibrate Offset and Gain che Aux IC Main Menu Config Mgr Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Existing Calibration Values Figure 7 1 Enter actual applied signal level L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Testing the External Inputs Testing the Output Relay Contacts D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Z relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities Calibrate AC channel Chan Name Offset Gain X Ch1 Main 14 Applied Signat Ch2 Main IB e ch3 Main IC ch4 eek 6 9 to 108 032 chs Aux PEUDIE Le adele ch Aux IC Ch7 143 chs 183 A Uncalibrated reading was 0 00 must be within the range 55 20 to 82 80 cha c3 ch10 Aux VA Ch11 Aux VB ch12 Aux VC ch13 a4 ch14 184 ch1s C4 ch16 Main VA OFFSET OK GAIN NO chi7 Main VB ch18 Main VC Time Analog Input Calibration Extemal Input A Virtual Inputs A Toggle Outputs A Passwords Close Main Menu J Config Mor Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Getting Reading Figure 7 2 Calibration error out of range For example when selecting channel 16 to calibrate Main VA the Applied Signal check box will indicate the desired calibration o
225. are declared a live state When enabled this function checks that the voltage angle between the line PT and bus PT are within a specified value Use this function to ensure that closing a line to a system will result in acceptable power flow The function uses pos itive sequence voltage and therefore can accommodate single phase sources as well as 3 phase sources If a single phase source is used it must be connect ed to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input For example If only a B phase bus PT is available it should be connected to the relay input B phase terminals In this example the voltage and angle limit is 20 degrees with no pickup or drop out delay The Dead Main Live Auxiliary Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition The volt age is fixed at 20 V secondary Voltages below 20 V are declared a dead state and voltages above 20 V are declared a live state Table 4 10 25 27 59 Sync Check Settings 25 Sync Check Enable Disable Maximum Voltage 60 0 to 138 0 V secondary Minimum Voltage 40 0 to 69 9 V secondary Angle Difference 1 0 to 50 0 degrees Pickup Delay 0 00 to 10 00 seconds Enable Frequency Difference Enable Disable Frequency Difference 0 010 to 2 000 Hz Main Aux Enable Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Enable Disable Enable Live Main Dead A
226. arious faults AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Angle Diff between 44 and l24 0 120 120 180 60 60 AngleDiff_A Angle Diff between 4g and l2g 120 0 120 60 60 180 AngleDiff_B Angle Diff between 7 and loc 120 120 0 60 180 60 AngleDiff_C Phase Selector Criteria for 11 and I2 The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase AG Fault AngleDiff_A lt 45 0 and AngleDiff_B gt 90 0 and AngleDiff_C gt 90 0 BG Fault AngleDiff_B lt 45 0 and AngleDiff_C gt 90 0 and AngleDiff_A gt 90 0 CG Fault AngleDiff_C lt 45 0 and AngleDiff_A gt 90 0 and AngleDiff_B gt 90 0 In the above criteria only one can become true at a time They are used to su pervise 21IN_A 21N_B 21N_C respectively Angle Relationship of Negative and Zero Sequence Currents The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the fault type The negative sequence gt and zero sequence Io current phase an gle relations are listed in the following table Table 4 5 Angular difference between negative and zero sequence currents for various faults AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Angle Diff between I and lo 0 120 120 0 120 120 AngleDiff_12_10_A Angle Diff between lg and Io 120 0 120 120 120 0 AngleDiff_12_10_B Angle Diff between Ig and lo 120 120 0 120 0 120 AngleDiff_I2_10_C L PRO 4000
227. art ston 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit withoutflag 29 response 00 04 start stop 22 0 Counter Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 22 i Counter Event 32 bit with flag 129 response 44 28 _findex 4130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit with flag 129 response 417 28 __findex 4130 unsol resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 32 0 Analog Input Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 4130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without 1 read 06 no rang
228. ase Follow Lockout 843 0 Off inactive On active 81 1 Trip 844 0 Off inactive On active 81 2 Trip 845 0 Off inactive On active 81 3 Trip 846 0 Off inactive On active 81 4 Trip 847 0 Off inactive On active 50BF Initiate 848 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 11 849 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 12 850 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 13 851 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 14 852 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 15 853 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 16 854 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 17 855 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 18 856 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 19 857 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 20 858 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 21 859 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 22 860 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 23 861 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic 24 862 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase A Main Reclose 863 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase B Main Reclose 864 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase C Main Reclose 865 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase A Aux Reclose 866 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase B Aux Reclose 867 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase C Aux Reclose 868 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase Lead Lockout 869 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase Follow Lockout 870 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 P
229. assis 9337 i 422 424 426 428 430 432 434 atis Zote Out ots outta Zotz Tout 423 425 427 429 431 433 435 5A Supply E_E Standard Extemal Inputs All Chassis 100 9102 104 9106 108 10 12 14 916 O Q bm bns 117 Optional Extemal Inputs 4U Chassis pe rdw 7400 9402 0404 7406 7408 9410 0412 414 7416 0418 7420 b401 O O a5 Notes 1 IRIG B and conm parts shown separately on L PRO rear panel layout drawing 2 All output relays can be programmed to operate on any relay function 3 All outputs are rated tripping duty interrupting via breaker aux a contact Figure J 1 L PRO DC Schematic D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram Diagram in plastic sleeve D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix K 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Protection Timers and I O Status Latch Status Event Status Reset Viewing Active Setting Group Front Panel Active Setting Group D02706R02 50 The relay does not block any protection functions or external inputs during the setting save or active group change but the external output contacts are reset for one cycle The relay applies the setting parameters resets all protection functions resets all timers and continues to process the protection algorithms but does not apply any action to the output contacts for one cycle For close in heavy fault con dit
230. ate 50 5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay and e 81 1 Time Delay 0 5 second Underfrequency e 81 2 Pickup 59 5 Hz Fixed Rate 49 5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay e 81 2 Time Delay 0 5 second e 81 3 Pickup 1 0 Hz second e 81 3 Time Delay 0 2 second e 81 4 Pickup 1 0 Hz second 81 4 Time Delay 0 2 second Test Requires minimum of 0 25 per unit positive sequence voltage fixed setting to enable the 81 element 81 1 Freq or Df Dt T 81 1 Frequency o NT Vpos gt 0 25 PU A 0 81 2 Freq or D Dt 81 2 Frequency 305 Out 8 Vpos gt 0 25 PU A 0 81 3 Freq or DD 81 3 Frequency 206 M 7 Vpos gt 0 25 PU 7 0 ows 81 4 Freq or 81 4 Frequency Vpos gt 0 25 PU at 0 Figure 7 31 Over Under Rate of Change of Frequency Logic 81 Out 9 81 Fixed Rate Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 81 1 Trip Output Contact 8 2 Apply single phase nominal voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 V 60 Hz 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 1 Low 81 2 Low 3 Ramp up the voltage frequency At 60 499 to 60 501 Hz 50 499 to 50 501 Hz for 50 Hz relay 81 1 High D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 45 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 46 81 2 Low Contact 8 Closed 4 Ramp down the voltage frequency At 59 501 to 59 499 H
231. atio SIR ratios and single phase to ground faults at 20 of line reach or below Algorithm Details The phase selector uses a combination of positive negative and zero sequence current phasors to correctly determine the faulty phase No user settings are re quired for the phase selector functionality An OR function with angle checks between J and J as well as the angle between 7 and Jj The OR function al lows the algorithm to adapt to various fault conditions and provide the correct fault type When energizing a line with a T tapped load the user may have sys tem conditions where no pre trigger load current is available Using positive and negative sequence currents alone may cause an incorrect fault determina tion if the load current is significantly large enough to affect the total positive sequence current which includes both load and fault current Our algorithm overcomes this problem L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 13 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 14 Angle Relationship of Positive and Negative Sequence Currents The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the fault type If the load current is subtracted from the total current i e only fault current is left for angle comparison the positive sequence and negative sequence gt current phase angle relations are listed in the following table Table 4 4 Angular difference between positive and negative sequence currents for v
232. ault Description e 1 2 3 or none maximal 0 Line Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 1 Line Va Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 2 Line Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 3 Line Vb Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 4 Line Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 5 Line Vc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 6 Line la Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 7 Line la Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 8 Line Ib Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 9 Line Ib Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 0 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 25 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Appendix F 26 L PRO 4000 User Manual Transmitted Value Scaling E Pe P Multipli Resolution Name pure 7 Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units default Description 1 2 3 or none maximal 10 Line Ic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 11 Line Ic Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1
233. ay Software is installed directly from the CD ROM to a Windows PC Alterna tively create installation diskettes to install software on computers without a CD ROM drive The CD ROM contains the following L PRO Offliner Settings Offliner settings program for the relay L PRO Firmware Firmware and installation instructions L PRO User Manual L PRO manual in PDF format e L PRO Function Logic Diagram diagram in PDF format e Relay Control Panel software e Relay Control Panel User Manual manual in PDF format e USB Driver To Install Software on the Computer Insert the CD ROM in the drive The CD ROM should open automatically If the CD ROM does not open automatically go to Windows Explorer and find the CD ROM usually on D drive Open the ERLPhase exe file to launch the CD ROM L PRO 4000 User Manual xiii PC System Requirements and Software Installation xiv To install the software on the computer click the desired item on the screen The installation program launches automatically Installation may take a few minutes to start To view the L PRO User Manual the user must have Adobe Acrobat on the computer If a copy is needed download a copy at www adobe com Anti virus Anti spyware Software If an anti virus anti spyware software on your local system identifies any of the ERLPhase applications as a potential threat it will be necessary to con figure your anti virus anti software to classify it as safe
234. ay trip occurs The front display will go dark and reset if no user interaction has taken place for a period of time Pressing any of the front panel control buttons brings the front panel to life L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 1 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example L 1 Switching Setting Groups Using One External Input to Toggle Setting Group Appendix L 2 The user can program a total of 16 Group Logic statements per setting group to cause a setting change from one group to another Create settings using the Offliner setting software or by using the Terminal Mode Some common uses for setting groups might be cold load pickup Zone 1 and or Zone 2 reach extension for phase and ground distance elements zero sequence source increase or decrease An example of pulsing an external input and an example of a solid initiate to activate setting group changes are shown below Use one external input connected to a SCADA output contact to toggle be tween 2 or more setting groups In this example we connect external input one EI 1 to the SCADA control output contact and switch between group 1 and group 2 If the user wanted to switch through all setting groups group logic 2 would switch to setting group 3 and so forth If the contact input to switch set ting groups becomes welded shut or the SCADA system has a problem the re lay will only switch to the new logic and stay in that logic until the input has been de energized for the ProLog
235. ays Ignores reception any data sent k CTS to the device when the k DCD signal is not active k DSR could be discarded bd RI Other explain RS 422 V 11 Options Requires Indication before Rx Asserts Control before Tx Other explain RS 485 Options Requires Rx inactive before Tx Other explain 1 2 5 Interval to Request Link amp Not Supported Status Fixed at seconds Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from__ _ _ seconds Configurable other describe 1 2 6 Supports DNP3 BK No Collision Avoidance Yes explain D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 3 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value a list methods 1 2 7 Receiver Inter Not checked character Timeout No gap permitted Fixed at bit times Fixed at ms Configurable range ____to___ bit times Configurable range ___to__ ms Configurable Selectable from __ _ __ bit times Configurable Selectable from __ __ __ ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 2 8 Inter character gaps in None always transmits with no inter character transmission gap Maximum bit times Maximum ms Appendix F 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile F aye If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value list methods 1 3 1 Port Name Port 119 and 120 Networ
236. bined with logic gates to create a ProLogic control statement The possible gates are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR and LATCH The control can be time delay pickup and or time delay dropout and can drive the front panel target LED Twenty four ProLogic control statements outputs are available and can be used in the output matrix to customize the relay to specific needs Inputs to ProLogic are all the elements plus previous ProLogic statements for logic nesting usage The example for details see Figure 4 26 ProLogic on page 4 47 shows A to E inputs are status points of devices that are user selectable Each ProLogic output can be given a specific name pickup and reset time delay Figure 4 26 ProLogic L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 47 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Group Logic 4 48 Table 4 27 ProLogic Setting Functions Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate Dropout Delay Delay time from dropout to a ProLogic status of low A B C D E Relay elements as input statements Operators Boolean type logic gates Group Logic Control Statements The relay has 8 Setting Groups SG The user can change all relay setting pa rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each setting group Setting group changes are performed by using any one of the 16 available Group Logic statements per setting group The Group Logic s
237. ble Disable Pickup Delay 1 0 01 to 99 99 Seconds Pickup Delay 2 0 01 to 99 99 Seconds Breaker Current Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Auxiliary Input 2 Enable Disable External Single Phase 50BF Initiate Main A Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 B Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Directional Control Used in Overcurrent Elements D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 21 50BF Breaker Failure Settings C Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 Auxiliary A Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 B Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 C Phase Disabled El 1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 The L PRO breaker failure protection can be initiated by any protection func tion located within the L PRO relay by initiating the BFI column in the Output Matrix screen When the breaker failure function is initiated this way several modes of operation may occur 1 If the 3 Pole tripping option for the relay is selected initiation of the BFI column in the Output matrix will result in 3 pole breaker failure initiation Output of the breaker failure function will then be a three pole output The 3 pole BF initiation will occur regardless of the type of fault detected sin gle phase or multi phase fault 2 If the 1 Pole single pole tripping option for the relay is
238. ce 15 Forward 0 must be 0 for POTT Scheme 16 Reverse 4 7209 100 x 1 569 2 3 5 7 4002 103 5 OUT OUT io ele 46 50 DLPU STrip Send 21P3 21P4 21N2 21N3 21N4 50N 51N 81 1 46 51 25C 51 OUTER 81 2 81 3 50 PLI PL2 OUT OUT OUT 2 i i 68 68IN 27 59 27 159 Main Aux 21P2 60 50BF 50BF 50LS 68 Aux1 Aux2 50BF 81 4 pana L PRO 4000 SIMPLIFIED REAR VIEW Main Voltages Auxilliary Line Currents Auxilliary Voltages Main Line Currents 300 302 304 306 308 310 324 325 326 327 OODODVDVODIO0O0000 o i 1 r 1 For Prot Sync Rec These Currents only required for Ring Bus Application Regulated Voltage and Current Source Figure 7 8 Suggested Test Connections for Acceptance Tests Where each test specifies Metering Protection view the following screen un der Metering gt Protection in Relay Control Panel 7 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide E Relay Control Panel Metering File Help 21P Zone 1 Trip Low 21P Zone 2 Trip Low 21P Zone 3 Trip 21P Zone 4 Trip Low D21P Zone 5 Trip Low 51 Trip 50 Trip Low 21N Zone 1 Trip Low 21N Zone 2 Trip 21N Zone 3Trip Low 21N Zone 4 Trip Low 21N Zone 5 Trip 68 Power Swing Low ZCircleTrig Tow 51N Trip 50N Trip Low 46 51 Trip Low 46 50 Trip SOTF Low Dist Scheme Trip Low Dist Scheme Send 60 Alarm Low 21P Zone 2 Alarm Low 21P Zone 3 Alarm 21P Zo
239. ce There is a standard USB B connector on the front panel This is a USB 2 0 Full Speed interface and can be connected to a PC with a standard USB peripheral cable A style to B style The relay may have an optional internal modem Connection to this is via the relay s Port 118 RJ 11 receptacle A standard telephone extension cable is to be used The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG B standard time sig nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions The IRIG B connector on the back of the relay is BNC type L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 4000 Specifications Item Quantity Specs Note General Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Operate Time 1 0 to 1 3 cycles at 80 reach Including output relay operation Power Supply 43 275 Vdc 90 265 Vac Power Consumption 25 30 VA ac 25 30 W dc Memory Settings and records are stored in non volatile Records are stored in a circular buffer memory Protection Functions IEEE Dev 21P 1 2 3 4 5 21N 1 2 3 4 5 27 50BF 50LS 50 51 67 50N 51N 67 46 50 51 67 59 59N 60 68 79 1 3 Sync Check 81 Switch On To Fault 60CTS Weak Infeed Mutual compensation vir tual inputs 2 x 3 phase voltage inputs for synchronizing during reclosing 2 x3 phase current inputs for protection Extra 6 currents used for recording and Pro Logic input Suitable for ring bus configura
240. ce IED 2 2 Connect to the relay to access its user interface and supervisory control and data acquisition SCADA services by Front USB 2 0 interface maintenance front and 2 rear Ethernet network links user interface and SCADA e Direct serial link user interface and SCADA e External or internal modem link user interface only The relay has a front panel USB Port 150 and 1 front Port 119 and 1 rear panel Ethernet port 119 and 1 rear panel Ethernet Port 120 and 2 rear serial Ports 122 and 123 to provide direct access to its user interface and SCADA services The relay s user interface is accessed through the Relay Control Panel L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 5 USB Link D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications The PC must be appropriately configured for USB communication Port 150 USB Laptop PC Figure 2 1 USB Link USB Driver Installation To create an USB link between the relay and the computer first the USB driver for the ERLPhase 4000 series device needs to be installed as follows Unzip the file can be obtained from ERL website ERLPhase_USB_driver zip In this case we assume you unzipped to the desktop In Windows XP or Windows 7 Connect a USB port of the PC to Port 150 USB front of the LPRO 4000 The LPRO 4000 was already powered on In the window Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software
241. ces an output only if the positive se quence line current is less than 4 nominal or 4 0 of 5 A secondary 0 20 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications A secondary If this current has been that low for the 1 second pickup time de lay this input to the AND gate would go high For a de energized line this input would normally be high to allow the blocking scheme to operate if the other two inputs are high This input along with input two are present to help prevent any distance relay blocking for a line that is in service and is now experiencing a line fault Switch On To When energizing a line that has been out of service the line may have a fault Fault SOTF on it If the line potential is derived from bus PTs the distance relay function acts normal and operates for any fault that exists when the line is energized If the line uses line PTs the output of these line PTs is zero before energizing Because there is no memory voltage operation of the line distance functions may be undefined To provide protection to detect faults when a line is first en ergized the Switch On To Fault function SOTF is involved Close Pulse Enable a ee Breaker signal Close Pulse Era a amp 50ILa RMS lt 4 nominal N Al ni RMS fixed SOILb RMS on OR ae Solc RMS Status Monitoring Enable 7 50iLa RMS gt 4 I nominal ai m N 50lLc RMS OR Breaker signal S2A Main 52A
242. ck trip receive signal goes low Typically the block reset timer TD2 is set longer than the forward directional elements reset time L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 PUTT Logic 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The PUTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end under reach the remote end for close in forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 29 Communication aided Scheme on page 4 52 The local end sends a permissive trip signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements op erates Zone distance elements The scheme send signal permissive transfer trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL3 The remote end does not produce a scheme trip output unless a forward directional fault is detected and the local end has sent the permissive trip signal The remote end senses a per missive trip receive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the fault contribution from the remote end The remote end can act quicker for fault conditions where the Zone 2 faults would be time delayed un less the close in fault condition was not transferred by the scheme send 4 2 Recording Functions Introduction Fault Recording D02706R02 50 The relay has high speed fault recording and logging functions to allow the user to analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall protection sch
243. ckup Delay A s O C Carrier Trip SON 67F Dist Scheme Only This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 6 19 Scheme Selector w lForward frea z O C Carrier Block SON 67R Dist Scheme Only wilReverse v 1 0 0 020 10 0 020 Table 6 12 Scheme Selector Protection Scheme 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 3 Phase 1Ph Max Open Pickup Delay TM sec 0 100 to 5 000 1Ph 3Ph for 3Ph Dropout Delay TD4 sec 0 100 to 999 000 1Ph 3Ph for 1Ph Pickup Delay TL5 sec 0 100 to 5 000 1Ph 3Ph for 1Ph Dropout Delay TD5 sec 0 100 to 999 000 Fault Timer Enable Disable Pickup sec 0 05 to 10 Distance Scheme Communication Scheme Selection Basic POTT PUTT DCB Communication Receiver1 EI 1 to E120 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 23 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 24 Table 6 12 Scheme Selector Communication Receiver2 Disabled El 1 to EI20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Scheme Send Pickup Delay TL3 sec 0 000 to 1 000 Scheme Send Dropout Delay TD3 sec 0 000 to 1 000 POTT Current Reversal Pickup Delay TL1 sec 0 000 to 0 500 POTT Current Reversal Dropout Delay TD1 sec 0 000 to 0 500 DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup Delay TL2 sec 0 005 to 0 500 DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout Delay TD2 sec 0 000 to 0 500 DEF Schem
244. cribed GOOSE Virtual Input 11 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind12 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 12 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 13 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind14 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 14 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 15 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind16 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 16 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 17 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind18 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 18 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind19 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 19 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 20 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind21 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 21 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind22 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 22 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind23 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 23 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind24 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 24 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind25 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 25 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind26 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input26 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind27 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 27 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind28 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 28 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind29 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 29 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind30 stVal L PRO 4000 User Manual Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 30 D02706R02 50 Index D02706R02 50
245. ct outputs for relaying alarms and control This board interfaces to the MPB Each relay has 3 RASBs Two RASBs have 3 voltage transformer inputs and 3 current transformer inputs while the third RASB has 6 current transformer inputs These boards provide 12 current and 6 voltage ac analog measurement inputs The RASBs interface to the RAIB The RAIB provides the analog to digital conversion of the 12 ac analog current inputs and the 6 ac analog voltage inputs The sample rate is fixed at 96 sam ples cycle Each channel is simultaneously sampled using 16 bit analog to dig ital converters The digitized data is sent to the MPB for processing and implementation of the protection algorithms The GFPCB provides the front panel USB and Ethernet ports the front panel status LEDs and interfaces the MPB to the FPDB The MPB controls the state of the LEDs The GFPDB provides the 240x128 monochrome graphics front panel display and the keypad The keypad is used to navigate the menus on the display to control relay operation by a local user L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix D Event Messages D02706R02 50 The following is a list of event messages that are created in the relay for events including trips alarms external input assertions and internal events such as setting changes This list is referred to from multiple places in this manual L PRO Event Messages Event Log Message Notes 21P1 ABC 12 3km Trip 21P2 AB
246. ct 9 81 2 5 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66 4 V 60 Hz to 59 4 Hz transition Expect time delay of 500 ms approximately 1 5 cycle detection time 6 Apply the frequency shift Confirm the expected time delay Target 81 2 End of 81 test L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 47 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 25 27 59 Sync Note Three or four voltage sources are required for this test Check Test The relay will create the positive sequence sync check voltage out of the sin gle phase auxiliary voltage input depending on which phase is injected Settings e Maximum voltage 70 V sec Maximum Positive Sequence voltage e Minimum voltage 40 V sec Minimum Positive Sequence voltage e Angle Difference 20 degrees Time Delay 200 milliseconds e Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Enable e Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Enable e Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Enable 27 Vmain Positive Seq 7 2 27 Vaux Positive seq 28 j 59 Vmain Positive WOED 210 ot T 59 Vsync Positive seq 0 VmainAngle VauxAngle lt Setting 25 C Sync Check Enabled 52aMein Dead Main Live Sync Enabled ean 212 2H 27 Vrain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 214 59 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed Live Main Dead SyncEnabled 25ms 59 Vmain Positive Seq 20 V Fixed 4 215 J 216 27 g 27 Vsync Positive Seq 20 V Fixed
247. d Make 50A inductive L R 20ms Carry 6 A Break 10 0 A L R 40 ms at 48Vdc 10 0 A L R 40 ms at 125 Vdc 10 0 A L R 20 ms at 250 Vdc Virtual Inputs 30 Virtual Inputs Interface amp Communication Front Display 240 x128 pixels graphics LCD Front Panel Indicators 16 LEDs 11 programmable 5 fixed Fixed Relay Functional IRIG B Func tional Service Required Test Mode Alarm Target 11 programmable Front User Interface USB port and 100BASE T Ethernet port Full Speed USB 2 0 RJ 45 Appendix A 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications Rear User Interface L PRO Model 4000 Specifications LAN Port 1 1OOBASE Copper or Optical 1300nm LAN Port 2 100BASE Copper or Optical Two Serial RS 232 ports to 115 kbd modem Copper RJ 45 100BASE T Optical 1OOBASE FX Multimode ST style connector Com port can support external modem Internal Modem 33 6 Kbps V 32 bis Optional internal modem SCADA Interface IEC61850 Ethernet or DNP3 RS 232 or Ethernet or Modbus RS 232 Rear port Time Sync IRIG B BNC connector B003 B004 B123 and B124 Time Codes Modulated or unmodulated auto detect Self Checking Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative Environmental Ambient Temperature Range 40 C to 85 C for 16 hours 40 C to 70 C continuous IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2
248. d C Trip 72 27 Aux Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 27 Aux A B and C Trip 73 59 1 Main Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59 1 Main A B and C Trip 74 59 1 Aux Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59 1 Aux A B and C Trip 75 50LS Main 1 Inactive Active OR of 50LS Main A B and C Trip 76 50LS Aux 1 Inactive Active OR of 50LS Aux A B and C Trip 77 50BF 1 Main 1 Inactive Active 78 50BF 2 Main 1 Inactive Active 79 81 1 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 1 OF UF and FRC Trip 80 81 2 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 2 OF UF and FRC Trip 81 81 3 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 3 OF UF and FRC Trip 82 81 4 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 4 OF UF and FRC Trip 83 ProLogic1 1 Inactive Active 84 ProLogic2 1 Inactive Active 85 ProLogic3 1 Inactive Active 86 ProLogic4 1 Inactive Active 87 ProLogic5 1 Inactive Active 88 ProLogic6 1 Inactive Active 89 ProLogic7 1 Inactive Active 90 ProLogic8 1 Inactive Active 91 ProLogic9 1 Inactive Active 92 ProLogic10 1 Inactive Active 93 ProLogic11 1 Inactive Active 94 ProLogic12 1 Inactive Active 95 Output Contact 1 1 Open Closed 96 Output Contact 2 1 Open Closed 97 Output Contact 3 1 Open Closed D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 15 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 98 Output Contact 4 Open Closed 99 Output Contact 5 Open Closed 100 Out
249. d appear Note The default passwords are remove quotation marks View Access view Change Access change Service Access service 3 5 Terminal Mode The terminal mode is used to access the relay for maintenance functions see Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Menu on page 2 9 and Firmware Update on page 2 12 3 6 Relay Control Panel RCP is used for all user interface A short description of the RCP configuration to connect to a relay is given here Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details The RCP displays the following metering parameters 3 phase apparent power e Power factor e All sequence voltages e All sequence currents 3 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 3 Using the IED Getting Started D02706R02 50 Single phase real power Single phase reactive power Single phase Apparent power Single phase power factor The metering display in RCP has a resolution of three decimals for both mea sured and calculated analog values Follow this sequence to configure RCP for USB link to the relay 1 Execute Relay Control Panel exe Execute L PRO 4000 Offliner exe Install Null Modem Driver Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details Run Relay Control Panel Go to Start gt All Programs gt ERLPhase gt Relay Control Panel gt Relay Control Panel First time RCP is run Hit Add New Add
250. de GGIO7 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Appendix N 36 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node GGIO8 Description Generic process I O D02706R02 50 LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input ogical Node GGIO9 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy General indica
251. de PLGGIO1 Data Name Description PLGGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal ProLogic 1 PLGGIO1 ST Ind2 stVal ProLogic 2 PLGGIO1 ST Ind3 stVal ProLogic 3 PLGGIO1 ST Ind4 stVal ProLogic 4 PLGGIO1 ST Ind5 stVal ProLogic 5 PLGGIO1 ST Ind6 stVal ProLogic 6 PLGGIO1 ST Ind7 stVal ProLogic 7 PLGGIO1 ST Ind8 stVal ProLogic 8 PLGGIO1 ST Ind9 stVal ProLogic 9 PLGGIO1 ST Ind10 stVal ProLogic 10 PLGGIO1 ST Ind11 stVal ProLogic 11 PLGGIO1 ST Ind12 stVal ProLogic 12 PLGGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal ProLogic 13 PLGGIO1 ST Ind14 stVal ProLogic 14 PLGGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal ProLogic 15 PLGGIO1 ST Ind16 stVal ProLogic 16 PLGGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal ProLogic 17 PLGGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal ProLogic 18 PLGGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal ProLogic 19 PLGGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal ProLogic 20 PLGGIO1 ST Ind21 stVal ProLogic 21 PLGGIO1 ST Ind22 stVal ProLogic 22 PLGGIO1 ST Ind23 stVal ProLogic 23 PLGGIO1 ST Ind24 stVal ProLogic 24 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 101 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 102 SGGGIO2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node SGGGIO2 Data Name Description SGGGIO2 ST intin stVal EIGGIO3 Active Settings Group This section defines logical node data for the logical node EIGGIO3 Data Name Description EIGGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal External Input 1 EIGGIO3 ST Ind2 stVal External Input 2 EIGGIO3 ST Ind3 stVal Exter
252. e DEF Scheme Selection Disable Permissive Blocking Communication Receiver3 Disabled El 1 to EI20 PL1 to PL24 DEF Scheme Send Pickup Delay TL6 sec 0 000 to 1 000 DEF Scheme Send Dropout Delay TD6 sec 0 000 to 1 000 External Single Phase 50BF Initiate Main A Phase Disabled El 1 to El20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Main B Phase Disabled El 1 to El20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Main C Phase Disabled El 1 to EI20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Main Three Phase Disabled El 1 to EI20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Auxiliary A Phase Disabled El 1 to El20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Auxiliary B Phase Disabled El 1 to El20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 Auxiliary C Phase Disabled El 1 to EI20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 AuxThree Phase Disabled El 1 to El20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 50N 67F Overcurrent Carrier Trip Action DEF Scheme Only DEF amp Dist Scheme DEF amp ProLogic DEF Dist amp ProLogic Direction Forward 310 Pickup A 0 2 to 50 0 5A 0 1 to 10 0 1A Pickup Delay sec 0 005 to 99 990 50N 67R Overcurrent Carrier Block Action Dist Scheme Only ProLogic only Dist amp Pro Logic L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 12 Scheme Selector Direction Reverse 310 Pickup A 0 2 to 50 0 5A 0 1 to 10 0 1A Pickup Delay sec 0
253. e 11 Negative Sequence 12 Zero Sequence 310 are cal culated by using the following equations 2 35 IT t alptaTl i e ihiatiai tf 2120 2 36 I a Ig al a whetea 12120 7 40 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 31 14tIgtle 37 where I Phase A Current Ig Phase B Current Ic Phase C Current Using Equation 6 notice that there is a need to triple the pickup setting current on one phase to obtain the pickup value of negative sequence current For example injecting 1 0 A on Phase A only Phase B Phase C 0 and with no voltage applied the 46 51 element becomes non directional even though the setting is directional 38 _1 4 0 a0_ ca 1_ 0334 3 3 46 51 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 46 51 Alarm 2 Apply single phase current to the relay terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 2 5 A 3 Slowly ramp the current up At 2 9 to 3 1 A expect 3 0 A 46 51 Pickup Alarm High 4 Turn current source off 46 51 Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 9 2 Set timer start from single phase 0 0 A to 12 00 A transition this equates to 4x pickup Time Delay TMS x s ar a ee l p C Multiple 1 30x 0 02434 eal 3 0 x 0 02434 56t 1201s 39 4e D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 41 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50BF Breaker Fail and 50LS Low
254. e High L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D 3 Appendix D Event Messages Self Check Fail due to DC Offset Detector Appendix D 4 L PRO Event Messages Self Check DC Ch n Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Self Check DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level condition has reset Self Check DC Ch n O P Block Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Relay is blocked New Settings loaded Active group n Where n 1 8 New Setting Loaded Manual Settings Load request activate SGn Manual or user initiated settings change Manual Settings Load request completed Completion of user initiated settings change Changed Active Group from x to y This happens when relay changes setting group Automatic group Logic n logic initiated setting group change User changed Active Group from x to y This happens when the relay changes setting group User initiated setting group change Unit Recalibrated Unit restarted User logged In Note For either of the above cases the DSP controller functions con tinue with normal auxiliary relay outputs provided that DSP failure or Self Check Fail Block has not occurred The DSP has an algorithm that detects continuous dc levels on the analog in puts and initiates alarms and relay output contact blocking when the measured dc level exceeds the Alarm or Block level The Alarm level is intended to pro vide an ea
255. e Line Telephone System m E Figure 2 5 Internal Modem Link Desktop Computer Access the relay s user interface through a telephone link between the relay and the computer using an optional internal modem If the modem has been in stalled Port 118 on the rear panel is labelled INTERNAL MODEM Connect the relay s Port 118 to an analog telephone line or switch using a stan dard RJ 11 connector When an internal modem is installed the relay s Port 118 is used to interface to the modem internally Appropriate Port 118 settings are configured at the factory when the internal modem is installed The factory defaults are MO0S0 0 amp B 1 for an external modem and MO0S0 0 for an internal modem L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 9 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Menu D02706R02 50 This section describes how to configure a standard Windows VT 100 terminal program on the PC for use with the relay The computer must be connected to the relay via the front USB port 150 The relay is accessed using a standard VT 100 terminal style program on the computer eliminating the need for specialized software Any terminal program that fully supports VT 100 emulation and provides z modem file transfer ser vices can be used HyperTerminal which is included in Windows XP and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE is used here as an example
256. e or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 ursel resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 40 0 Analog Output Status Any Varia 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response tion D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 31 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Appendix F 32 L PRO 4000 User Manual DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var neers Function Codes en Function Codes ae Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 40 2 Analog Output Status 16 bit with 129 response 00 04 start ston flag 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 29 response Echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date Absolute time 2 write 07 limited qty 1 29 response 51 1 Time and Date CTO Absolute time 4129 response 07 _ limited qty synchronized 4130 unsol resp faty 4 51 2 Time and Date CTO Absolute time 29 response 07 limited qty unsynchronized 4130 unsol_resp qty 1 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 29 response 07 limited qty aty 1 52 2 Time delay F
257. e 79 recloser The line breaker s is deemed to be open if the current through it is below 4 of the nominal current rating For a 5 A rated relay this is 0 2 A rms 3 Phase Reclose Timers The lead breaker open interval times are settable for each reclosing shot T1 to T4 for the 3 phase recloser The follow breaker open time interval is common for each reclosure attempt This follower breaker reclose time can be set to use the 79 follower timer TF or the 79 reset timer TD See L PRO 4000 Function Logic Diagram for details Lead or Follower Breaker Logic The recloser setting options allow the lead breaker to be the main or auxiliary breaker The recloser automatically selects the follower breaker into the lead position after the out of service time delay TC is exceeded If the follower breaker is removed from service after the out of service time delay TC there is no further follower breaker reclose attempts The breaker status is reset when the breaker status changes to closed for at least 10 seconds or if the relay pow er supply is toggled Off then On again A breaker is considered to be closed if L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 25 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 26 the current measured through it is greater than 0 2 A secondary for a 5 A relay 4 I where J is either 1 A or 5 A External Reclose Blocking The 79 also supports blocking from external devices via the output matrix and the internal 79 Lockout ind
258. e Description D81_1PTOF1 ST Str general 81 1 Overfrequency Trip D81_1PTOF1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 Overfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_1PTOF1 ST Op general 81 1 Overfrequency Trip D81_2PTOF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_2PTOF2 Data Name Description D81_2PTOF2 ST Str general 81 2 Overfrequency Trip D81_2PTOF2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 Overfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_2PTOF2 ST Op general 81 2 Overfrequency Trip D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 97 Appendix N 98 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D81_3PTOF3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_3PTOF3 Data Name Description D81_3PTOF3 ST Str general 81 3 Overfrequency Trip D81_3PTOF3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 Overfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_3PTOF3 ST Op general 81 3 Overfrequency Trip D81_4PTOF4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_ 4PTOF4 Data Name Description D81_4PTOF4 ST Str general 81 4 Overfrequency Trip D81_4PTOF4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 Overfrequency Direction set to unknown D81_4PTOF4 ST Op general 81 4 Overfrequency Trip D81_1PTUF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PTUF1 Data Name Description D81_1PTUF1 ST Str general 81 1 Underfrequency Trip D81
259. e relay terminals must be greater than 0 2 A 4 I omingj to enable due to low set supervision for details see Figure 7 10 Loss of Potential Logic 60 on page 7 12 Ph A 300 301 0 5 A 20 Ph B 302 303 0 5 A Z 120 Ph C 304 305 0 5 A 2 120 Observe 60 Alarm Low 4 Instantaneously reduce single phase voltage to 48 V or less 60 Alarm High Contact 2 Closed L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Testing the LOP 11 Supervision 1 Restore 3 phase voltages to 66 4 V Observe 60 Alarm Low Contact 2 Open 2 Increase balanced 3 phase currents to 10 1 A per phase 3 Reduce single phase voltage to 0 Observe 60 Alarm remains low Observe Contact 2 remains open 4 Reduce currents to 0 Testing the LOP 3 9 Supervision 1 Restore 3 phase voltages to 66 4 V Observe 60 Alarm Low Contact 2 Open 2 Increase any single phase current to 1 1 A 3 Reduce single phase voltage to 0 Observe 60 Alarm remains low Observe Contact 2 remains open 4 Reduce all sources to 0 Testing Negative Seq Supervision 1 Instantaneously apply following signals Voltages Ph A 330 66 4 V lt 0 Ph B 331 0 V Ph C 332 0 V Ph N 333 Currents Ph A 300 301 0 5A lt 0 Ph A 302 303 0 5A lt 120 Ph A 304 305 0 5A lt 120 Observe 60 Alarm Low 2 Reduce all sources to 0 3 Change settings as given below Enable Neg Seq Monitoring
260. e six most recently accessed setting files Exit Quits the program Edit Menu Undo Undo last action Cut Cut the selection Copy Copy the selection Paste Insert clipboard contents Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to the clipboard Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to another Window Cascade Cascades all open windows Tile Tiles all open windows Hide Show Tree If this option is checked then the LHS Tree view will be hidden 1 9 More Windows Allows access to all open Offliner set ting files The active document will have a check beside it Help User Manual Displays the user manual About Offliner Displays the Offliner version Toolbar New Create a new document Create a new document of the most recent setting version Open Open an existing document Open an existing document Save Save the active document Save the active document L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 3 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 4 Table 6 1 Windows Menu Cut Cut the selection Cut selection Copy Copy the selection Copy the selection Paste Insert clipboard contents Insert clipboard contents Undo Copy graph to clipboard Undo last action Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to the clipboard Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to another Brings up the Copy Inputs dialog box Show Hide LHS Tree If this option is checked then the LHS Tree view will be hidden
261. eak infeed logic 4 55 D02706R02 50
262. ed Zone 3 Blocking Disabled Zone 4 Blocking Disabled Zone 5 Blocking Disabled Out of step Swing Timer 0 05 0 00 to 1 00 11 Supervision 10 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 3lo Blocking 2 5 A 0 5 to 50 0 Blocking Reset Time 2 00 0 25 to 2 00 Top Blinder Outer X4 27 0 ohm 18 0 to 100 0 Top Blinder Inner X3 18 0 ohm 18 0 to 27 0 Bottom Blinder Inner X2 18 0 ohm 27 0 to 18 0 Bottom Blinder Outer X1 27 0 ohm 100 0 to 18 0 LHS Blinder Outer R1 27 0 ohm 100 0 to 18 0 LHS Blinder Inner R2 18 0 ohm 27 0 to 18 0 RHS Blinder Inner R3 18 0 ohm 18 0 to 27 0 RHS Blinder Outer R4 27 0 ohm 18 0 to 100 0 Switch On To Fault SOTF Switch On To Fault Disabled Breaker Signal Close Command Close Command Pulse El 1 El Spare 1 Main Breaker Status El 3 El Spare 3 Aux Breaker Status lt disabled gt Pole Dead Pickup Timer 0 2 s 0 0 to 999 9 Enable Duration 0 2 s 0 0 to 999 9 Device 50 Pickup 10 0 A 0 5 to 50 0 Device 50N Pickup 25 A 0 1 to 50 0 Device 21 Zone 2 Disabled D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 11 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 12 Undervoltage 27 Supervision Disabled Device 27 Pickup 25 00 vV 1 00 to 120 00 Second Harmonic Restraint Enabled 12 11 Ratio 0 2 0 0 to 10 0 Weak Infeed Weak Infeed Disabled
263. ed in the relay allow all the SCADA master access to the event data from the relay Trip and Alarm events only This display is a snapshot of the event list which must be manually refreshed to display new events that occur while the display is up There is a list of Event Messages for details see Event Messages in Appendix D 4 4 Fault Log D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The L PRO stores a log of faults in a 100 entry circular log Each entry contains the time of the fault fault type faulted phase fault quantities as per the below table Fault log will be triggered only for trip condition and it won t log for an alarm condition Table 4 29 Fault Log Fault Type Fault Quantities 21P Phase Distance Fault Location Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle Main VA VB VC Phasors Line IA IB IC Phasors Frequency 21N Ground Distance Fault Location Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle Main VA VB VC Phasors Line IA IB IC Phasors Main Voltage Zero Sequence Phasor 3V0 Line Current Zero Sequence Phasor 310 Frequency Distance Scheme Trip POTT PUTT DCB Fault Location Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle Main VA VB VC Phasors Line IA IB IC Phasors Main Voltage Zero Sequence Phasor 3V0 Line Current Zero Sequence Phasor 310 Frequency 59 Main Over voltage 27 Main Unde
264. el Comm Board GFPDB Graphics Front Panel Display Board GPS Global Positioning System HMI Human Machine Interface ICD file extension ICD for IED Capability Description IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IED Intelligent Electronic Device IP Internet Protocol IP address IRIG B Inter range instrumentation group time codes LE Load Encroachment LED Light emitting Diode LHS Left Hand Side LMDA Live Main Dead Aux L PRO 4000 User Manual Acronyms vi LOCB L PRO Output Contact Board LOCBH L PRO Output Contact Board HCFI LOP Loss of Potential MPB Main Processor Board MPC Micro Processor PLC Programmable Logic Controller POTT Permissive Over reaching Transfer Trip PUTT Permissive Under reaching Transfer Trip PT Permissive Trip RAIB Relay AC Analog Input Board RASB Relay AC Analog Sensor Boards RHS Right Hand Side RPCB Rear Panel Comm Board RTOS Real Time Operating System RTU Remote Terminal Unit SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition SG Setting Group SIR ratio Source Impedance Ratio SOTFE Switch On To Fault TT Transfer Trip TUI Terminal User Interface UI User Interface VI Virtual Input WI Weak Infeed L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Table of Contents D02706R02 50 Prefa e es ena eaea a aa a a a aaa a a aa aa i Contact Information c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteneseeeeeeeeeees i
265. elay is applied The currents from the parallel line s is brought into the relay via spare current inputs 743 and 744 The currents from up to two parallel lines can be added to determine the parallel line 37 current There are two possible ways to get the parallel line 37 currents 1 Connect all 3 phases of the first parallel line into the 743 inputs The currents are recorded by the relay if a recording initiation occurs and are added by the relay to obtain 3 7 to be used in the line impedance to fault calcula tion Alternatively the neutral current from line 1 CTs can be connected to I 43 This quantity is added with the other line 1 phase current inputs which are p3 Ic3 0 since no connection is made to obtain line 1 residual 379 current If this is done the individual line 1 phase currents is not recorded by the relay 2 Connect the currents from the second parallel line if present in a similar way to that of line 1 ProLogic Control Statements Using ProLogic the relay can pick any of the protection functions external in puts or virtual inputs and place them into Boolean like statements ProLogic handles up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement 24 statements are possible The results from these statements are mapped to output contacts using the output matrix The ProLogic control statements are used to create Boolean like logic The re lay can use any of the protection functions or external inputs com
266. eme Slow speed swing recording can be used to analyze system stability Ifthe relay has reached its recording capacity new records overwrite the oldest records The relay provides DFR quality fault recording capturing input signal wave forms and external input states at a rate of 96 samples per cycle Each record also contains the timing of the internal logic produced by the relay e g Device 51 trip Obtain this information by uploading the records from the relay via the Relay Control Panel file transfer process and view them with RecordBase View software The quantities recorded are 18 analog channels 6 voltages and 12 currents 96 samples cycle which captures up to the 25th harmonic External inputs 1 ms resolution e Protection element output signals 8 samples cycle e ProLogic signals 8 samples cycle e Active setting group The recorded protection element output signals includes Phase segregated Start and Trip signals of the Distance trip Backup Overcurrent Back up Earth Fault Overvoltage Undervoltage and CB Fail Protection Parameters that are user selectable with respect to recording transients e Record length 0 2 to 10 0 seconds gt 12 to 600 cycles 60 Hz Base with automatic extension to capture successive triggers e Recorder triggering by any internal logic or external input signal e g 52 A e Pre trigger time configurable between 0 10 to 2 00 seconds L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 55 4 Protect
267. ement FaultData D50LSAMMXU9 MMXU4 Measurement FaultData D21N5MMXU10 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData DSCHMMXU11 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D59MMMXU12 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D59AMMXU13 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D27MMMXU14 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D27AMMXU15 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D21N3MMXU16 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D21N4MMXU17 MMXU2 Measurement FaultData D5067MMXU18 MMXU4 Measurement FaultData D5167MMXU19 MMXU4 Measurement FaultData D59M2MMXU20 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D59A2MMXU21 MMXU3 Measurement FaultData D21N1MSQI1 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D21N2MSQI2 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 11 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 12 FaultData D21N3MSQI3 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D21N4MSQI4 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D21N5MSQI5 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance FaultData DSCHMSQI6 MSQI1 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D4650MSQI7 MSQI2 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D50N67MSQI8 MSQI2 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D51N67MSQI9 MSQI2 Sequence and imbalance FaultData D4651MSQI10 MSQI2 Sequence and imbalance Measurements MAINMMXU1 MMXU1 Measurement Measurements AUXMMXU2 MMXU5 Measurement Measurements MAINMSQI1 MSQI3 Sequence and imbalance System PLGGIO1 GGIO1 Generic process I O System SGGGIO2 GGIO2 Generic process I O System EIGGIO3 GGIO3
268. ency Trip D81_1PFRC1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 rate of change of frequency Direction set to unknown D81_1PFRC1 ST Op general 81 1 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_2PFRC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_2PFRC2 Data Name Description D81_2PFRC2 ST Str general 81 2 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_2PFRC2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 rate of change of frequency Direction set to unknown D81_2PFRC2 ST Op general 81 2 rate of change of frequency Trip Appendix N 96 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D81_3PFRC3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_3PFRC3 Data Name Description D81_3PFRC3 ST Str general 81 3 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_3PFRC3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 rate of change of frequency Direction set to unknown D81_3PFRC3 ST Op general 81 3 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_4PFRC4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_4PFRC4 Data Name Description D81_4PFRC4 ST Str general 81 4 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_4PFRC4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 rate of change of frequency Direction set to unknown D81_4PFRC4 ST Op general 81 4 rate of change of frequency Trip D81_1PTOF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PTOF1 Data Nam
269. endix N 9 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 10 Protection D50PIOC3 PIOC2 Instantaneous overcurrent Protection D50NPIOC4 PIOC3 Instantaneous overcurrent Protection D46_50PIOC5 PIOC3 Instantaneous overcurrent Protection D51PTOC1 PTOC1 Time overcurrent Protection D51NPTOC2 PTOC2 Time overcurrent Protection D46_51NPTOC3 PTOC2 Time overcurrent Protection D59MPTOV1 PTOV1 Overvoltage Protection D59APTOV2 PTOV1 Overvoltage Protection D59M2PTOV3 PTOV1 Overvoltage Protection D59A2PTOV4 PTOV1 Overvoltage Protection D59NPTOV5 PTOV2 Overvoltage Protection DTLPTOV6 PTOV2 Overvoltage Protection D68TrRPSB1 RPSB1 Power swing detection blocking Protection D68B1RPSB2 RPSB2 Power swing detection blocking Protection D68B2RPSB3 RPSB2 Power swing detection blocking Protection D68B3RPSB4 RPSB2 Power swing detection blocking Protection D68B4RPSB5 RPSB2 Power swing detection blocking Protection D68B5RPSB6 RPSB2 Power swing detection blocking Protection D79MRREC1 RREC1 Autoreclosing Protection D79ARREC2 RREC1 Autoreclosing Protection D81_1PTOF1 PTOF1 Overfrequency Protection D81_2PTOF2 PTOF1 Overfrequency Protection D81_3PTOF3 PTOF1 Overfrequency Protection D81_4PTOF4 PTOF1 Overfrequency Protection D81_1PTUF1 PTUF1 Underfrequency Protection D81_2PTUF2 PTUF1 Underfrequency Protection D81_3PTUF3 PTUF1 Underfrequency Protection
270. ensena aar a cae ei 3 1 Start up Sequence 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeerteeneeetseaaeeeaaeees 3 1 Interfacing with the Relay 3 1 Front Panel Dis Olay cetsulacsutecnccatets nce tals de ateaal dec menblacata tien 3 2 Terminal Mode ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 Relay Control Panel 0 sccccccccssoetieteicaticacderet otis cactehsectacneses 3 8 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 1 L PRO 4000 User Manual vii Table of Contents Protection and Recording Functions eeeeeeees 4 1 Communication Aided Scheme n 4 50 Recording FUNCTIONS vo ossctniscanpuctssgeasutest ede naasegaeee atntuahee 4 55 EVGNUILOG ccsiesiate2dscactateces a s 4 58 Fault LOG es ces cover donisedvarsanelvdelihldeaivh peices 4 59 5 Data Communications ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 PSU OUI GI n sted et Sees E aie ae cnet ee 5 1 SCADA Protocol sv ssc scicec class eteeccveneveves cisadstiadetenneaas ceeds 5 1 IEC 61850 CommMuNniGatlon sccccicctinietecteceeuveyeciennvecens 5 7 6 Offliner Settings Software cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 UIMOCUICUION eA AEEA EEEE docked dates ee TAT 6 1 Offliner Features i c cceceniscceeincanessenustarteetaentiditen 6 2 Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeees 6 5 Handling Backward Compatibility 0 000000 eee 6 6 RecordBase View Software c ssecccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 Main Branches from the Tree View 6 9
271. ently available state Channel Type Address Value Hold Readings Read Write 01 0000 Readings update normally inactive FFOO Hold readings active Preset Single Register Function Code 06 Channel Address Value Scaled Up By Event Message Control See below for details of use Refresh event list 40513 No data required N A Acknowledge the cur 40514 No data required N A rent event and get the next event Get the next event 40515 No data required N A without acknowl edge Event Buffer Size 100 Diagnostic Subfunctions Function Code 08 Return Query Data Subfunction 00 This provides an echo of the submitted message Appendix E 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Diagnostic Subfunctions Function Code 08 Restart Comm Option Subfunction 01 This restarts the Modbus communications process Force Listen Only Mode Subfunction 04 No response is returned IED enters Listen Only mode This mode can only be exited by the Restart Comm Option com mand Report Slave ID Function Code 17 0x11 A fixed response is returned by the IED including system model version and issue numbers Channel Type Bytes Value Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 OxFAO 4000 decimal Version Number Read Only 2 and 3 Version number Issue Number Read Only 4 and 5 Issue nu
272. er calibration when derived from an external GPS satellite source The L PRO 4000 Line Protection relay will also process derived IRIG B style signals generated from alternate time sources using time quality information to differentiate The ongoing presence of a valid IRIG B time source is indicat ed by an LED on the front panel of the IED and is evident in data records An SNTP time source has a lower order of precedence from a valid IRIG B source SNTP operation primary and secondary requires network access and the selection and configuration of suitable SNTP network sources The SNTP time may be configured for re synchronization cycles ranging from 15 minutes to 36 hours adjusting the IED system time to an accuracy within 1 second No visual indication is provided on the IED front panel regarding the status of the SNTP synchronization however this information is available in data re cords The IED comes equipped with an internal free running oscillator used to gen erate a 1 PPS time signal in the absence of any alternate available time source Use ofthis oscillator as the primary IED time source requires manual time con figuration with the general accuracy subject to user input parameters and is recommended primarily for stand alone unsynchronized applications The in ternal oscillator carries a lifetime accuracy including temperature effects and aging of 25 ppm 2 4 Communicating with the Relay Intelligent Electronic Devi
273. er does not have to be enabled for this logic to work The 2 circuit breakers cannot share the same input Appendix L 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Test Configuration Virtual Inputs D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Invalid Selection x Main Breaker and Aux Breaker are not allowed to connect to the same input Figure L 20 Invalid Selection Examples to test the 79 functions using Virtual Inputs and ProLogic to simu late the reclose initiation and breaker contact a status are shown below Virtual Inputs are multi use logic points that are accessed remotely via SCA DA control and or locally via the Terminal User Interface TUI We will set up 6 virtual inputs to trip and close each breaker and to initiate the 79 External inputs to provide the breaker a trip close and initiate signals can be used but using virtual inputs and ProLogic testing is quicker and does not require an external dc supply or relays to simulate the circuit breakers The Virtual Input VI names are used for descriptive purposes This name will appear in the event log when the logic point becomes active The relay supports 2 circuit breakers and in this example we will name the main circuit breaker 52 1 and the auxiliary circuit breaker 52 2 Virtual Inputs 1 2 3 and 4 will be used as Control Switches CS for tripping and closing while Virtual Input 7 will be used to enable or disable the 79 Virtual Input
274. er frequency a fixed level of over frequency or at a rate of change level df dt The df dt function can be set to operate for a positive rate of change or a negative rate of change Each frequen cy element has a definite time delay setting to create a time delayed output A fixed level of positive sequence voltage of 0 25 pu provides an undervoltage inhibit on each element Frequency vo ef Figure 4 20 Frequency Fixed Level L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 35 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50LS Overcurrent 4 36 ae vee Figure 4 21 Frequency Rate of Change Table 4 19 81 Over Under Frequency Settings Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Picku 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level P 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change 81 1 Pickup Dela 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level P y 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change Picku 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level P 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change 81 2 Pickup Dela 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level P y 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change Picku 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level P 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change 81 3 Pickup Dela 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level P y 0 20 to 99 99 seconds rate of change Picku 50 000 to 59 995 or 60 005 to 70 000 fixed level P 10 0 to 0 1 or 0 1 to 10 0 rate of change 81 4 Pickup Dela 0 05 to 99 99 seconds fixed level
275. ere Sections for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here Binary Outputs cannot be as signed a Class The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point most An alog Inputs can also be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor oxi Ele Edt Window Help l8l x DSa amp seelaa E C dertifioation L PRO SCADA Summary Relay C Analog Inputs C External inputs Point Change Deadband Reported C Output Contacts Name Value Group Index Event Class Deadband Units Scale Units Virtual inputs m T Seta oups SCADA Communication System Parameters SCADA Communication ED Acetone ft C DAP Configuration Mode Ethernet Network Port DNP3 Level 2 TCP Point Map Boul Rate 118200 C Class Data Party oud EE SCADA Settings Summary Data Link Timeout s00 C Record Length Keep Alive Timeout o E Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 UDP Response Source Port of Request Line Parameters Number of Masters i C Scheme Selector Connection Based On Port Number Breaker Status Master 1 IP Address i72 464 4 C Directional Element Master 1 Port 20000 LJ Protection Functions Master 2 1P Address 1724612 TE Crete Trigger Master 2 Port 20000 BL ProLogic Master 31P Address 1721621 eT ewe Lage Master 3 Port 20000 C Output Matrix C Settings Summary C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Binary Inputs
276. erly wheth er the impedance entered into the protection zone is normal load condition or fault condition This is distinguished by monitoring all phase to phase impedance values i e Zab Zbc amp Zca If all the three phase impedances enter into the protection zones with the limited load angle area it is declared as a loading condition and 21P function is blocked If only one of the phase to phase impedance enters into the protection zones with the limited load angle area then this can be de clared as fault condition Generally the three phase fault will not have any additional resistance compo nent other than the conductor resistance Therefore three phase fault will al ways have the fault angle as close to line angle only and it will not enter into the loading area L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Zab Zab Zab 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Figure 4 5 Load Encroachment LE Logic on page 4 5 shows how the LE function works Phase to phase current monitoring has been added to the logic to ensure stable operation 21P settings 21P Zab 21P Zab 21P Zab 50 lab 50 Ibc 50 Ica eS 4 D Load Encroachment LE Figure 4 5 Load Encroachment LE Logic Table 4 1 21P Phase Distance Element Settings Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa Enable Disa ble ble ble ble ble Characteristic Type Mho
277. es Zab Zbc and Zca are within the limited load angle area Load Encroachment Test Procedure 1 Use the following load encroachment settings together with above 21P set ting Load Encroachment M Enabled LHS RHS Load impedance ohm 4 00 4 00 Upper Angle deg 120 60 Lower Angle deg 240 50 Figure 7 15 Load Encroachment Settings 2 Apply the following 3 phase voltages to the relay main ac V terminals Ph A 330 62 0 V lt 0 Ph B 331 62 0 V lt 240 Ph C 332 62 0 V lt 120 Ph N 333 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Weak Infeed Test D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 3 Apply the following 3 phase currents to the relay main ac current terminals Ph A 300 301 5 3 A lt 30 Ph B 302 303 5 3 A lt 210 Ph C 304 305 5 3 A lt 90 4 Observe target Load Encroachment 5 Disable Load Encroachment repeat steps 2 3 6 Observe 21P3 Alarm Trip End of Load Encroachment test Weak Infeed tripping operates on 4 basic conditions 1 Low Positive Sequence Voltage 27V1 or High Neutral Voltage 59V0 2 No Zone 2 or Zone 4 reverse element picked up 3 Loss of Potential 60 element dropped out 4 Permissive trip received from the remote end 21 2 6ms J 108 21 4R TWD1 Receiver ame 0 112 Weak aM Infeed es gt Enable Switch ll al Scheme Scheme Trip Send Figure 7 16 Weak Infeed Logic
278. exists the POTT scheme on L PRO 1 will trip breaker 1 To prevent this unwanted tripping on the parallel line the relay has current reversal logic The relay current reversal logic prevents the false trip during this current reversal condition Gate 116 of the functional logic diagram and timer TL1 and TD1 stretch the zone 4 logic and block the POTT scheme from tripping the breaker or sending the transfer trip signal to the remote end D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 23 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Communication aided Tripping Scheme imer Considerations Receiver 1 Receiver 2 51NAam peL Appendix L 24 Week Infeed Enable Switch Figure L 40 Communication aided Scheme L PRO 4000 User Manual Trip The basic selection does not provide any communication aided logic for local or remote protections D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example L PRO Scheme Timers Summary Table 1 3 DCB Scheme Timers Timer Considerations TD2 Upon receipt of a Blocking Signal at the local end from the remote end TD2 extends the Blocking Signal to prevent a Scheme Trip The Blocking Signal should be extended by Time for the local 21 2 to de assert 1 cycle Blocking Signal Channel Reset Time i e the time for the removal of the Block to propagate from the remote end to the local end Security Margin TL2 Delays the local 21 2 from producing
279. f the relay Ifa 69 V phase to neutral quantity is applied to the back VA terminals 69 0 V would be indicated as the desired calibration If a 69 V phase to neutral quantity is ap plied to the to the back VA terminals 69 0 V would be indicated as the desired calibration In a similar way the user needs to go through all 18 ac analog quantities and provide the information about the injected calibration quantities The user must have a test source to perform this function Only the magnitude of the analog input requires calibration not the angle When an analog input channel is calibrated verify the quantity measured by selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu VA of the ac voltage input is used as a reference quantity by the relay Therefore if it is ab sent there is not a locked valid relationship among all of the analog quantities To test the external inputs connect the relay using Relay Control Panel Meter ing gt External This screen displays the status of the Input and Output Contacts Placing a voltage of 125 Vdc ominals 150 V maximum to each of the external inputs in turn causes the input to change from Low to High status These inputs are polarity sensitive and this screen has a 0 5 second update rate Test the output relays to verify their integrity using the Utilities gt Toggle Out puts The output contacts are toggled from open to closed by pressing the Closed button Verify the output contact status
280. fa Scheme Selector C Directional Element C Protection Functions Z Circle Trigger a 0 ProLogic 0 Group Logic C Output Matrix Settings Summary P Address Port S Setting Group 2 Setting Gre E Setting Group 3 Setting Gre Master 2 E Setting Group 4 Setting Gre E Setting Group 5 Setting Gre P Address 192 2 Port 2 H 0 Setting Group 6 Setting Gre Setting Group 7 Setting Gre Master 3 C Setting Group 8 Setting Gre UDP Response e Connection Based On E Number of Masters Es Master 1 IP Address Port m L PRO Offliner Settings v401 Figure 6 12 SCADA Communication The relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for both Serial and Ethernet TCP and UDP For DNP3 Level 2 TCP up to 3 independent Masters are supported 6 16 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 DNP Configuration Point Map DNP Configuration Class Data D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 EJ Fie Edit window Help ojeju Sei Identification Mapped To O Relay Group Hame PointList Analog Inputs C External Inputs Binary Inputs C Output Contacts 1 2 External Input 4 C Virtual Inputs 1 2 External Input oE ara Setting Groups 1 2 External Input 3 System Parameters 1 2 External Input I SCADA Communication 4 21 External Inp
281. fications L PRO Model 4000 Specifications External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG B input modulated or unmodulated auto detect Upon the loss of an external time source the relay maintains time with a maximum 160 seconds drift per year at a constant temperature of 25C The relay can detect loss of re establish ment of external time source and auto matically switch between internal and external time Synchronization Accuracy Sampling clocks synchronized with the time source internal or external Appendix A 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix A IED Specifications Overall L PRO Accuracies L PRO Model 4000 Specifications Current 2 5 of inputs from 0 1 to 1 0 x nominal current lp 1 0 of inputs from 1 0 to 40 0 x nominal current lp Voltage 1 0 of inputs from 0 01 to 2 0 x nominal voltage V Impedance 5 0 or 5 mQ of set value from 0 05 to 66 00 ohms secondary 0 25 to 330 00 ohms sec ondary 1 A nominal Directional Phase Angle 2 0 of set value of Positive Sequence Line Angle value from 25 0 to 89 0 Frequency Elements 0 001 Hz fixed level 0 05 Hz df dt Sync Check Elements 0 2 degrees Timers 3 ms of set value Inverse Overcurrent Timers 2 5 or 1 cycle of selected curve Definite Overcurrent Timers 2 5 or 1 cycle non directional 2 5 or 1 5 cycle directional Frequency T
282. for its proper oper ation Please consult the appropriate anti virus anti spyware software documentation to determine the relevant procedure L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction The L PRO 4000 provides easy to use state of the art comprehensive dis tance and directional line protection for medium to extra high voltage transmis sion lines using communication based schemes It provides control automation metering monitoring fault oscillography dynamic swing record ing event logging with advanced communications in a flexible cost effective package The primary protection is line protection with 5 zones of phase and ground dis tance functions user defined Mho or Quadrilateral shapes and communica tions based schemes i e teleprotection or pilot schemes To provide a complete package of protection and control the relay supplies oth er functions such as 1 0 to 1 3 cycle operation at 80 reach ideal for EHV transmission line applications Ring bus capability breaker failure and individual breaker monitoring 4 shot recloser with dead line dead bus control and sync check Single pole and three pole trip and reclose 24 statements of ProLogic addresses special protection needs Power Swing Blocking Tripping Load Encroachment Switch On To Fault function VT Supervision function CT Supervision function Over Under Voltage functions 8 Setting Groups SG with setting group
283. g Group Logic statements are entered into each of the 8 setting groups When the selector switch is rotated to the appropriate position the correspond ing setting group becomes active Each setting group logic can have a specific time delay pickup setting The user can also provide 2 additional logic inputs in each statement to be used to provide qualifiers before switching setting groups We are using a ProLogic statement and an external input as qualifiers see Using ProLogic to Qualify Group Logic Statements in Appendix L on page Appendix L 8 EI 1 low El 2 low and El 3 low Group Logic 16 Go to Group 1 Vv Enabled Name Coto Group 1 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 1 Setting Group 1 hd 0 0 0 Pickup Delay 5 seconds D o 1 o E 0 Input amp El 1 Selector 1 ed Input B El 2 Selector 2 Input C EIS e13 Selector3 F 3 Input D PLS PL 8 Block Group Logic Group Logic Input E El4 14 4305 Localemote S LocalRemote Out Figure L 7 Group Logic 16 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 5 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example El 1 high El 2 low and El 3 low Group Logic 15 Go to Group 2 IV Enabled Name l Go to Group 2 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 2 Setting Group 2 i 0 0 Pickup Delay 5 seconds 0 0 1 0 1 Input A El 1 Selector 1 w Input B El 2 Selector 2 Input C El 3 Selector 3 Input PL 8 Block Group Logic De O
284. gger Settings Z Circle Trigger Enable Disable Positive Sequence Impedance 0 1 to 50 0 ohms secondary 5 A 0 5 to 250 0 ohms secondary 1 A The Impedance Circle Trigger Z Circle Trigger triggers the relay to record on a dynamic swing disturbance only used to trigger a recording This trigger is usually set outside the last protection zone used and blocked during LOP conditions Whenever a fault occurs and the line trips the fault locator calculates the fault type and the distance to the fault This information is available from the front display of the relay or through Port 150 123 or the SCADA port or through Relay Control Panel software Fault locator information can also be captured optionally in event records Fault locator can be enabled disabled through set tings system parameters The fault locator is initiated by the following logic e 21 Trip e 50N Trip 51N Trip e Scheme Trip e 21 Alarm configurable The relay fault locator uses the Takagi method of fault location The imped ance calculated for a fault initiated by any of the above functions will be cal culated and compared with the line impedance to calculate distance to fault L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 ProLogic D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Mutual Compensation The fault locator has the ability to take into account mutual compensation for up to two lines in parallel with the protected line where the r
285. gic can be used to supervise follower breaker closing attempts if an ex ternal input is used to signal that the follower breaker has a valid sync check signal from an external device e g PLC Operation of the Relay with the Single Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting This setting allows the relay to trip only the faulted phase if the fault is single phase in nature then initiate a reclose of that phase after a line dead time The reason for this is that many faults are transient in nature such as those caused by lightening The trip of the faulted phase and that the trip of the faulted phase then reclosing it some time later should in many cases allow the line to return into service The benefit of this scheme is that approximately one half of the power flow on the line before the fault occurs can be sent down the line dur ing the open phase condition promoting system stability and eliminating the need to resynchronize the line It should be noted that employing this scheme means that the high voltage line breakers must be capable of opening and reclosing in a single phase mode and that additional equipment such as line and neutral reactors must be installed on the line in order to allow the scheme to work correctly A thorough systems study on the line and surrounding equipment must be performed in order that appropriate scheme settings be determined to obtain satisfactory performance of this scheme In operation the Single Phase Tri
286. gle phase in nature Multiple Phase line faults will 3 phase trip and lockout Single phase faults occurring at a frequency less than TDS reset time will result in 3 phase trip and lockout after first attempted reclose Single Phase MultiPhase Trip Scheme Setting An initial line fault will cause the line to either 3 phase trip or single phase trip If subsequent line faults occur before timers TD4 or TDS reset the line will 3 phase trip and lockout For any schemes selected if a line goes into the lockout state only a successful manual line reclose or a relay power supply reboot will reset the lockout logic The relay uses the current flow through a breaker to determine its status If measured current flow is less than 4 nominal current 0 2 A for 5 A relay the breaker is considered to be open The relay provides overvoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs Each input has two definite time delay functions Gate Switch Setting 59 Va Main 1 2 59 Vb Main 1 2 59 Vc Main 1 2 o eA Figure 4 16 59 Main Overvoltage The definite time delay main overvoltage function similar to the undervoltage function looks at all 3 phase to neutral voltages This function uses the RMS voltages to make this determination of overvoltage and is settable to an AND or OR logic The auxiliary overvoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main overvoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in puts
287. gth heading of the relay settings and can be set with the Offliner Settings software The relay compresses records on the fly achieving a typical lossless compres sion rate of 4 1 As a result the relay can store up to 75 x 2 second transient records or up to 75 x 120 seconds swing records or a combination of 75 tran sient swing and optionally event records If the storage is full new records au tomatically overwrite the oldest ensuring that the recording function is always available A listing of stored records is available through the Relay Control Panel under the Records gt List menu The listing transfers records to a connected PC and deletes them from storage L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 57 4 3 Event Log The relay maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log Each entry con tains the time of the event plus an event description Logged events include trips alarms external input assertions plus internal events such as setting changes Phase information is included in event messag es where appropriate For example the event log entry for a device trip might be 2010 Nov 21 15 34 19 832 51 on ABC Trip The event log can be viewed in 2 ways Table 4 28 Event Log Front Panel The front panel display shows events in abbreviated form Trip and Alarm events only Relay Control Panel The full event log is available through the Main Menu gt Events of the Relay Control Panel SCADA The protocols includ
288. gth 7 Out Spare 7 010 s C Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 8 Out Spares ITN C Line Parameters T Scheme Selector 3 Out Spare 9 010 s C Breaker Status 10 Out Spare 10 010 s C Directional Element 11 Out Spare 11 010 A C Protection Functions FZ Circle Trigger 12 Out Spare 12 010 s 1 ProLogic 13 Out Spare 13 010 s Group Logic 14 Out Spare 14 010 s C Output Matrix C Settings Summary C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Note The dropout time of contacts assigned to Scheme Send is overridden by TD3 C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Figure 6 8 Output Contacts The Output Contacts are also identified during the setting procedure using meaningful names The dropout delay time settings are made here 6 12 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 6 Output Contact Names Outputs 1 to 21 User defined Dropout Timer 0 00 to 1 00 s Virtual Inputs L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help ojja amp al e015 8 fae C Identification E Relay Virtual Input Names 7 Analog Inputs _ External Inputs 4 Virtual Input 4 46 Virtual Input 16 Output Contacts I Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 17 H Virtual inputs 2 Virtual Inp 47 Virtual inp T Setting Groups 3 Virtual Input 3 18 Virtual Input 18 O System Parameters 4 Virtual Input 4 19 Virtual Input
289. h N 333 3 Connect variable single phase current source lagging phase to phase fault voltage by 80 to the relay main line current terminals Jumper Terminals 303 amp 305 Ph B C 302 304 1 5 A Z 170 Observe 21P2 Alarm Low 4 Increase current At 2 23 to 2 45 A expect 2 34 A 21P2 Alarm High 5 Turn off voltage and current sources L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide End of 21P2 test 21N2 Ground Zone 2 Phase to Neutral Under Impedance Distance Test Settings e Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance 100 of line 5 9 Q e Positive Sequence Line Angle Z1 80 e 21N2 7 38 Q Maximum Reach 125 of line at maximum torque angle of 80 compensated as per 21N calculations to 11 58 Q 276 5 e Resistive Component compensated to 9 41 Q 2 3 5 Time Delay 0 expect 1 3 cycles 22 ms or less e 310 Current Supervision 1 5 A minimum zero sequence current to allow 21N2 to operate I Phase Current Supervision 1 5 A minimum phase current to allow 21N2 to operate 21N Zan 50 la 50N 310 1 Directional Element N Zone 21N Zbn 50 Ib 139 141 0 TN 50N 310 J 142 Out 1 Directional Element 60 4ms 0 21N Zen 4N 50 Ic 140 Generic Phase Distance 50N 310 Logic any zone Directional Element Figure 7 14 Ground Distance Logic 21N This test demonstrates testing a single line
290. hase Initiated 871 0 Off inactive On active 79 1 Phase Blocked 872 0 Off inactive On active 1 Phase Open Timeout 873 0 Off inactive On active 1 Phase Fault Lockout 874 0 Off inactive On active 3 Phase Fault Lockout 875 0 Off inactive On active 1 3 Phase Fault Lockout 876 0 Off inactive On active DEF Scheme Trip 877 0 Off inactive On active DEF Scheme Send 878 0 Off inactive On active IRIG B Signal Loss 879 0 Off inactive On active 21P5 Trip 880 0 Off inactive On active 21N5 Trip 881 0 Off inactive On active 21P5 Alarm 882 0 Off inactive On active 21N5 Alarm 883 0 Off inactive On active 59N Def Trip 884 0 Off inactive On active 59N Inv Trip 885 0 Off inactive On active 59N Def Alarm 886 0 Off inactive On active 59N Inv Alarm 887 0 Off inactive On active 60 CTS Main 888 0 Off inactive On active L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 3 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 4 Read Coil Status Function Code 01 60 CTS Aux 889 0 Off inactive 1 On active Load Encroachment Block 890 0 Off inactive 1 On active 59 2 Main Trip 891 0 Off inactive 1 On active
291. he complex value ang Struct AnalogueValue_2 The angle of the complex value the unit is degrees Appendix N 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Component AnalogueValue_2 Comment General Analogue Value w r t Floating Point Value Parent Type AnalogueValue Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Type Enumeration Comment f FLOAT32 Floating point value Component Originator_2 Comment Originator Value Parent Type Originator Attribute Type Enumeration Comment ee a a L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 51 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Enumerated The following sub sections specify the enumerations that are associated to Type Definitions some Common Data Class attributes The definition of the enumerations is ac cording to IEC 61850 7 3 and IEC 61850 7 4 unless otherwise stated Enumerated type AutoRecSt Description Auto Reclose Status Ordinal Semantic 1 Ready 2 InProgress 3 Successful 4 WaitingForTrip 5 TripFromProtection 6 FaultDisappeared 7 WaitToComplete 8 CBclosed 9 CycleUnsuccessful 10 Unsuccessful 11 Aborted Enumerated type Beh Description Behaviour Ordinal Semantic 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Appendix N 52 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50
292. he particular application D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 5 3 5 Data Communications Offliner SCADA Configuration Details on using the Offliner software are available in To Install Software on the Computer on page xiii Details on downloading a completed settings file to the relay are available in Sending a New Setting File to the Relay on page 6 6 Open the Offliner application according to the instructions found in the indi cated section and highlight the SCADA Communication selection The screen appears as follows Co coe Ged x 0 jE 2 Identification 57 Connections SCADA Communication O System Parameters E C Winding cT IED Address 1 alii Parity SCADA Communication Baud Rate foa Mode _ Protection Functions _ ProLogic Serial Port 122 Data Link Timeout ms 0 to disable f gt L Output Matrix C Modbus ASCII C Record Length os O Settings Summary bts Se Nae C DNP3 Level 2 Keep Alive Timeout 0 s Oto disable Ethernet DNP3 Level 2 TCP pa Peis DNP3 Level 2 UDP Connection Based On Number of Masters 1 ps ee c Master 1 P Address 192 168 1 1 Port 20000 Master 2 IP Address Port Master 3 IP Address Port Figure 5 3 SCADA Communications The configuration of SCADA communication parameters via the Offliner ap plication is very intuitive Several settings options are progressively v
293. highest values that the outstation will report in DNP analog input objects These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers If the outstation is capable of transmitting both integers and floating point then integer and floating point values are required for the minimums and maximums For example a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa The outstation provides a linear conversion of the sensor s output signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating point values of 0 to 500 000 The sensor and outstation are used in an ap plication where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa For this input the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 0 0 and the maximum transmitted value would be stated as 19000 380 000 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 27 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile b The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations 16 bit and 32 bit is converted to engi neering units when received by the Master i e scaled according to the equation scaled value multiplier raw offset Scaling is not applied to Floating point variations since they are already transmitted in engineering units c Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given in the units shown in the previous column This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measurement d Maximal values are calculated
294. hsB cVal ang f Line voltage phase B angle MAINMMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f Line voltage phase C magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f Line voltage phase C angle MAINMMXU1 MX A phsA cVal mag f Line current phase A magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX A phsA cVal ang f Line current phase A angle MAINMMXU1 MX A phsB cVal mag f Line current phase B magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX A phsB cVal ang f Line current phase B angle MAINMMXU1 MX A phsC cVal mag f Line current phase C magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX A phsC cVal ang f Line current phase C angle MAINMMXU1 MX W phsA cVal mag f Phase A active power MAINMMXU1 MX W phsB cVal mag f Phase B active power MAINMMXU1 MX W phsC cVal mag f Phase C active power MAINMMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f Phase A reactive power MAINMMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f Phase B reactive power MAINMMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f Phase C reactive power MAINMMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f Phase A apparent power MAINMMXU1 MX VA phsB cVal mag f Phase B apparent power MAINMMXU1 MX VA phsC cVal mag f Phase C apparent power MAINMMXU1 MX PF phsA cVal mag f Phase A power factor MAINMMXU1 MX PF phsB cVal mag f Phase B power factor MAINMMXU1 MX PF phsC cVal mag f Phase C power factor MAINMMXU1 MX Z phsA cVal mag f Impedance phase A magnitude MAINMMXU1 MX Z phsA cVal ang f Impedance phase A angle MAINMMXU
295. hsC 21N3 Trip phase C D21N4PDIS10 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N4PDIS10 Data Name Description D21N4PDIS10 ST Str general 21N4 Trip D21N4PDIS10 ST Str dirGeneral 2NP4 Direction set to unknown D21N4PDIS10 ST Op general 21N4 Trip D21N4PDIS10 ST Op phsA 21N4 Trip phase A D21N4PDIS10 ST Op phsB 21N4 Trip phase B D21N4PDIS10 ST Op phsC 21N4 Trip phase C L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 87 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21N5PDIS11 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N5PDIS11 Data Name Description D21N5PDIS11 ST Str general 21N4 Trip D21N5PDIS11 ST Str dirGeneral 2NP4 Direction set to unknown D21N5PDIS11 ST Op general 21N4 Trip D21N5PDIS11 ST Op phsA 21N4 Trip phase A D21N5PDIS11 ST Op phsB 21N4 Trip phase B D21N5PDIS11 ST Op phsC 21N4 Trip phase C D2527RSYN1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D2527RSYN1 Data Name Description D2527RSYN1 ST Rel stVal 25 27 59 Sync Check D27MnPTUV1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27MnPTUV 1 Data Name Description D27MnPTUV1 ST Str general 27 Main Trip D27MnPTUV1 ST Str dirGeneral 27 Main Direction set to unknown D27MnPTUV1 ST Op general 27 Main Trip D27MnPTUV1 ST Str phsA 27 Main phase A Trip D
296. ht eo wo ND L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 5 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide About the Acceptance Test Setting File 7 6 The acceptance test setting file provided is not necessarily configured to a pro vide a realistic setting example Its configuration is intended to demonstrate simple test methods for each relay element Tests are organized to prevent in terference of one protection element on the next within the relay for ease of testing without using multiple setting files and minimizing the number of test connection changes All contacts in the relay will be tested if all elements in this procedure are tested as written Testing all the elements is accommodated by using of the relay Setting Groups 3 groups are used Setting Group 1 tests elements 21P 21N 68 60 Switch On To Fault Weak Infeed Setting Group 2 tests elements 46 50 46 51 50 51 SON SIN 27 59 SOLS 50BF Setting Group 3 tests elements 25 27 59 Sync Check 79 81 The file demonstrates all types of impedance characteristics available in the re lay circle tomato lens Quadrilateral Virtual Inputs are used to perform some input functions and demonstrate their use In addition to or exclusive of these tests the user may wish to perform dynam ic simulation tests on the relay to verify the relay operates as per protection scheme design using the settings that are applied for the particular line on which the relay will be installed
297. ible inputs Put these inputs into AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR and LATCH logics by clicking on the gate Invert the input by clicking on the input line The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2 and so forth If de scribed the user can illuminate the front target LED on operation of this func tion by enabling this feature The operation of the ProLogic statements are recorded in the events logs The above is an example of a ProLogic application where an output is produced if either of the line breakers is slow to open following a line fault In this example current through the main and aux line breaker is present as measured by the 50LS Main and the 50LS Aux functions after a protection line trip as by Output Contact 14 and after the 0 50 ms 3 cycles ProLogic pickup time delay Group Logic The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the relay protection algorithms The processing cycle happens once every half sec ond 0 5 s When using ProLogic statements the user must keep in mind that a latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0 5 seconds L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 27 6 Offliner Settings Software Output Matrix Output Contact Biock amp initiate 94 Recording 1 2 3 4 s 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 798 751 5Fi 1Pn 3Ph Fault Swing Target LEO Poles Pole
298. ic 4 ProLogic 4 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 5 ProLogic 5 ProLogic 5 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 6 ProLogic 6 ProLogic 6 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt ProLogic 7 ProLogic 7 ProLogic 7 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 19 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 20
299. ic pickup delay which was set to 10 seconds Setting Group 1 Logic Statements When setting group one becomes active either through a setting group change or is the default group after relay power up ProLogic 9 becomes high after the 10 00 second delay if EI 1 is low ProLogic 9 is set for a 0 26 second dropout time to be used with ProLogic 10 dropout timer allowing for the slower pro cessing thread where Group Logic is processed and providing a definite timed pulse to the group logic ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 IV Enabled Name ProLogic 9 AND Pickup Delay 10 00 seconds 0 0 0 Dropout Delay 0 26 seconds V Target Enabled Out Input El Selector 1 Figure L 1 ProLogic 9 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Prologic 10 has no intentional delay and becomes high for the combined drop out time of ProLogic 9 and 10 equalling 0 52 seconds ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 Enabled Name ProLogic10 O AND Pickup Delay 0 00 seconds Ln ee Dropout Delay 0 26 seconds o 1 0 JV Target Enabled i z z Input A El 1 Selector 1 x Input B PL 9 ProLogic 9 Figure L 2 ProLogic 10 Group Logic 1 is used to switch to the new setting group there is no intentional delay The user can also provide 4 additional logic inputs to be used to provide qualifiers before switching setting groups The example uses a ProLogic state ment
300. ication The user can control the 79 remotely or lo cally with external or virtual inputs Lockout Indication Lockout indication is provided for the lead and follower breaker The lead and follower lockout indication is set for a fixed time delay pickup of the close sig nal time TP plus 1 0 second When the recloser goes to the lead lockout con dition the breaker out of service timers are set to zero seconds and automatically pick up If the recloser is in the lead lockout state the logic re mains in that state for setting TD seconds after the main or auxiliary breaker is manually closed The follower lockout condition occurs when the follower breaker receives a close signal and the breaker remains open If the recloser is in the follower lockout state the logic remains in that state for setting TD sec onds after the follower breaker is manually closed Table 4 11 79 Recloser Settings 79 Recloser Enable Disable Number of Shots 1to4 First Reclose T1 0 1 to 999 9 seconds Second Reclose T2 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Third Reclose T3 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Fourth Reclose T4 1 0 to 999 9 seconds Close Time Tp 0 1 to 1 0 seconds Lockout Time TD 0 1 to 999 9 seconds Initiate Reset TDI 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Recloser Mode Main only Block Reset TDB 0 0 to 999 9 seconds Follower Time TF 0 0 to 999 8 seconds Breaker Out of Service TC
301. idee N DA SA VA N_OA SA_WA E AAA a 3 Aju 1099 synduj juan syuaung eur xm s ueun oul ule pasnun a pasnun SOA OW xn Aug picoey sindu o 0 OV gm oeu oy xny s O TOYUN sz ve g ETZ we z 6z sz Az oz Lita Ez az uz oz ooz ynduj a I er IN a IN IN Ss IX 6 sioeuop 9 GJ Z oun SJOBIUOD pesnun on 3ndino on ES ON ON be ON ONON ONON Loe ONON Ndno Woo vavos ell ts ern tg Heva wapo wom SER OT ay a Ge a Seo aw ov de Ee Q 00 E EE E 6 YN g A ZN ONE GG Ab A e PN Z O ny bi bets SZ bea es ae ei A OSZ SZL av A OSZ Szt av A OSZ SZ 8 A osz sZt ey A osz szt ar A OSZ szt ap A osz szi ay A osz szt er A osz szi sp 1eU13X3 M i Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings Figure H 1 Rear Panel 3U 3A previously 3U Chassis L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Na 7 D02706R02 50 epeueg ul apen O Q Oeke Peebebeleeclelelelelelelelcelelele eeeleplelelelelelele NSA SA WA N SA SA WA Orit gpI vpi eae gelt velt z t azi vzl onl En vit pasnun SHON OW uey pasnun SoA OV XNY ZA AjuQ psooay synd
302. ied to the right relay The user can choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the identification screen The relay only checks for proper relay type and setting version if the ignore serial number has been chosen D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 9 6 Offliner Settings Software Identification 6 10 The first screen presents all the menu items in the left menu tree Access the menu items by clicking the tabs at the top of the screen or the item on the left menu tree Table 6 3 Identification Identification Settings Version Indicates the settings version number fixed Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check if enabled Serial Number Available at back of each relay Unit ID User defined up to 20 characters Nominal CT Format 5AoriA Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz Standard I O Indicates standard I O values fixed Optional I O Not installed or 11 External Inputs 7 Output Contacts Network Card Installed or Not installed Comments User defined up to 78 characters Setting Software Setting Name User defined up to 20 characters Date Created Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered Station Station Name User defined up to 20 characters Station Number User defined up to 20 characters Location User defined up to 20 characters Line User defined up to 20 characters Important N
303. igure 7 21 Switch On To Fault setting for Status Monitoring Offliner 1 Objective of this test is to observe the basic operation of the logic Disable 50 50N 21P2 and 21N2 functions 2 During this test the Main Breaker Status input connected to EI 1 is used activate the SOTF logic Ring bus configuration shall be disabled to disa ble the Aux Breaker Status input 3 Instantaneously step three phase current from 0 to 1 05 A to Ph A 300 301 1 05 A lt 30 Ph B 302 303 1 05 A lt 90 Ph C 304 305 1 05 A lt 150 Voltage from 0 to 20 V to Ph A 330 333 20 0 V lt 0 Ph B 331 333 20 0 V lt 120 Ph C 332 333 20 0 V lt 120 AND External Input 1 from Low to High Analog inputs can be delayed by 1 3 cycles to simulate the delay in circuit breaker operation 4 Observe target Switch On To Fault on ABC End of Switch On To Fault Status Monitoring test D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 29 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 68 Power Swing Set to trip for this test Settings Outer Right Blinder 17 ohm Outer Left Blinder 17 ohm Inner Right Blinder 13 ohm Inner Left Blinder 13 ohm Top Outer Blinder 27 ohm Top Inner Blinder 18 ohm Bottom Inner Blinder 18 ohm Bottom Outer Blinder 27 ohm Swing timer 1 0 second I Supervision positive sequence current 3 0 A 379 Supervision 1 0 A Note Out of Step Blinders are Positive
304. ilateral secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Mho Characteristic Angle 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 70 0 to 140 0 Mho degrees Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 0 00 to 99 00 Both Id Supervision A second 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 Both ary 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 310 Supervision A sec 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 0 2 to 50 0 Both ondary 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 5A 0 04 to 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A 10 00 1A Line Angle degrees 5 0 to 89 0 Setting is made in Line Parameters Positive Sequence Angle Load Impedance Ohms R Ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 Both X Ohms secondary 150 0 to 150 0 Both Relay Method of The 21P and 21N Mho Quad elements use positive sequence voltage derived Me mory from a memory voltage as the polarizing quantity No user settings are re Polarization quired for the memory polarization functionality Sufficient positive sequence voltage should be available during all fault events However during certain fault events especially 3 phase bolted faults near the line VT location the pos itive sequence voltage may be insufficient fo
305. iliary Trip current Appendix N 58 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Protection D50PIOC3 Instantaneous Over 50 50 Trip current Protection D50NPIOC4 Instantaneous Over 50N 50N Trip current Protection D46_50PIOC5 Instantaneous Over 46 50 46 50 Trip and Alarm current Protection D51PTOC1 Time Overcurrent 51 51 Trip and Alarm Protection D51NPTOC2 Time Overcurrent 51N 51N Trip and Alarm Protection D46_51PTOC3 Time Overcurrent 46 51 46 51 Trip and Alarm Protection D59MPTOV1 Overvoltage 59 59 1 Main Trip Protection D59M2PTOV3 Overvoltage 59 59 2 Main Trip Protection D59APTOV2 Overvoltage 59 59 1 Auxiliary Trip Protection D59A2PTOV4 Overvoltage 59 59 2 Auxiliary Trip Protection D59NPTOV5 Overvoltage 59N Inverse 59N Inverse Trip and Alarm Protection DTLPTOV6 Overvoltage 59N Definite 59N Definite Time Delay Trip and Alarm Time Delay Protection D68TrRPSB1 Power swing detec 68 68 Power swing Trip tion blocking Protection D68B1RPSB2 Power swing detec 68 1 Zone 1 68 Power swing Trip Block tion blocking Protection D68B2RPSB3 Power swing detec 68 2 Zone 2 68 Power swing Trip Block tion blocking Protection D68B3RPSB4 Power swing detec 68 3 Zone 3 68 Power swing Trip Block tion blocking Protection D68B4RPSB5 Power swing detec 68 4 Zone 4 68 Power swing Trip tion blocking Protection D68B5RPSB6 Power sw
306. imer 2 5 of set value plus 1 25 cycles to 1 75 cycles of inherent delay fixed level at 2x pickup error lt 40 ms df dt at 0 1 Hz s above pickup error lt 100 ms D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 5 Appendix A IED Specifications L PRO Model 4000 Specifications Detailed Environmental Tests Description Test Test Level Type Test Test Points FCC Part 15 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted emissions ac dc power ports Class A 0 15 30 MHz IEC EN 60255 25 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted emissions ac dc power ports Class A 0 15 30 MHz IEC EN 61000 3 2 Power line harmonics ac power port Class D max 1 08 2 3 0 431 14 0 3 0 77 0 23 A for 2nd to nth har monic IEC EN 61000 3 3 Power line fluctuations ac power port THD 3 Pst lt 1 Pit lt 0 65 dc power port N A IEC EN 61000 4 2 ESD Enclosure contact 6 kV IEC EN 60255 22 2 Enclosure air 8 kV IEEE C37 90 3 ESD Enclosure contact 8 kV Enclosure air 15 kV IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 10 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 3 IEEE C37 90 2 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 35 V m 25 1000 MHz IEC EN 61000 4 4 Burst fast transient Signal ports 4 kV 2 5 kHz IEC EN 60255 22 4 ac power port 4 kV IEEE C37 90 1 dc power port 4 kV Earth ground
307. ine 429_tresponse O72 Himited qty qty 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 80 1 Internal Indications Packet format 2 write 00 start stop 129 response index 7 110 0 Octet string 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty 111 0 Octet string event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty a ae a e e e a No Object function code only 13 cold restart 129 response No Object function code only 14 warm restart 129 response No Object function code only 23 delay meas 129 response D02706R02 50 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings D02706R02 41 pn _ O ic 12 742 12 062 17 410 peee Figure G 1 Mechanical
308. information CDC Class ACD Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X general BOOLEAN ST dirGeneral Enum ST dirGeneral phsA BOOLEAN ST dirPhsA Enum ST dirPhs phsB BOOLEAN ST dirPhsB Enum ST dirPhs phsC BOOLEAN ST dirPhsC Enum ST dirPhs L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Common Data Class ACT_1_Op Description Protection activation information CDC Class ACT Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X general BOOLEAN ST q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Common Data Class ACT_5_Op Description Protection activation information CDC Class ACT Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X general BOOLEAN ST phsA BOOLEAN ST phsB BOOLEAN ST phsC BOOLEAN ST q Quality ST t Timestamp ST D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 47 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class ACT_6_Op Description Protection activation information CDC Class ACT Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X general BOOLEAN ST phsA BOOLEAN ST phsB BOOLEAN ST phsC BOOLEAN ST neut BOOLEAN ST q Quality ST t Timestamp ST Common Data Class INS_1_AutoRecSt Description Integer status CDC Class INS Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X stVal Enum AutoRecSt q Quality t Timestamp Common Data Class I
309. ing detec 68 5 Zone 5 68 Power swing Trip tion blocking Protection D79MRREC1 Auto reclosing 79 Main Auto reclose Protection D79ARREC2 Auto reclosing 79 Auxiliary Auto reclose Protection D81_1PFRC1 Rate of change of fre 81 1 81 1 rate of change of frequency Trip quency Protection D81_2PFRC2 Rate of change of fre 81 2 81 2 rate of change of frequency Trip quency Protection D81_3PFRC3 Rate of change of fre 81 3 81 3 rate of change of frequency Trip quency Protection D81_4PFRC4 Rate of change of fre 81 4 81 4 rate of change of frequency Trip quency Protection D81_1PTOF1 Overfrequency 81 1 81 1 overfrequency Trip Protection D81_2PTOF2 Overfrequency 81 2 81 2 overfrequency Trip Protection D81_3PTOF3 Overfrequency 81 3 81 3 overfrequency Trip Protection D81_4PTOF4 Overfrequency 81 4 81 4 overfrequency Trip D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 59 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 60 L PRO 4000 User Manual Protection D81_1PTUF1 Underfrequency 81 1 81 1 underfrequency Trip Protection D81_2PTUF2 Underfrequency 81 2 81 2 underfrequency Trip Protection D81_3PTUF3 Underfrequency 81 3 81 3 underfrequency Trip Protection D81_4PTUF4 Underfrequency 81 4 81 4 underfrequency Trip Protection DEFSchPSCH2 Protection scheme DEF Scheme DEF Scheme Send Trip Protection DisSchPSCH1 Protection scheme Distance Distance Scheme
310. inimum Current setting I DeltaSupervision Phase difference between any 2 phase currents 21P1 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Logic gt Protection Monitor 21P1 Zone 1Trip 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V 20 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 3 Connect 3 phase current sources 4 24 A lagging voltages by 80 to the relay terminals Ph A 300 301 4 24 A Z 80 Ph B 302 303 4 24 A Z 200 Ph C 304 305 4 24 A 7 40 Observe 21P1 Trip Low 4 Simultaneously reduce 3 phase voltages At 21 0 to 19 0 V expect 20 0 V 21 Trip High Note that Contact 1 will probably close earlier than 21 1 Trip going high because Z2 and Z3 trip elements are mapped to the same output contact and the length of time this fault will be ap plied Testing the Zone 1 Phase Time Delay 1 Monitor Timer Stop on normally open Output Contact 1 202 203 2 Set timer to start from 3 phase amp current transition i e current off to on 3 Apply keep on balanced 3 phase voltages 20 0 V to the relay terminals Ph A 330 20 0 V Z0 Ph B 331 20 0 V Z 120 Ph C 332 20 0 V 2 120 Ph N 333 4 Apply 3 phase currents from 0 to 5 3 A to start the timer this is 80 of Zone Reach 64 of the line 12 4 miles L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 15 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Ph A 300
311. inputs to control circuit breakers e enable or disable reclosing e enable or disable under frequency load shedding L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 13 6 Offliner Settings Software System Parameters 6 14 e change setting groups e provide interlocking between local remote supervisory control Setting Groups L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help Cif a sems C Analog Inputs a E C External Inputs Setting Group Names CO Output Contacts Virtual Inputs is a Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 O System Parameters Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 O SCADA Communication Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 C DNP Configuration C Point Map Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 O Class Data Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C SCADA Settings Summary Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Record Length ii Setting Group 7 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 7 lt lt O Line Parameters Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 O Scheme Selector O Breaker Status Figure 6 10 Setting Groups Table 6 8 Setting Groups Setting Groups 1 to 8 User defined L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 Fie Edit Window Help osa amp 83 0 ea S ef ao ea System Parameters C Analog inputs CO External Inputs C Output Contacts Basemva 100 00 I Target Latching On global virtual Inputs Phase Rotation ABC v IV Fault Location Display
312. ion Details D02706R02 50 The Smart Grid is transforming the electrical power industry by using digital technology to deliver electricity in a more intelligent efficient and controlled way Embedded control and communication devices are central to this trans formation by adding intelligent automation to electrical networks The IEC 61850 standard defines a new protocol that permits substation equip ment to communicate with each other Like many other well known manufac turers ERLPhase Power Technologies is dedicated to using IEC 61850 based devices that can be used as part of an open and versatile communications net work for substation automation The IEC 61850 defines an Ethernet based protocol used in substations for data communication Substations implement a number of controllers for protection measurement detection alarms and monitoring System implementation is of ten slowed down by the fact that the controllers produced by different manu facturers are incompatible since they do not support the same communication protocols The problems associated with this incompatibility are quite serious and result in increased costs for protocol integration and system maintenance The L PRO 4000 conforms to IEC 61850 8 1 commonly referred to as Station Bus Protocol Implementation includes the following documents JEC61850 Implementation in Appendix N on page Appendix N 1 e Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement e M
313. ion Functions and Specifications Swing Recording Event Recording Record Initiation 4 56 The relay records dynamic system responses allowing the user to analyze sys tem stability and to provide a larger context for fault analysis Swing records contain positive sequence phasor measurements and system frequency calcu lated at a rate of 1 phasor per cycle Swing records can extend to 2 minutes in duration The quantities recorded are e Positive sequence impedance magnitude e Positive sequence voltage magnitude e Positive sequence current magnitude e 3 Phase Reactive Power Vars e 3 Phase Real Power Watts The event recording provides permanent storage for the event log The user can create an event record automatically or manually When the event auto save is enabled an event record is created approximately every 250 events The user can initiate an event manually through the Relay Control Panel Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal condition is detected Set the relay to initiate a fault record on activation of any of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external digital inputs The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay functions is done through the relay s Output Matrix settings A recording can also be initiated manually through the Relay Control Panel The commands Trigger Fault Trigger Swing and Trigger Event are available under
314. ion Scheme 3 Phase SOBF Breaker Failure Initiation from the output matrix 50 1a gt Breaker Current Pick up 50 1b gt Breaker Current Pick up 50 1c gt Breaker Current Pick up Main External A Phase 50BF Initiation Main External B Phase SOBF Initiation Main External C Phase SOBF Initiation Protection Scheme 1 Phase Protection Scheme 1 3 Phase 4 38 The Breaker Failure BF protection function detects breaker failures There are 2 sets of breaker failure protection functions 50BF Main and 50BF Auxil iary one for each breaker When breaker failure is initiated by a trip or other internal logic user settable through the output matrix and the breaker current still exists 2 timers T1 and T2 user settable are started When these timers are timed out and if the current still exists which indicates breaker failure the output of this function is set high Use the 2 outputs of this function to trip an other trip coil or the next level of breakers such as bus breakers Pick up Delay 1 gt SOBF Main 1 Trip Pick up Delay 2 SOBF Main 2 Trip Figure 4 23 50BF Main Breaker Failure Table 4 21 50BF Breaker Failure Settings Main Enable Disable Pickup Delay 1 0 01 to 99 99 Seconds Pickup Delay 2 0 01 to 99 99 Seconds Breaker Current Pickup 0 10 to 50 0 A secondary 5A 0 02 to 10 0 A secondary 1A Auxiliary Ena
315. ion defines logical node data for the logical node D21 NSMMXU1O0 Data Name Description D21N5MMXU10 MX Hz mag f 21N5 fault frequency D21NS5MMXU10 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21N5 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21NS5MMXU10 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21N5 phase A voltage angle D21NS5MMXU10 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21N5 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21N5MMXU10 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21N5 phase B fault voltage angle D21NS5MMXU10 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21N5 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21N5MMXU10 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21N5 phase C fault voltage angle D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21N5 phase A fault current magnitude D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21N5 phase A fault current angle D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21N5 phase B fault current magnitude D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21N5 phase B fault current angle D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21N5 phase C fault current magnitude D21N5MMXU10 MX A phsC cVal ang f 21N5 phase C fault current angle L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 DSCHMMXU11 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSCHMMXU11 Data Name Description DSCHMMXU11 MX Hz mag f Distance Scheme fault frequency DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase A fault voltage magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f Di
316. ions that occur at the time of a setting change the relay performance has a maximum increase in output delay of one cycle For light fault conditions the relay performance does not have a noticeable change There is normally a one cycle decision making process of operating time When the relay algorithms determine that a fault is present tripping will occur after a one cycle delay It will take an additional 3 ms to actually close the output tripping contacts The relay does not reset any ProLogic Group Logic or Virtual Input latch func tions during the setting save or active group change Retaining latch status al lows the relay continuous access to specific latched logic states This is useful when the relay has ProLogic Group Logic or Virtual Input functions used to block protection or ancillary functions for specific operating conditions The relay resets all the events that are currently high and reports states of all the events that remain high after a setting change To view the active setting group and status of the group logic functions in real time via the TUI enter the Metering Logic Setting Group menu choice To view a snapshot of the group logic data enter the Settings Active Group menu choice The front panel display along with the front panel control buttons allow the user to access metering and setting functions within the relay The front display also allows the user to reset the LED target lights that will occur if a rel
317. irtual Input 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 20 Virtual Input 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 21 Virtual Input 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 22 Virtual Input 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 23 Virtual Input 10 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 24 Virtual Input 11 Y Y Y H Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 25 Virtual Input 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 26 Virtual Input 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 27 Virtual Input 14 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 28 Virtual Input 15 Y y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 29 Virtual Input 16 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed at1s 30 Virtual Input 17 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 31 Virtual Input 18 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 32 Virtual Input 19 Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 33 Virtual Input 20 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 34 Virtual Input 21 Y Y Y vi Y Y nacti
318. is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechanical drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay the following is needed e 19 inch rack 4 10 screws 8 3 AC and DC Wiring For details see AC Schematic Drawings in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawings in Appendix J 8 4 Communication Wiring EIA 232 D02706R02 50 The relay s serial ports Ports 122 and 123 are configured as EIA RS 232 Data Communications Equipment DCE devices with female DB9 connectors This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a standard straight through male to female serial cable Shielded cable is recommended for pin out see Communication Port Details on page 2 15 An adapter is available for connecting an external modem to Port 123 for de tails see Modem Link on page 2 7 L PRO 4000 User Manual 8 1 8 Installation RJ 45 Optical ST USB RJ 11 IRIG B Wiring 8 2 There is one front 1 OOBASE T Ethernet Port 119 with RJ 45 receptacle Use CATS or CATSe straight The rear Ethernet Ports 119 and 120 may also be configured as 1 OOBASE T Ethernet Ports Port 119 and port 120 in the rear panel may be configured with ST style optical connectors if desired These are 1300 nm 100BASE FX optical Ethernet ports The transmit and receive connections are indicated on the rear panel Use stan dard multi mode cables with ST connectors for this interfa
319. isabled 68 Off Switch On To Fault SOTF Disabled Weak Infeed Disabled 25 Sync Check Disabled Dead Main Live Aux DMLA Disabled Live Main Dead Aux LMDA Disabled Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Disabled 79 3Ph Disabled 79 1Ph Disabled 59 1 Main Disabled 59 2 Main Disabled 59 1 Aux Disabled 59 2 Aux Disabled 59N Definite Time Delay Disabled 59N Inverse Time Delay Disabled 27 Main Disabled 27 Aux Disabled 60 Disabled 60 CTS Main Disabled 60 CTS Aux Disabled 81 1 Disabled 81 2 Disabled 81 3 Disabled 81 4 Disabled 50LS Main Input 1 Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 7 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 50LS Aux Input 2 Disabled 50LS Input 3 Disabled 50LS Input 4 Disabled 50BF Main Disabled 50BF Aux Disabled 50 Disabled 51 Disabled 50N Disabled 51N Disabled 46 50 Disabled 46 51 Disabled 21P Phase Distance Zone 1 21P Zone 1 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 8 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 10 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 10 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 Id Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21P Phase Distance Zone 2 21P Zone 2 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 12 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05
320. isible and available depending on other selections As noted before there is no field to configure the number of data and stop bits These values are fixed as follows e Modbus Serial 7 data bits 1 stop bit e DNP Serial 8 data bits 1 stop bit L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Monitoring SCADA Communications D02706R02 50 5 Data Communications The ability to monitor SCADA communications directly can be a valuable commissioning and troubleshooting tool It assists in resolving SCADA com munication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing The util ity is accessed through the Maintenance user interface 1 Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance 2 Select option 9 by entering the number 9 followed by Enter The following screen appears com10_usb_115200 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help De 3 2b g Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA Enable Disable Internal Modem if one exists xit 1 2g 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 9 Modbus p
321. ive On active 21P4 Alarm 791 0 Off inactive On active 21N2 Alarm 792 0 Off inactive On active 21N3 Alarm 793 0 Off inactive On active 21N4 Alarm 794 0 Off inactive On active 51 Alarm 795 0 Off inactive On active 51N Alarm 796 0 Off inactive On active 46 51 Alarm 797 0 Off inactive On active Self Check Fail 798 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic1 799 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic2 800 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic3 801 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic4 802 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic5 803 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic6 804 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic7 805 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic8 806 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic9 807 0 Off inactive On active ProLogic10 808 0 Off inactive On active 68 OutBlinder Alarm 809 0 Off inactive On active 68 InBlinder Alarm 810 0 Off inactive On active 27 Main Trip 811 0 Off inactive On active 27 Aux Trip 812 0 Off inactive On active 59 1 Main Trip 813 0 Off inactive On active 59 1 Aux Trip 814 0 Off inactive On active 50LS Main 815 0 Off inactive On active 25 27 59 Sync Check 816 0 Off inactive On active 50LS Aux 817 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 1 818 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 2 819 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 3 820 0 Off inactive On active Grou
322. je jE Record Length Fault Sample Rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle Fault Record Length 05 s Prefault Time 020 s Swing Pretrigger Disturbance time fixed at 30 seconds Sample Rate fixed at 1 sample per cycle Swing Record Length 120 s Event Auto Save Figure 6 16 Record Length Fault Table 6 10 Record Length Fault Record Length 0 2 to 10 0 seconds Prefault Time 0 10 to 2 00 seconds Swing Swing Record Length 60 to 120 seconds Event Auto Save Enable Disable The relay has recording and logging functions to analyze faults and dynamic swing and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme This screen displays the record length for each of the two types of recordings provided fault and swing Pre trigger times are configurable between 0 10 to 2 00 seconds for fault records and fixed at 30 seconds for swing records and are included as part of the record length D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 19 6 Offliner Settings Software Setting Groups L PRO 4000 Offliner Settings Document 1 5 Fie Edit Window Help os amp S5 Ba eal C Identification C Relay C Analog Inputs C External Inputs C Output Contacts C Virtual Inputs Setting Groups C System Parameters CO SCADA Communication C DNP Configuration C Point Map C Class Data C SCADA Settings Summary C Record Length Setting
323. k 1 3 2 Type of End Point TCP Initiating Master Only Not configured L PRO Offliner kl TCP Listening Outstation Only for DNP TCP Dual required for Masters UDP Datagram required 1 3 3 IP Address of this 192 168 100 101 L PRO Mainte Device nance utilities 1 3 4 Subnet Mask Not set L PRO Mainte nance utilities 1 3 5 Gateway IP Address Not set L PRO Mainte nance utilities 1 3 6 Accepts TCP B Allows all show as in 1 3 7 Limits based on L PRO Offliner Connections or UDP K Limits based on an IP address an IP address Datagrams from K Limits based on list of IP addresses Limits based on a wildcard IP address Limits based on list of wildcard IP addresses Other validation explain 1 3 7 IP Address es from 192 168 1 1 L PRO Offliner which TCP Connections or UDP Datagrams are accepted 1 3 8 TCP Listen Port Not Applicable Master w o dual end point 20 000 L PRO Offliner Number Fixed at 20 000 Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 9 TCP Listen Port Not Applicable Outstation w o dual end point NA Number of remote Fixed at 20 000 device Configurable range to Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 10 TCP Keep alive timer Fixed at ms Disabled L PRO Offliner Configurable range 5 to 3 600 s Configurable selectable from i ms Configurable other describe 1 3 11 Local UDP port Fixed at 20 000 20 000 L PRO Offliner Configurable r
324. l Input 19 VIGGIO13 ST Ind20 stVal Virtual Input 20 VIGGIO13 ST Ind21 stVal Virtual Input 21 VIGGIO13 ST Ind22 stVal Virtual Input 22 VIGGIO13 ST Iind23 stVal Virtual Input 23 VIGGIO13 ST Ind24 stVal Virtual Input 24 VIGGIO13 ST Ind25 stVal Virtual Input 25 VIGGIO13 ST Ind26 stVal Virtual Input 26 VIGGIO13 ST Ind27 stVal Virtual Input 27 VIGGIO13 ST Ind28 stVal Virtual Input 28 VIGGIO13 ST Ind29 stVal Virtual Input 29 VIGGIO13 ST Ind30 stVal L PRO 4000 User Manual Virtual Input 30 Appendix N 105 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 106 Virtaullnputs Logical Device SUBSCRGGIO1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node SUBSCRGGIO1 Data Name Description SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind1 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 1 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind2 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 2 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind3 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 3 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind4 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 4 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST iInd5 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 5 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind6 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 6 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind7 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 7 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind8 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 8 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind9 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 9 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind10 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 10 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind11 stVal Subs
325. l box around the graph area When the user releases the mouse the trace assumes a new zoom position determined by the area of the zoom coordinates L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 5 6 Offliner Settings Software To undo the zoom on the graph click the Refresh button Displaying Co ordinates At any time the user may right click on the graph to display the co ordinates of the point the user selected 6 4 Handling Backward Compatibility Converting a Settings File Sending a New Setting File to the Relay 6 6 Offliner Settings displays the version number in the second pane on the bottom status bar The settings version is a whole number v1 v2 v3 v4 etc The Offliner Settings is backward compatible open and edit older settings files and convert older settings files to a newer version Offliner settings handles forward conversion only it converts an older setting file to a newer setting file 1 Open the setting file to convert 2 Inthe File menu select Convert to Newer and then select the version x where x is the newer version A dialog box pops up prompting Offliner for a new file name Use either the same file name or enter a new file name The conversion process inserts default values for any newly added devices in the new setting file When the conversion is complete Offliner Settings displays the new file LT ax Save in J LPRO Settings Ejo o e bin E v5 sample ips Figure
326. l statistics View IP TCP and UDP statistics View active socket states View current states of active sockets View routing tables View routing tables Ping Check network connection to given point Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance Menu Commands Update The relay has an update login that can be accessed by a connection through a VT100 terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal This login is available only from Port 150 1 Use the terminal program to connect to Port 150 2 Select Enter the terminal responds with a login prompt 3 Login as update in lower case The firmware update is used to update the relay s software with maintenance or enhancement releases Please see the L PRO Firmware Update Procedure documentation that comes with the firmware update for instructions on how to update the firmware on the relay L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 11 Setting the Baud Rate Direct Serial Link Modem Link D02706R02 50 The baud rate is available on the LCD screen from the top level menu selecting System then Relay Comm Setup For a direct serial connection both the relay and the computer must be set to the same baud rate To change the baud rate of a relay serial port 1 The user needs to log into the relay as Change any port or Service USB port only using RCP 2 Then choose Utilities gt Communication tab Unlike a direc
327. le 206 60 CTS Aux Inactive Active 207 Load Encroachment Inactive Active 208 59 2 Main Trip Inactive Active OR of 59 2 Main A B and C Trip 209 59 2 Aux Trip Inactive Active OR of 59 2 Aux A B and C Trip 210 59 2 Main A Trip Inactive Active 211 59 2 Main B Trip Inactive Active 212 59 2 Main C Trip Inactive Active 213 59 2 Aux A Trip Inactive Active 214 59 2 Aux B Trip Inactive Active 215 59 2 Aux C Trip Inactive Active 216 Successful Reclose Main Inactive Active 217 Successful Reclose Aux Inactive Active 218 79 Fault lockout Inactive Active D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 19 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 2 Binary Output Status And Control Relay Output Block Ae If configurable Sra ain a elma el Current Value fist methods CROB Group Number 12 Binary Output Command Event Object Num 13 2 2 1 Minimum pulse time Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 2 Maximum pulse time Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 3 Binary Output Status Always included in Class 0 Never response Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below
328. le D21N5MSQI5 MX SeqV seqT Not mapped L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 DSCHMSQI6 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSCHMSQI6 Data Name Description DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag t Distance Scheme Line Zero Sequence current magnitude DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f Distance Scheme Line Zero Sequence current angle DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqA seqT Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f Distance Scheme Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV c3 cVal ang f Distance Scheme Main Zero Sequence voltage angle DSCHMSQI6 MX SeqV seqT Not mapped D4650MSQI7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D4650MSQI7 Data Name Description D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D4650MSQI7 MxX SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag t 46 50 Line Negative Sequence current magnitude D4650MSQI7 MX SeqA c2 cVal ang f 46 50 Line Negative Sequence current angle
329. logic Back up Directional overcurrent and earth fault protection e Over Under Rate of change of frequency devices Relay Control Panel RCP is the Windows graphical user interface software tool provided with all 4000 series and higher new generation ERL relays to communicate retrieve and manage records event logs fault logs manage set tings identification protection SCADA etc display real time metering val ues view analyze and export records in COMTRADE format In addition to the protection functions the relay provides fault recording 96 samples cycle to analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall pro tection scheme The relay also has low speed swing recording which can be used to analyze system stability The triggers for fault recording are established D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 1 1 1 Overview by programming the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function or any external input or any GOOSE messaging input to initiate recording Bus 2 Bus 1 CT C Zik a sile frm Oa a Say NW Pt K M 52 1 67 167 167 167 5 Zones 5 Zones Dead Line Pickup son 60 60 T 814 I wi Rec 25 27 rec 59 27 CTS 159 v Swing Recording Fault Recording Li PT 6Analog 9 External 14 Output Contacts Positive Sequence Voltage 6 Voltages ne Current Inputs 1 Relay Inoperative Positive Sequence Current 12 Currents Inputs Alarm Contact System Frequency Protection Elements Real
330. ltData D21N1MSQI1 Measurement 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault Zero Sequence current FaultData D21N1RFLO6 Fault Locator 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault locator FaultData D21N2MMXU7 Measurement 21N2 Zone 2 21N fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21N2MSQI2 Measurement 21N2 Zone 2 21N fault Zero Sequence current FaultData D21N2RFLO7 Fault Locator 21N2 Zone 2 21N fault locator FaultData D21N3MMXU16 Measurement 21N3 Zone 3 21N fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21N3MSQI3 Measurement 21N3 Zone 3 21N fault Zero Sequence current FaultData D21N3RFLO8 Fault Locator 21N3 Zone 3 21N fault locator FaultData D21N4MMXU17 Measurement 21N4 Zone 4 21N fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21N4MSQI4 Measurement 21N4 Zone 4 21N fault Zero Sequence current FaultData D21N4RFLO9 Fault Locator 21N4 Zone 4 21N fault locator FaultData D21N5MMXU10 Measurement 21N5 Zone 5 21N fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21N5MSQI5 Measurement 21N5 Zone 5 21N fault Zero Sequence current FaultData D21N5RFLO10 Fault Locator 21N5 Zone 5 21N fault locator FaultData D21P1MMXU1 Measurement 21P1 Zone 1 21P fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21P1RFLO1 Fault Locator 21P1 Zone 1 21P fault locator FaultData D21P2MMXU2 Measurement 21P2 Zone 2 21P fault frequency voltages and currents FaultData D21P2RFLO2 Fault Locator 21P2 Zone 2 21P fault locator FaultData D21P3MMXU3 Measurement 21P3 Zone 3 21P fault frequency voltages and currents
331. ltiplier Negative Sequence Overcurrent provides further backup protection for any un balanced faults The user can define directional or non direction all control on either 46 50 or 46 51 functions All the curve definitions are the same as the Phase Overcurrent The only difference is that this function uses the negative sequence current I2 rather than phase current The equation is For Ip gt pickup r 9 T I2 TMS B 4 a L Pickup For l lt pickup r 10 TR l i 12 7 L Pickup T I2 TMS L PRO 4000 User Manual Table 4 25 46 50 46 51N 67Negative Sequence Overcurrent Settings 46 50 Enable Disable Directional Directional non directional combined Forward and Reverse Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A Pickup Delay 0 00 to 99 99 seconds non directional 0 01 to 99 99 seconds directional 46 51 Enable Disable Directional Directional non directional combined Forward and Reverse Pickup 0 50 to 50 00 5 A 0 10 to 10 00 1 A D02706R02 50 Adaptive Additional Delay for 50 O C Elements D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 25 46 50 46 51N 67Negative Sequence Overcurrent Settings Curve Type For details see Table 4 22 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 40 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0000 B 0 0000 to 10 0000 p 0 01 to 10 00 TR 0 10 to 100 00 Directional Angle Setting
332. m multimode optical fiber with an ST style connector By default the Port 119 is assigned with an IP address of 192 168 100 80 Port 120 is assigned with an IP address of 192 168 101 80 If this address is not suit able it may be modified using the relay s Maintenance Menu For details see Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Menu on page 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 5 2 Setup and Communications 2 7 Direct Serial Link 2 6 Port 150 USB Port 123 Serial Laptop PC Figure 2 3 Direct Serial Link To create a serial link between the relay and the computer connect the com puter s serial port and Port 123 on the relay s rear panel provided the port is not configured for modem use The serial ports are configured as EIR RS 232 Data Communications Equip ment DCE devices with female DB9 connectors This allows them to be con nected directly to a PC serial port with standard straight through male to female serial cable for pin out details see Communication Port Details on page 2 15 Rear Port 122 is for SCADA and Port 123 can be used for direct se rial access and external modem Ensure the relay port and the PC s port have the same baud rate and communications parameter see Maintenance Menu Commands on page 2 11 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 8 Modem Link External D02706R02 50 Analog Analog Port 123 RJ 11 modem
333. mber e The L PRO IED model number is 4000 e Version and issue will each be positive integers say X and Y The L PRO is defined as Model 4000 Version X Issue Y Accessing L PRO Event Information All L PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus This includes fault location information The following controls are available Refresh Event List Function Code 6 address 40513 Fetches the latest events from the relay s event log and makes them available for Modbus access The most recent event becomes the current event available for reading Acknowledge Current Event and Function Code 6 address 40514 Clears the current event from the read registers and Get Next Event places the next event into them An acknowledged event is no longer available for reading Get Next Event Function Code 6 address 40515 Places the next event in the read registers without acknowledging the current event The current event will reappear in the list when Refresh Event List is used Size of Current Event Message Function Code 3 address 40516 Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to contain the current event Event data is stored with 2 characters per register A reading of zero indi cates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current set NB The Refresh Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred since the last Refresh Event Lis
334. mote has detected a forward directional fault and sends the similar per missive trip signal to the local end The local end senses a permissive trip re ceive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the fault contribution from the local end The remote end acts in a similar fashion and the fault contribution is removed from the remote end Current reversal logic guards against incorrect permissive tripping for installa tions with parallel lines where one end of the un faulted line is contributing fault current and the other end of the un faulted line is over reaching and send ing a permissive trip signal The local reverse directional elements are used with the permissive receive signal from the remote end to form the blocking logic The blocking logic is time delayed by timer setting TL1 the local end is required to sense reverse faults while receiving the remote permissive trip for durations greater than TL1 The blocking logic continues to block the scheme send and scheme trip signals when the reverse fault detection or permissive trip receive signals go low Timer setting TD1 determines the current reversal block extension time For line terminals with a weak source fault conditions could occur on the pro tected line where no elements operate at the weak source Weak infeed WI logic enables the relay to protect lines where one end of the line has no source or has a very weak source The WI scheme can only be enabled
335. n binary input Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind14 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind15 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind16 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind17 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind18 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind19 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind20 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind21 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node GGIO5 Description Generic process I O D02706R02 50 LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation Mod INC_2_ Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy Ge
336. n set to unknown Appendix N 86 LodEncPDIS6 ST Op general D21N1PDIS7 Load Encroachment Block This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1PDIS7 Data Name Description D21N1PDIS7 ST Str general 21N1 Trip D21N1PDIS7 ST Str dirGeneral 2NP1 Direction set to unknown D21N1PDIS7 ST Op general 21N1 Trip D21N1PDIS7 ST Op phsA 21N1 Trip phase A D21N1PDIS7 ST Op phsB 21N1 Trip phase B D21N1PDIS7 ST Op phsC 21N1 Trip phase C L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D21N2PDIS8 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N2PDIS8 Data Name Description D21N2PDIS8 ST Str general 21N2 Trip D21N2PDIS8 ST Str dirGeneral 2NP2 Direction set to unknown D21N2PDIS8 ST Op general 21N2 Trip D21N2PDIS8 ST Op phsA 21N2 Trip phase A D21N2PDIS8 ST Op phsB 21N2 Trip phase B D21N2PDIS8 ST Op phsC D21N3PDIS9 21N2Trip phase C This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N3PDIS9 Data Name Description D21N3PDIS9 ST Str general 21N3 Trip D21N3PDIS9 ST Str dirGeneral 2NP3 Direction set to unknown D21N3PDIS9 ST Op general 21N3 Trip D21N3PDIS9 ST Op phsA 21N3 Trip phase A D21N3PDIS9 ST Op phsB 21N3 Trip phase B D21N3PDIS9 ST Op p
337. n 2 Single bit with flag requested Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 2 Event Variation Variation 1 without time reported when variation Variation 2 with absolute time 0 requested Variation 3 with relative time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 3 Event reporting mode Only most recent All events 2 1 4 Binary Inputs included Always L PRO Offliner in Class 0 response Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 5 Definition of Binary Fixed list shown in table below Complete list is L PRO Offliner Input Point List Configurable shown in the Other explain table below points excluded from the default configuration are marked with 1 Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution Notes 2 Binary Input data points are user selectable the data points avail able in the device for any given Binary Input point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Appendix F 12 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Point Default Class Name for Name for index Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description 1 2 3 or none value is 0 value is 1 0 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active 1 External Input 2 1 Inactive Active 2 External Inp
338. nal Input 3 EIGGIO3 ST Ind4 stVal External Input 4 EIGGIO3 ST Ind5 stVal External Input 5 EIGGIO3 ST Ind6 stVal External Input 6 EIGGIO3 ST Ind7 stVal External Input 7 EIGGIO3 ST Ind8 stVal External Input 8 EIGGIO3 ST ind9 stVal External Input 9 EIGGIO3 ST Ind10 stVal External Input 10 EIGGIO3 ST Ind11 stVal External Input 11 EIGGIO3 ST Ind12 stVal External Input 12 EIGGIO3 ST Ind13 stVal External Input 13 EIGGIO3 ST Ind14 stVal External Input 14 EIGGIO3 ST Ind15 stVal External Input 15 EIGGIO3 ST Ind16 stVal External Input 16 EIGGIO3 ST Ind17 stVal External Input 17 EIGGIO3 ST Ind18 stVal External Input 18 EIGGIO3 ST Ind19 stVal External Input 19 EIGGIO3 ST Ind20 stVal L PRO 4000 User Manual External Input 20 D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 OCGGIO4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node OCGGIO4 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Data Name Description OCGGIO4 ST Ind1 stVal Output Contact 1 OCGGIO4 ST Ind2 stVal Output Contact 2 OCGGIO4 ST Ind3 stVal Output Contact 3 OCGGIO4 ST Ind4 stVal Output Contact 4 OCGGIO4 ST Ind5 stVal Output Contact 5 OCGGIO4 ST Ind6 stVal Output Contact 6 OCGGIO4 ST Ind7 stVal Output Contact 7 OCGGIO4 ST Ind8 stVal Output Contact 8 OCGGIO4 ST Ind9 stVal Output Contact 9 OCGGIO4 ST Ind10 stVal
339. nal Inputs L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help Coal sle oho a fe Identification O Relay O Analog Inputs E External Inputs External Input Names C Output Contacts 1 E Spare 1 O Virtual Inputs 2 El Spare 2 CO Setting Groups 3 Ei Spare 3 O System Parameters aS 4 O SCADA Communication 4 poro C DNP Configuration 5 El Spare 5 Point Map 6 El Spare 6 O Class Data O SCADA Settings Summary gj E Spare 7 O Record Length 8 El Spare 8 O Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 9 El Spare 9 C Line Parameters O Scheme Selector Figure 6 7 External Inputs External Input Names screen allows the user to define meaningful names for 9 external digital inputs Meaningful names may include terms such as T T Transfer Trip and P T Permissive Trip Table 6 5 External Input Names 1 to 20 User defined Output Contacts L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 Fie Edit Window Help Coste amp 8a e ea ef o beara Output Contact Names and Dropout Timers C Analog inputs C External Inputs N Hl Output Contacts Names Timers C Virtual Inputs 4 Out Spare 1 010 s C Setting Groups O System Parameters ggj 4 Spare 2 0 10 ii O SCADA Communication 3 Out Spare 3 010 s C DNP Configuration 4 Out Spare 4 qio s Point Map 5 Out Spare 5 010 s O Class Data SCADA Settings Summary 6 Out Spare 6 010 s C Record Len
340. nction This is done by mapping the BF output to the appropriate output contact in the Output Matrix screen Overcurrent elements 50 51 67 5ON 51N 67 and 46 50 46 5 1 67 can be monitored by the directional element used in the 21P N elements or the direc tional functions that operate based on Alpha and Beta settings Operating boundaries of the Alpha and Beta based directional element are de fined as shown in Figure 4 24 Directional Control on page 4 40 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 39 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 180 lt Alpha lt 180 Positive sequence 0 lt Beta lt 360 voltage and current l1 Beta V1 reference Figure 4 24 Directional Control 1 Alpha is the angle by which current leads or lags the positive real axis of V1 ref Alpha is a positive in value if current leads V1 ref and vice versa 2 Beta is the angle by which current leads or lags the Alpha boundary Beta is set to a positive value if current leads Alpha angle and vice versa This directional function consists of following options Directional Above directional control is applied Since the positive sequence voltage is used directionality is accurate even under 2 phase LOP conditions Under 3 phase LOP conditions function goes into the block mode Non directional Directional control is disabled Combined Works as the directional option under all conditions except 3 phase LOP Under 3 phase LOP conditions function goe
341. ne 4 Alarm Low 21P Zone 5 Alarm Low 21N Zone 2 Alarm 21N Zone 3 Alarm Low 21N Zone 4 Alam Low 21N Zone 5 Alarm 51 Alarm Low 51N Alarm Tow 46 51 Alarm Self Check Fail Tow 79 3Ph Initiated Tow 79 3Ph Blocked Outer Blinder Alarm Low _ Inner Blinder Alarm Low 27 Main UNV 27 Aux UNV Low 59 Main OIV Low 59 Aux O V 50LSMain Low 25f27 59SyncCheck Low 50LS Aux 50BF 1 Main Trip Low _ 50BF 2 Main Trip Low 50BF 1 Aux Trip 50BF 2 Aux Trip Low 79 3PhMainReclose Low 79 3Ph Aux Reclose 79 3Ph Lead lockout Low 50BF Initiate Low 79 3Ph Follow Lockout 79 1PhA Main Reclose Low 79 1PhA AuxReclose Low 79 1PhB Main Reclose 79 1PhB Aux Reclose Low 79 1PhC MainReclose Low 79 1PhC Aux Reclose 79 1Ph Lead Lockout Low 79 1Ph Follow Lockout Low _ 79 1Ph Initiate 79 1Ph Block Low Single Ph Open Timeout Low Multiple 1Ph Faults Multiple 3Ph Faults Low 3to 1 or 1 to 3Ph Faults Low DEF Scheme Trip DEF Scheme Send Low _ IRIG B Signal Loss EM Analog A Line A Eemal Logic 1A Logic 2 A Prologic A Outputs A GroupLoaic J Vital 7 Zoom Level 150 v Freeze Close Main Menu Meia Relay Control Panel v0 3 P0164 BPRO MB Current Relay LPRO USBLPRO Connected E Relay Control Panel Metering f Low 81 2 Trip 81 3 Trip 81 4 Trip Low 59N Def Trip Low 59N Def Alarm 59N Inv Trip Low 59N Inv Alarm Low 60CTS Main 60CTS Aux
342. ne voltage CT ratio PT ratio line length line secondary positive and zero sequence im pedance The K factor used is a default factor based on the line parameters K Zo Z 3Z The user can specify by selecting Ky Override Enable L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Scheme Selector Scheme Selector Protection Scheme 1 3 Phase v Protection Scheme Timers Pickup Delay s Dropout Delay s 1Ph max open 2 500 ty 1Ph 3Ph for 3Ph 25 000 TD4 1Ph 3Ph for 1Ph 0 100 TLS 25 000 TDS Fault Timer 7 Enabled Pickup 020 s Distance Scheme Selection Basic v Communication Aided El 1 to 9 ProLogic 1 to 24 and VI 1 to 30 Receiver 2 al Receiver 1 B Pickup Delay s Dropout Delay s Scheme Send 0 000 353 0 100 p3 POTT Current Reversal 0 000 114 0 100 44 TL2 0100 7p2 lt disabled gt El 1 El Spare 1 DCB Scheme Zone 2 0 050 DCB Scheme Receiver Overcurrent Carrier Actions Direction 6 Offliner Settings Software External Single Three Phase SOBF initiate Main Auxillary APhase El 1 El Spare 1 EI 5 El Spare 5 v B Phase El 2 El Spare 2 EI6 El Spare 6 1 EI7 El Spare 7 E z CPhase El3 El Spare 3 3 Phase El 4 El Spare 4 DEF Scheme Selection Disabled v Communication Aided El 1 to 9 ProLogic 1 to 24 and VI 1 to 30 Receiver 3 Pickup Delay s Dropout Delay s Scheme Send 0 100 TLG 0 200 TD6 310 Pickup Pi
343. nected 7 Check the metering screen for Protection All 79 logic points should be low ODR Low Low Low Low Low Low Low W W Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low W Low Low iow i i DoR Metering Main Menu Metering Relay Control Panel v0 3 P0164 BPRO MB Current Relay LPRO USBLPRO Figure L 30 Protection Metering Screen L PRO 4000 User Manual 81 1 Trip Low 81 2 Trip Low 81 3 Trip Low 81 4 Trip Low 59N Def Trip Low 59N Def Alarm Low 59N Inv Trip Low 59N Inv Alarm Low 60CTS Main Low 60CTS Aux Low MLSE TED Arog A Une A Extemal A logic T Logie 2A Prologic J Outputs _Grouplogic A Viral Connected Zoom Level 200 v Freeze Close D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 8 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and close 52 1 and 52 2 using the Pulse On action for the Virtual Input 1 and Virtual Input 2 This will activate Pro Logic 2 and 4 Z Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities File Help r Control Virtual Inputs Virtual Input 1 hdl Latch Off Latch On KEIC Unit Identification Extemal Input A Virtual Inputs Main Menu Config Mgr Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Connected Figure L 31 Control Virtual Input 52 1 Close 52 CS to Pulse On 9 Check the event log for VII and VI3 along with PL2 and PL4 E Relay 4000 Control Panel Events File Edit View
344. neral Distance Scheme Send DisSchPSCH1 ST Str dirGeneral Distance Scheme Send Direction set to unknown DisSchPSCH1 ST Op general Distance Scheme Trip DisSchPSCH1 ST WeiOp general Distance Scheme Weak Infeed Trip L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 99 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation DEFSchPSCH2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DEFSchPSCH2 Data Name Description DEFSchPSCH2 ST ProTx stVal Set to FALSE DEFSchPSCH2 ST ProRx stVal DEF Scheme Received DEFSchPSCH2 ST Str general DEF Scheme Send DEFSchPSCH2 ST Str dirGeneral DEF Scheme Send Direction set to unknown DEFSchPSCH2 ST Op general DEF Scheme Trip PTFuseGGIO6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node PTFuseGGIO6 Data Name Description PTFuseGGIO6 ST ind stVal 60 Alarm CTSGGIO7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node CTSGGIO7 Data Name Description CTSGGIO7 ST ind1 stVal 60 CTS Main CTSGGIO7 ST Ind2 stVal 60 CTS Auxiliary SOTFGGIO8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node SOTFGGIO8 Data Name Description SOTFGGIO8 ST ind stVal SOTF Trip Appendix N 100 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation System Logical Device PLGGIO1 This section defines logical node data for the logical no
345. neral indication binary input Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind14 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind15 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind16 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind17 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind18 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind19 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind20 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind21 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind22 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind23 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind24 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind25 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind26 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 35 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Ind27 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind28 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind29 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind30 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Logical Node GGIO6 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Logical No
346. nformation will be A B Cc AB BC CA ABC 60 CTS Main Alarm 60 CTS Aux Alarm Load Encroachment Block Success Reclose Main Success Reclose Aux 68 Inner Blinder Alarm 68 Outer Blinder Alarm Com Aided Z2 Wi Send Scheme types WI Z2 Z2 amp WI Z2 is Zone 2 POTT and WI is Weak Infeed 27 Main ABC Trip 27 Aux ABC Trip 59 1 Main ABC Trip 59 2 Main ABC Trip 59 1 Aux ABC Trip 59 2 Aux ABC Trip 50LS Main ABC Trip 50LS Aux ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A B Cc AB BC CA ABC 252759 Sync Check 50BF 1 Main ABC Trip 50BF 2 Main ABC Trip 50BF 1 Aux ABC Trip 50BF 2 Aux ABC Trip The possible phase information will be A B Cc AB BC CA ABC 81 1 Trip 81 2 Trip 81 3 Trip 81 4 Trip 79 3 Ph Initiated High Recloser is initiated 79 3 Lead Lockout Recloser shot count has expired and reclosing attempts are blocked 79 3 Follow Lockout Follow breaker has failed to reclose 79 3 Main Reclose shot n Recloser Main circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the shot count 79 3 Follow Reclose shot n Recloser Aux circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the shot count 79 3 Block High Recloser is blocked by an external signal 50BF Initiat
347. ng calculated by the phase selector The locked pre trigger load current vector is adjusted accordingly based on this angle difference be tween the pre trigger positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence volt age during the fault If the faulted positive sequence voltage shifts the angle difference is taken into account i e the same angle relationship remains along the fault duration Duration of the Phase Selector Supervision The maximum blocking time to 21N for a phase phase ground fault is from 2 0 seconds to x seconds where x is the maximum pickup delay in enabled 21P2 to 21P5 and then plus 8 cycles 8 cycles is the maximum breaker opening This ensures that if 21P did not trip on the phase phase ground fault for some reason 21N is allowed to trip on this fault after this maximum blocking time delay has expired L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 15 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 16 Ground Indicator in 21P Event Message 379 is checked against the minimum of the following settings e 21N1 379 supervision when it s enabled e 21N2 379 supervision when it s enabled e 21N3 379 supervision when it s enabled e 21N4 379 supervision when it s enabled e 21N5 379 supervision when its enabled e 50N Pickup level when it s enabled e 51N Pickup level when it s enabled 50N_67F when it s selected as Scheme Only or both ProLogic amp Scheme When 37 exceeds the minimum of the above values a gro
348. ng f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N1 Line Zero Sequence current angle Appendix N 73 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21N1MSQI1 MxX SeqA seqT Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f 21N1 Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude D21N1MSQI1 MX SeqV c3 cVal ang f 21N1 Main Zero Sequence voltage angle D21N1MSQI1 MxX SeqV seqT Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N2MSQI2 Data Name Description D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqA c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqA c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqA c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqA c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 21N2 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude D21N2MSQI2 MX SeqA c3 cVal ang f 21N2 Line Zero Sequence current angle D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqA seqT Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqV c1 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 Mx SeqvV c1 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 MxX SeqvV c2 cVal mag f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 MxX SeqV c2 cVal ang f Not mapped D21N2MSQI2 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f 21N2 Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude D21N2MSQI2 MX SeqV c3 cVal ang f 21N2 Main Zero Sequence voltage angle D21
349. ng is selected as Status Monitoring Aux Breaker Status El1 to El 20 PL1 to PL24 VI1 to VI30 This setting shall be enabled when the Breaker signal setting selected as Status Monitoring amp ring bus configuration is enabled L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Weak Infeed WI D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 8 Switch On To Fault Settings Pole Dead Pick up Timer A1 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds This setting shall be enabled Pick up timer when the Breaker signal setting is selected as Close Command SOTF Enabled Duration B1 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds Pick up timer Device 50 Pickup 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Device 50N Pickup 0 5 to 50 0 A secondary 5 A 0 1 to 10 0 A secondary 1 A Under voltage Supervision Logic Enabled Disabled Device 27 Pickup 1 0 to 120 0 V Second Harmonica Restraint Enabled Disabled Logic l l Ratio 0 0 to 10 0 Weak Infeed provides tripping if fault levels are too low to activate the distance units If enabled this function sends a permissive trip signal even if the fault level seen by the relay is very low as when the line breaker is open The posi tive sequence and zero sequence voltage detectors allow the relay to echo back a permissive signal to allow the end with fault current to trip quickly without the need for an auxiliary b contact Table 4 9 Weak Infeed Settings
350. ngle D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21N1 Line phase B fault current magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21N1 Line phase B fault current angle D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21N1 Line phase C fault current magnitude D21N1MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N1 Line phase C fault current angle D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 D21N2MMXU7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 N2MMXU 7 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Data Name Description D21N2MMXU7 MX Hz mag f 21N2 fault frequency D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21N2 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21N2 Main phase A voltage angle D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21N2 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21N2 Main phase B fault voltage angle D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21N2 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21N2 Main phase C fault voltage angle D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21N2 Line phase A fault current magnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21N2 Line phase A fault current angle D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21N2 Line phase B fault current magnitude D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21N2 Line phase B fault current angle D21N2MMXU7 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21N2 Line phase C fault current m
351. nitiating a set ting group change this change takes precedence over an automatic setting group change L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The setting group can be changed using the Relay Control Panel with either Change or Service access level using the following path Relay Control Panel gt Utilities gt Settings Group In this tab choose desired setting group number and hit Save The setting group can also be changed using the relay display interface after login in with the Change or Service access level using the following path Main Menu gt Utilities gt Maintenance gt Settings Group Control In this screen highlight the group number and then hit Edit Choose the de sired setting group number and then hit Enter with the cursor in the return character bottom right Figure 4 27 Settings Group Control Figure 4 28 Settings Group Control change The protection processor does not have any interruption in service L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 49 Automatic Settings Change Relay configuration changes during a relay initiated setting change does not disrupt the relay protection functions Since the relay setting file does not change the interface processor uses the new setting group ancillary setting in formation at the same time as the protection processor switches to the new set ting group An event is logged to show when the new setting group is
352. nt X phsA CMV_3_phsA phsB CMV_3_phsA phsC CMV_3_phsA Appendix N 44 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Common Data Class SEQ_1_SeqA Description Sequence CDC Class SEQ Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X c1 CMV_2_phsA c2 CMV_2_phsA c3 CMV_2_phsA seqT Enim MX seqT Common Data Class SEQ_4_SeqA Description Sequence CDC Class SEQ Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X c1 CMV_3_phsA c2 CMV_3_phsA c3 CMV_3_phsA seqT Enim MX seqT Common Data Class CMV_2_phsA Description Complex measured value CDC Class CMV Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X cVal Struct MX Vector_3 q Quality MX t Timestamp MX D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 45 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 46 Common Data Class CMV_3_phsA Description Complex measured value CDC Class CMV Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X cVal Struct MX Vector_4 q Quality MX t Timestamp MX Common Data Class ACD_5_Str Description Directional protection activation information CDC Class ACD Attribute Type FC Enumeration Comment X general BOOLEAN dirGeneral Enum dirGeneral q Quality t Timestamp Common Data Class ACD_2_Str Description Directional protection activation
353. ntrol S Virtual Inputs Control C S Setting Groups Control C S Erase C S Erase Records C S Erase Event Logs C S Network V Network Protocol Stats V Active Sockets V Routing Tables V Ping V Logout v Where the access levels required to access each are indicated by V view C change S service To login into the LCD menu structure follow these steps L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 3 Using the IED Getting Started 20120ct24 12 17 FERL LPRO 4000 101224 01 Figure 3 2 Main Screen 2011Aug06 ERLPhase LPRO 4000 31 48 54 Change read write Service full access passwords are case sensitive Logins have an activity timeout of 60mins Figure 3 3 View Change Service Choice Menu 2011Aug06 Enter Password 31 48 54 k k k 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 fo fem fate clalelFle h i fi k tm nfo sp p afr st Ju Jv Jw x y fz X back Wselect Figure 3 4 Enter Password L PRO 4000 User Manual 3 7 3 Using the IED Getting Started 2011Aug06 Main Menu 31 48 54 Settings Metering Records Fault Log Event Log MeTL icies Logout wselect Figure 3 5 Main Menu In the Main Screen hit Enter In the View Change Service Choose Menu screen choose desired access level hit Enter In the Enter Password screen enter appropriate password hit Enter on the re turn character right bottom one The Main Menu screen shoul
354. ocauRemote gt Figure L 11 Group Logic 12 El 1 high El 2 low and El 3 high Group Logic 11 Go to Group 6 IV Enabled Heme l Go to Group 6 AND Setting Group to Activate f 6 Setting Group 6 gt Pickup Delay 5 seconds Input El 1 Selector 1 v Input B El 2 Selector 2 v Input C l El 3 Selector 3 x Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic x Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote lalolo 2 2 ojojo Out Figure L 12 Group Logic 11 El 1 low El 2 high and El 3 high Group Logic 10 Go to Group 6 IV Enabled Name l Go to Group 6 AND Setting Group to Activate f 6 Setting Group 6 x olo Pickup Delay 5 seconds a 1 4 il input E11 Selector F Input B El 2 Selector 2 Input C El 3 Selector 3 x Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Input E El 4 43CS Local Remote ojojo Out Figure L 13 Group Logic 10 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 7 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example El 1 high El 2 high and El 3 high Group Logic 9 Go to Group 8 IV Enabled Name Go to Group 8 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 8 Setting Group 8 OTITA ga Pickup Delay 5 seconds Caa 1 0 co TETEE input A El Selector F Input B Ei2 selector2 x Input C e13 Selector3 F Input D PL Block Group Logic 7 Out Input E El 4 43CS LocalRemote Figure L 14
355. odel Implementation Conformance Statement e Tissues Conformance Statement All configurable IEC61850 parameters are available via the Maintenance in terface Note that this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to establish a network maintenance connection to the relay L PRO 4000 User Manual 5 7 5 Data Communications 5 8 1 Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance The fol lowing screen appears USB connection HyperTerminal L PRO 4000 System Utility v1 0 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA A oe Internal Modem if one exists xi HeD NASUN port 150 access only feet enter a command Connected 0 00 14 VT100 115200 8 N SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Prt echo Figure 5 6 Maintenance Interface 2 Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by lt Enter gt The following screen appears HyperERL HyperTerminal Ble Edt View Cal Transfer Help DSa oal Restore ALL default settings including
356. ogical node data for the logical node D21N3RFLO8 Data Name Description D21N3RFLO8 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21N3 fault impedance magnitude D21N3RFLO8 MX FItZ cVal ang f 21N3 fault impedance angle D21N3RFLO8 MX FItDiskm mag f D21N4RFLO9 21N3 fault distance This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N4RFLO9 Data Name Description D21N4RFLO9O MX FItZ cVal mag f 21N4 fault impedance magnitude D21N4RFLO9O MX FItZ cVal ang f 21N4 fault impedance angle D21N4RFLO9O MX FItDiskm mag f D21N5RFLO10 21N4 fault distance This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 NSRFLO10 Data Name Description D21N5RFLO10 MX FItZ cVal mag f 21N5 fault impedance magnitude D21N5RFLO10 MX FItZ cVal ang f 21N5 fault impedance angle D21N5RFLO10 MX FitDiskm mag f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N5 fault distance Appendix N 81 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation DSCHRFLO11 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSCHRFLO11 Data Name Description DSCHRFLO11 MX FItZ cVal mag f Distance Scheme fault impedance magnitude DSCHRFLO11 MX FItZ cVal ang f Distance Scheme fault impedance angle DSCHRFLO11 MX FitDiskm mag f Distance Scheme fault distance Protection Logical Device DS50BFIRBRF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS5OBF
357. ohm 150 0 to 150 0 Load Encroachment common for 21P and 68 Load Encroachment Disabled Impedance LHS 12 00 ohms secondary 0 01 to 66 00 Impedance RHS 12 00 ohms secondary 0 01 to 66 00 Upper Angle LHS 150 0 degrees 90 1 to 179 9 Upper Angle RHS 30 0 degrees 0 1 to 89 9 Lower Angle LHS 210 0 degrees 180 1 to 269 9 Lower Angle RHS 30 0 degrees 89 9 to 0 1 Tilt Angle 21P and 21N 21P Phase Reactance Top Tilt 3 0 deg 10 0 to 10 0 Angle 21N Ground Reactance Top Tilt 3 0 deg 10 0 to 10 0 Angle 21N Ground Distance Zone 1 21N Zone 1 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 8 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 9 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Left Reach R1 10 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 10 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 Ip Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 2 21N Zone 2 Disabled Type Quadrilateral Forward Reach 12 00 ohm 0 00 to 66 00 Left Reach R1 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Right Reach R2 15 00 ohm 0 05 to 66 00 Mho Char Angle 90 0 deg 70 0 to 140 0 Pickup Delay 0 50 0 00 to 99 99 Ip Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 310 Supervision 1 0 A 0 2 to 50 0 21N Ground Distance Zone 3
358. ombined Figure 7 25 Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic 50N 51N 50N and 51N Test Procedure Note with 0 voltage applied the unit becomes non directional i e picks up in both forward and reverse directions 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 51N Alarm Output Contact 6 SON Trip Apply single phase current to the relay terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 0 5 A Slowly ramp the current up At 0 95 to 1 05 A expect 1 0 A 51N Alarm High Continue to raise current At 9 5 to 10 5 A expect 10 0 A 50N Trip High Contact 6 Closed Turn current off 51N Alarm Low 50N Trip Low Timing Test 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 7 2 Set timer start from single phase 0 0 A to 4 00 A transition this equates to 7 36 4x pickup L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Time Delay 4 33 TMS x 2 F To G C Multiple 1 0 0103 40 02 1 1 168s 3x 0 0228 F 3x 0 0228 area 0 0281 where TMS 3 0 Multiple 4 0 3 Inject fault Observe Relay Target 51N Trip End of 50N SIN test 50 51 Phase Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test Overcurrent Test Settings e Only 51 Non directional e 50 Pickup 15 0 A e 51 Pickup 1 5 A e Time Curve IEC Very Inverse A 13 5 B 0 00 p 1 0 TMS 0 5
359. ominal 1 A C Z Circle Trigger 30 32 11 Line le Angle IIE hc 5 degrees 04 degrees E ProLogic 30 32 12 12a Magnitude x of nominal 1 A EC Group Logic 30 32 13 12a Angie KENETET 05 degrees Joa degrees C Output Matrix 30 32 14 12b Magnitude xioR of nominal 1 A C Settings Summary 30 32 15 12 Ange O NEATE 5 degrees o1 degrees E O Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 30 32 16 12c Magnitude O X of nominal 1 A C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 30 32 17 Be e or Heda 5 degrees 04 degrees E Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 30 32 18 a Magnitude C 1 of nominal 1 A HC Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 30 32 19 Ga Ande O O Hist Mel 5 degrees 0 degrees EC Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 30 32 20 13b Magnitude C x 1 ot nominal 1 A EC Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 30 32 21 13b Angle aE There 5 degrees 0 1 degrees H 0 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 30 32 22 Ge Magnitude 1 of nominal 1 A 30 92 23 Bc Ange EADAE 5 wees o1 degrees 30 32 24 la Magnitude C O 3X of nominal 1 A 30 32 25 Ma Angle O O TATE 5 degrees 0 1 degrees Ei L PRO Offliner Settings v12 Use the space bar to toggle the selected Change Event Class on off piai Figure 6 14 Class Data L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 17 6 Offliner Settings Software SCADA Settings Summary 6 18 Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen Only Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear h
360. on Initiated by 21 Alarm Enable Disable CT Turns Ratio Ring Bus Configuration Aux CT Line Enable Disable Input Main CT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For protection and recording Auxiliary CT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For protection and recording Current Input 3 CT Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For Mutual compensation Recording and ProLogic Input Current Input 4 CT Ratio 1 00 to 10000 00 For Mutual compensation Recording and ProLogic Input PT Turns Ratio CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Enable Disable Devices Main PT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 20000 00 For Protection and Recording Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 1 00 to 20000 00 For protection and recording Line Line to Line Voltage 1 00 to 2000 00 kV Primary Distance Units km or miles Target Latching On This option specifies whether the front Target LED is latched or not Target Latching on means that the target LED remains on after a trip until it is reset through the front by Human Machine Interface HMD If the Target Latching is set off the target light comes on during a relay trip and will reset Base MVA The base MVA is used for recording purposes CT Turns Ratio and PT Turns Ratio The CT and PT ratios are specified for the monitoring of analog inputs All CT and PT ratios are specified with a ratio relative to one The line protection uses the main current and the main voltage to operate When 2 sets of CT
361. on operates very fast and been field proven to block the distance elements during potential transferring be tween buses The function looks for a negative rate of change on the positive sequence volt age while determining if the positive sequence current is changing A loss of potential in itself should result in only a loss of voltage or a negative rate of change of voltage A fault results in a high rate of change of current as well In some rare cases there is a negative rate of change of fault current therefore we use an absolute rate of change of current When the loss of potential condition is detected it is latched until all the 3 phase voltages are above 75 or a pos itive rate of change of voltage is detected So the circuit detects a loss of poten tial that results in a voltage of less than 75 Select positive and zero sequence current blocking functions above the maximum load current this ensures that LOP does not pick up on fault A dropout timer has been added on the di dt signal in front of gate 169 to en sure that the di dt signal will not reset earlier than the dv dt signal This change improves the security of the algorithm in some particular fault situations If desired negative sequence monitoring can be enabled to provide enhanced performance against PT fuse failure conditions occur during line energization Table 4 16 60 Loss of Potential Settings 60 Loss of Potential Enable Disable 11 Blocking 0 5 to 50
362. onfiguration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA a Internal Modem if one exists xit k OONIA NASUN port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 Connected 0 00 14 VT100 115200 8 N Figure 5 1 L PRO 4000 System Utility L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 5 Data Communications 2 Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by Enter The fol lowing screen appears HyperERL HyperTerminal Ble Edt View Cal Transfer Help Osie S 0o F 4 Restore ALL default settings including calibration and password 5 Restore only default configuration settings F channel definitions device settings 6 Restore only default system setup ports time settings i Force hardware reset he Network utilities Monitor 10 Exit port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 10 1 Current network configuration Port 119 MAC address 002195010431 Port 119 IP addres 192 168 188 45 Port 119 subnet mask 259 255 255 8 Port 120 MAC address 60215010430 Port 120 IP addres 192 168 0 2 Port 120 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 1 IEC 61850 port 120 Do you want to change the IP address for port 119 yri00 fiiszooee1 Soau CARS Cacture Pret ecto Figure 5 2 Change the network parameters as needed for t
363. orts 100 117 400 421 20 External Programmable Inputs 8 Port 118 Internal modem 9 Port 119 120 100BASE T or 100BASE FX Ethernet Ports 10 Port 121 External clock IRIG B modulated or unmodulated 11 Port 122 SCADA 12 Port 123 Direct Modem RS 232 Port 13 Port 200 229 422 435 21 programmable output contacts 14 Port 324 327 AC voltage inputs 15 Port 328 329 unused 16 Port 330 333 AC voltage inputs 17 Port 334 335 unused 18 Port 336 337 Power supply 19 Port 300 323 AC current inputs 20 Port with GND symbol Case ground Figure 1 5 L PRO Relay Rear View 4U AC Current and The relay is provided with terminal blocks for up to 12 ac currents and 6 phase Voltage Inputs to neutral voltages Each of the current input circuits has polarity marks A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown for details see AC Schematic Drawings in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawings in Appendix J External Inputs The relay contains 9 3U or 20 4U programmable external inputs Output Relay The relay has 14 3U or 21 4U programmable relay contacts Contacts Relay If the relay becomes inoperative then the Relay Inoperative Alarm output con Inoperative tact closes and all tripping functions are blocked Alarm Output D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 1 5 1 Overview 1 4 Model Options Ordering The relay is available as a horizontal mount for details see Mechanical Draw ings in Ap
364. ote Nominal CT Secondary Current can be set to either 1 Aor 5A Nominal System Frequency can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Ensure setting selection matches that of target the relay L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file or the setting will be rejected by the relay This feature ensures that the correct setting file is applied to the right relay Choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the identification screen by checking the gnore Serial Number check box The relay only checks for proper relay type and setting version if the ignore se rial number has been chosen requires relay firmware version 1 0 or greater Analog Inputs L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 O Fle Ede Window Help oleja sae vila 2 fe Analog Input Names ps Enternal reeta ses hehe Man votoge Lva Main Voltage A LVE Man Votoge V Figure 6 6 Analog Inputs Analog Input Names screen identifies all the ac voltage and current inputs to the relay These names appear in any fault disturbance records the relay pro duces Table 6 4 Analog Inputs Main Voltage LVA LVB LVC Main Current LIA LIB LIC Aux Voltage BVA BVB BVC Aux Current IA2 IB2 IC2 Current 1A3 IB3 IC3 IA4 IB4 IC4 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 11 6 Offliner Settings Software Exter
365. other transport mechanism Terminal ASCII Terminal Command Line BK Software Vendor software named L PRO Offliner Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech anism Direct Keypad on device front panel Factory Specified when device is ordered Protocol Set via DNP3 e g assign class Other explain Current Value If configurable list methods 1 1 11 DNP3 XML files available On Line RdWrFilenameDescription of Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config values xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column Not supported 1 1 12 External DNP3 XML files available Off line Rd WrFilenameDescription of Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config values xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column
366. p D59M2PTOV3 ST Str dirPhsA 59 2 Main phase A Trip Direction set to unknown D59M2PTOV3 STS Str phsB 59 2 Main phase B Trip D59M2PTOV3 ST Str dirPhsB 59 2 Main phase B Trip Direction set to unknown D59M2PTOV3 ST Str phsC 59 2 Main phase C Trip D59M2PTOV3 ST Str dirPhsC 59 2 Main phase C Trip Direction set to unknown D59A2PTOV4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A2PTOV4 Data Name Description D59A2PTOV4 ST Str general 59 2 Auxiliary Trip D59A2PTOV4 ST Str dirGeneral 59 2 Auxiliary Trip Direction set to unknown D59A2PTOV4 ST Str phsA 59 2 Auxiliary phase A Trip D59A2PTOV4 ST Str dirPhsA 59 2 Auxiliary phase A Trip Direction set to unknown D59A2PTOV4 ST Str phsB 59 2 Auxiliary phase B Trip D59A2PTOV4 ST Str dirPhsB 59 2 Auxiliary phase B Trip Direction set to unknown D59A2PTOV4 ST Str phsC 59 2 Auxiliary phase C Trip D59A2PTOV4 ST Str dirPhsC 59 2 Auxiliary phase C Trip Direction set to unknown L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 93 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation DS9NPTOVS This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS9NPTOVS Data Name Description D59NPTOV5 ST Str general 59N Inverse Alarm D59NPTOV5 ST Str dirGeneral 59N Inverse Trip Direction set to unknown D59NPTOV5 ST Op
367. p Logic 4 821 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 5 822 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 6 823 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 7 824 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 8 825 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 9 826 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 10 827 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 11 828 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 12 829 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 13 830 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 14 831 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 15 832 0 Off inactive On active Group Logic 16 833 0 Off inactive On active 79 Initiated 834 0 Off inactive On active 79 Blocked 835 0 Off inactive On active L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Read Coil Status Function Code 01 50BF 1 Main 836 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 2 Main 837 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 1 Aux 838 0 Off inactive On active 50BF 2 Aux 839 0 Off inactive On active 79 3 Phase Main Reclose 840 0 Off inactive On active 79 3 Phase Aux Reclose 841 0 Off inactive On active 79 3 Phase Lead Lockout 842 0 Off inactive On active 79 3 Ph
368. p Setting blocks 79 3 from any attempts to reclose on a 3 Phase basis If a single phase fault occurs on the line the faulted phase is identified and only that phase is opened After a period of time as de fined by the pickup time of timer T1 in the single phase recloser 79 1 that phase will be reclosed If the fault starts as a single phase fault and then evolves into a multiphase fault or commutates to a different phase while the first phase is open the line will 3 phase trip and reclosing will be inhibited If the first sin gle phase fault is detected then reclosed upon and if the fault persists the line will 3 phase trip and lockout Timer TD5 dropout time determines how soon a L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 27 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 28 subsequent single line to ground fault can occur after the first one in order for the line to attempt another single phase trip and reclosure If a single phase fault is detected and that phase opens but fails to reclose before timer TM times out the line will 3 phase trip and lockout It is important therefore that timer TM be set longer in duration than the single phase recloser time Only one sin gle phase reclose is attempted If upon reclosure the fault persists before timer TDS has had a chance to dropout the line will 3 phase trip and lockout To get the line out of a locked out state the line must be manually reclosed and stay in service for longer than the single phase locko
369. pedance an gle entered in settings To perform the positive sequence impedance calcula tion the directly measured positive sequence current must exceed 0 2 A secondary and the memorized positive sequence voltage must exceed 2 V sec ondary There may be some rare circumstances where there may not be sufficient volt age or current using the negative zero and positive sequence components for the directional element to make a valid directional decision The most likely circumstance where this may occur is a 3 phase bolted fault near the line VTs that is not cleared in an appropriate amount of time It takes approximately 30 cycles after the measured 3 phase system voltage drops to 0 for the ring filter voltage to decay such that the Vpos_mem is less than 2 V secondary For this circumstance or for any other fault case where there are insufficient sequence component quantities for any of the directional calculations to operate the di rection is set to forward Setting the reverse reach to zero sets the direction control to forward and setting the forward reach to zero sets the direction con trol to reverse Setting both forward and reverse reaches non zero sets the di rectional element to non directional The output of the directional element asserts when the direction is determined to be forward This output is used internally by protection functions directly supervised by the element and is also available as the Direction
370. pendix G The relay is available with an optional internal modem card The two rear Ethernet ports can be ordered as one copper one optical port or both optical ports or both copper ports These ports on the rear panel are avail able as either 1 OOBASE T RJ 45 or 100BASE FX optical ST The Current Transformer CT inputs are 1 A nominal or 5 A nominal The external inputs are 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc The system base frequency is either 50 Hz or 60 Hz The L PRO 4000 is available in a standard 3U 3A previously 3U rack model or as 4U 4A previously 4U model with an optional I O board as described above All of the above options must be specified at the time of ordering L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 1 Introduction This chapter discusses setting up and communicating with the relay including the following e Power supply Inter Range Instrumentation Group time codes IRIG B time input e Communicating with the relay using a network link a direct serial link and a modem link internal external e Using Relay C e ontrol Panel to access the relay s user interface Using HyperTerminal to access the relay s maintenance menu Setting the Baud rate e Accessing the relay s Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition SCADA services 2 2 Power Supply Case Grounding D02706R02 50 A wide range power supply is standard The nominal operating range is 48 250 Vdc 100
371. pes and which analog values they are associated with are described in the ta ble below Both signals are available in DNP and Modbus Point Value Condition 0 Normal 1 Alarm 2 Block 3 Alarm has evolved to block The Alarm condition is allowed to reset if the continuous dc level drops below the pickup level The Block condition has no reset level If power is cycled to the relay it will go into its normal state until the continuous dc level is detected again Self Check Fail appears as Aux Failure Alarm in the settings ver sions before V 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D 5 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol All metering values available through the terminal user interface are also avail able via the Modbus protocol Additionally the Modbus protocol supports the reading of unit time and time of the readings and provides access to trip and alarm events including fault location information All metering readings can be frozen into a snapshot via the Hold Readings function see Force Single Coil function address 0 Read Coil Status Function Code 01 Channel Address Value Hold Readings 1 0 Readings not held 1 Readings held Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved Output Contact 1 513 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Ou
372. phsC cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual Current 2 phase C angle D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 MAINMSQIL Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node MAINMSQI1 Data Name Description MAINMSQI1 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f Positive sequence current 11 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f Negative sequence current 12 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f Zero Sequence current 10 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqA seqT Set to pos neg zero MAINMSQI1 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f Positive sequence voltage V1 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f Negative sequence voltage V2 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f Zero Sequence voltage V0 MAINMSQI1 MX SeqA seqT FaultData Logical Device D21P1IMMXU1 Set to pos neg zero This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1MMXUI1 Data Name Description D21P1MMXU1 MxX Hz mag f 21P1 fault frequency D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21P1 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21P1 phase A voltage angle D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21P1 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21P1 phase B fault voltage angle D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21P1 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21P1MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21P1 phase C fault voltage angle D21P1MMXU1 MX
373. ported for Binary Outputs group 10 but most of Binary Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs group 2 with full Event and Class Data support See L PRO Offliner DNP Configuration Point Map screen for com plete point lists and configuration options NOTES 3 Virtual Inputs default Binary Output points 94 123 can be used to control re lay output contacts See L PRO Offliner Setting Group X Output Matrix screen for configuration options 4 Binary Output data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none c io ka A e D x 2 Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z gt value is 0 value is 1 2 g 2 5 5 5 H e eiz zz g 3 alal zl slz 2 G o o 6 1 616 6 ae E 3 8 2 88 S S o 8 5 2 3 E S s a 8 e oer 2 f S a 9 a a jastas oa asfrFj o o o 0 Output contact 1 Open Closed None None 1 Output contact 2 Open Closed None None 2 Output contact 3 Open Closed None None 3 Output contact 4 Open Closed None None 4 Output contact 5 Open Closed None None 5 Output contact 6 Open Closed None None 6 Output contact 7 Open Closed None None 7 Output contact 8
374. pply 18 Port with GND symbol Chassis Ground E Figure 1 4 L PRO Relay Rear View 3U 3A previously 3U L PRO 4000 User Manual a D02706R02 50 1 Overview io y External e 125 250 V 4a 125 250 V 48 125 250 V a8 125 250 V 48 125 250 V 48 125 250 V a8 125 250 V 48 125 250 V a8 125 250 V a nee inputs z j ae D ae ToT DH i ae 100BASE T FX 100BASE T FX i ne Modem 4000BASE TXLX 1000BASE TX LX RIG B SCADA com 7 External 48 125 250 V 48 125 250 V NO NO NO NONC NONC NONC NONC Output inputs 719 nja 20 aj 15 AI 16 la 17 e 18l 19a 20 ja 21 Contacts 13 2 Conte Taput 1A 5A 50Hz 60Hz Main AC Orr Aux AC Line cmon AC cnn Inputs Record Only FMA AGB AGC AG I2A A128 A120 AISA E AGC AG I4A AIG I4B AI IBE CICA CICA ICAICaICINeaheaicgicalealesieaicaica ics 7 P
375. ptance Protection Function Test Guide Aux Breaker Close 0 00 0 00 iv VI 2 SCADA Close Bkr 187 79 Aux Reclose f E13 External Trip Figure 7 41 Auxiliary Breaker Close Command via Virtual Input ProLogic 9 This equation closes Out 5 to simulate Main Breaker a contact and also closes Out 14 to provide feedback into Main Breaker Status ProLogic 3 This latching function resets when an external trip is received oo oo v j j 79 Main Reclose Figure 7 42 Main Breaker Reclose 79 Reset Procedure perform this before beginning the 79 Test 1 In Relay Control Panel Service level access Utilities gt Virtual Inputs 2 Select Virtual Input 1 SCADA LO Reset Ini 3 Pulse On This simulates a SCADA 79 Lockout Reset Command Observe the relay Target Init LO Reset VI PL6 After 12 Seconds Target Main LO is Reset PL7 End of 79 Reset procedure L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 55 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 79 Test Procedure 1 Access Utilities gt Virtual Inputs 2 Select Virtual Input 2 SCADA Close Breaker 1 amp 2 3 Pulse On This simulates a SCADA Breaker Close command Observe the relay actions on the relay HMI Main Breaker Close and Aux Breaker Close After 10 Seconds External Trip Time delay of ProLogic4 After 2 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds After 4 Seconds After 8 Seconds After 2 Seconds After 6 Seconds After 8 Seconds
376. put 2 Change of state latch 0258 0 Off inactive On active External Input 3 Change of state latch 0259 0 Off inactive On active External Input 4 Change of state latch 0260 0 Off inactive On active External Input 5 Change of state latch 0261 0 Off inactive On active External Input 6 Change of state latch 0262 0 Off inactive On active External Input 7 Change of state latch 0263 0 Off inactive On active External Input 8 Change of state latch 0264 0 Off inactive On active External Input 9 Change of state latch 0265 0 Off inactive On active External Input 10 Change of state latch 0266 0 Off inactive On active External Input 11 Change of state latch 10267 0 Off inactive On active External Input 12 Change of state latch 0268 0 Off inactive On active External Input 13 Change of state latch 0269 0 Off inactive On active External Input 14 Change of state latch 0270 0 Off inactive On active External Input 15 Change of state latch 0271 0 Off inactive On active External Input 16 Change of state latch 0272 0 Off inactive On active External Input 17 Change of state latch 0273 0 Off inactive On active External Input 18 Change of state latch 0274 0 Off inactive On active External Input 19 Change of state latch 0275 0 Off inactive On active External Input 20 Change of state latch 0276 0 Off inactive On active L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50
377. put Contact 6 Open Closed 101 Output Contact 7 Open Closed 102 Output Contact 8 Open Closed 103 Output Contact 9 Open Closed 104 Output Contact 10 Open Closed 105 Output Contact 11 Open Closed 106 Output Contact 12 Open Closed 107 Output Contact 13 Open Closed 108 Output Contact 14 Open Closed 109 Output Contact 15 Open Closed 110 Output Contact 16 Open Closed 111 Output Contact 17 Open Closed 112 Output Contact 18 Open Closed 113 Output Contact 19 Open Closed 114 Output Contact 20 Open Closed 115 Output Contact 21 Open Closed 116 Z Circle Trigger Inactive Active 117 21P2 Alarm Inactive Active 118 21P3 Alarm Inactive Active 119 21P4 Alarm Inactive Active 120 21N2 Alarm Inactive Active 121 21N3 Alarm Inactive Active 122 21N4 Alarm Inactive Active 123 51 Alarm Inactive Active 124 51N Alarm Inactive Active 125 46 51 Alarm Inactive Active 126 68 OutBlinder Alarm Inactive Active 127 68 InBlinder Alarm Inactive Active 128 25 27 59 Sync Check Inactive Active 129 50BF 1 Aux Inactive Active 130 50BF 2 Aux Inactive Active 131 50BF Initiate Inactive Active 132 79 3 Phase Initiated Inactive Active 133 79 3 Phase Blocked Inactive Active Appendix F 16 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 134 79 3 Phase Main Reclose Inactive Active 135 79 3 Phase Aux Reclose
378. r Manual 4 53 4 Protection Functions and Specifications DCB Logic 4 54 durations greater than 6 ms The blocking logic continues to block the scheme send and scheme trip signals when the fault detection or loss of potential sig nals go low Timer setting TWD1 determines the block extension time TWD1 should be set to coordinate with the communication reset time of the PT signal It should be set greater than the time it takes for the remote end s Zone 2 to re set and for the PT channel to reset Timer setting TWD2 should be set to a time that prevents chattering of the communications channel If TWD2 is allowed to reset before the remote end strong source clears the fault and stops sending the permissive transfer trip signal the WI echoes back another block of permissive transfer trip send The WI logic is also used to provide local tripping if both ends of the line are to be isolated The line voltages provide supervision with a positive sequence under voltage element 27V1 and a zero sequence over voltage element 59V0 If a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end AND 110 AND 112 OR 113 and OR 119 provide a local tripping signal The DCB logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over reaches the remote end for forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 29 Com munication aided Scheme on page 4 52 Typically DCB is used when the com munications link may be disrupted during fault condi
379. r correct operation To ensure ad equate positive sequence voltage exists for all fault conditions the relay uses aring filter implemented in software to provide memory voltage as the source for the positive sequence voltage This memory voltage lasts for approximate ly 150 cycles even if all voltage inputs from the line VTs go to zero A practi D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 7 4 Protection Functions and Specifications cal effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the Mho characteristic by the magnitude of the source impedance see Effect of using Memorized Volt age on a 3 phase forward fault condition on page 4 8 This expansion of the characteristic ensures correct operation for zero voltage faults at the relay lo cation and for forward capacitive faults No Memory Voltage Full Memory Voltage Figure 4 6 Effect of using Memorized Voltage on a 3 phase forward fault condition L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Ring Filter D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The voltage memory in the relay uses a ring filter implemented in software The ring filter is a high Q bandpass filter with the frequency response centered on the nominal system frequency The effect of the ring filter is to retain some voltage information for approximately 150 cycles even ifthe measured system voltage is severely depressed by a fault
380. r voltage Main VA VB VC Phasors 59 Aux Over voltage 27 Aux Under voltage Aux VA VB VC Phasors 50LS Main 11A 11B 11C Phasors 50LS Aux I2A I2B I2C Phasors 50 67 Trip Line IA IB IC Phasors 51 67 Trip 50N 67 Trip Line Current Zero Sequence Phasor 310 51N 67 Trip 46 50 67 Trip 46 51 67 Trip Line Current Negative Sequence Phasor 312 The fault log can be viewed in three ways e Relay Front HMI e Relay Control Panel interface is in the Events tab L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 59 4 Protection Functions and Specifications e 61850 SCADA protocol included in the L PRO allow the SCADA client access to Trip event data 4 60 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 5 Data Communications 5 1 Introduction Section 5 deals with data communications with the relay First the SCADA protocol is discussed and it is then followed by the new IEC 61850 communi cation standard The SCADA protocol deals with the Modbus and DNP Distributed Network Protocol protocols The SCADA configuration and its settings are described The parameters for SCADA communications are defined using L PRO 4000 Offliner software Finally details on how to monitor SCADA communications are given for maintenance and trouble shooting of the relay 5 2 SCADA Protocol Modbus Protocol DNP Protocol D02706R02 50 The relay supports either a Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII SCADA connec tion
381. range to _ ms When time error may have drifted by selectable from_ n 1 8 3 Maximum Internal Time NA Reference Error when set via DNP ms 1 8 4 Maximum Delay NA Measurement error ms 1 8 5 Maximum Response 100 ms for the L PRO Offliner time ms case all sup ported points mapped to the DNP point lists 1 8 6 Maximum time from NA start up to IIN 1 4 assertion ms 1 8 7 Maximum Event Time 0 1736 ms for tag error for local Binary 60Hz sys and Double bit I O ms tems 0 2083 ms for 50 Hz sys tems 1 8 8 Maximum Event Time 0 1736 ms for tag error for local I O 60Hz sys other than Binary and tems Double bit data types 0 2083 ms for ms 50 Hz sys tems D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 11 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Capabilities and The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each Current DNP3 data type Each data type also provides a table defining the data points Settings for available in the device default point lists configuration and a description of Device how this information can be obtained in case of customized point configura Database tion 2 1 Single Bit Binary Inputs If configurable Static Steady State Group Number 1 Capabilities Current Value 4 Event Group Number 2 list methods 2 1 1 Static Variation reported amp Variation 1 Single bit Packed format when variation 0 Variatio
382. re gt Device Manager gt Ports In Windows 7 small icons view go to Start gt Control Panel gt Device Manager gt Ports Look for the port number associated to this device ERLPhase 4000 Series Device Look for a COM where can be 1 2 3 etc Leave the default settings for this port It is recommended to restart the PC after the USB driver installation The default baud rate for the relay USB Port 150 is 115200 however to double check it login to the relay display and go to Main Menu gt System gt Relay Comm Setup 2 4 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 2 Setup and Communications 2 6 Network Link D02706R02 50 PC with TCP IP Port 119 or Port 120 TCP IP Network Port 119 RJ 45 Network Figure 2 2 Network Link Access both the relay s user interface and DNP3 SCADA services simultane ously with the Ethernet TCP IP LAN link through the network ports Port 119 and Port 120 The rear Port 119 and 120 are either 1OOBASE T copper inter face with an RJ 45 connector or 1 OOBASE FX optical interface with an ST style connector Each port is factory configurable as a copper or optical inter face The front Port 119 is 1OOBASE T copper interface with an RJ 45 connec tor DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN for details see Communication Port Details on page 2 15 Connect to the Ethernet LAN using a Cat 5 cable with an RJ 45 connector or 100BASE FX 1300 n
383. re be low 20 V positive sequence The recloser mode setting is related to the Ring Bus Configuration auxiliary CT line input and must match the breaker configuration in the system param eters screen Invalid Action E xi To disable Aux CT Line Input you will have to change the Recloser Mode in the 79 screen to Main Only Make sure to do that in all setting groups Figure L 17 Invalid Action Most protection schemes require the ability to block the 79 when certain events happen In our example we are using Virtual Input 7 VI 7 to block The 79 blocking is set to last for an additional time of 1 0 seconds TDB L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 9 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 79 initiation is done by simply setting the desired function in the output matrix Output Contact Block amp Initiate s 7 a a 40 41 12 1a 14 798 791 BF E A co pa a 3 a fs 3 Device Pole 4 Trip Pole B Trip Pole Trip a Ooo ooo ooo 5 o O O GO OC o L E O gggggggoog IT PL 20 ProLogic 20 PL 21 ProLogic 21 PL 22 ProLogic 22 l l PL 23 ProLogic 23 PL 24 ProLogic 24 2PPH2A I l 2200M 2200F II V Bl GB Ol 2000F II 2000F Bl 2202F l II II 220006 oo0ogo0 BEEEE OGG Hon YI 41 52 1 Close 52 C5 __ 11 52 1 Close 52 C5 30 2 52 4 Trip 52 5 C Y1 3 52 2 Close 52 C5
384. re start Only a power down power up cycle will reset the LED to green and re energize the relays B DSP Self Check Fail The Self Check Fail output can be assigned and used in ProLogic statements and the Output Matrix There are two possibilities for DSP Self Check Fail either Alarm or Block Both are related to the dc offset on a channel which should not occur with prop er calibration Alarm just drives the optional output contact but Block causes the Relay Functional LED to go out and the relay to be unable to drive any out put contact as in the first and last paragraphs of section A DSP System Fail ure above C DSP Micro Processor MPC Comm Failure D MPC Self Check Fail The Service Required LED changes from off to red D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix M 1 Appendix M Failure Modes E MPC System Fail The Test Mode LED changes from off to red until the MPC has rebooted The watchdog will continue to attempt to re start the MPC several times If the MPC reboots but can not return to normal operation the Service Required LED changes from off to red Appendix M 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation N 1 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS Introduction D02706R02 50 This specification is the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS and presents the ACSI conformance statements as defined in Annex A of Part 7 2 of the IEC 618
385. reg isters contains an 8 bit portion of a 32 bit time value Register 40573 contains the upper most 8 bits and register 40576 contains the lowest 8 bits Modbus Event Message Example FL2000Sep21 20 16 16 966 21P1 AB 1 0 km Trip Register Value Meaning High Byte Low Byte 40516 0x00 0x1B Event text size 27 0x1B hex 40517 0x46 0x4C FL Fault locator event 40518 0x32 0x30 2 0 40519 0x30 0x30 0 0 40520 0x53 0x65 S e 40521 0x70 0x32 p 2 40522 0x31 0x20 1 lt sp gt 40523 0x32 0x30 2 0 40524 0x3A 0x31 ery 40525 0x36 0x3A Oye 40526 0x31 0x36 1 40527 0x2E 0x39 2 9 40528 0x36 0x36 6 6 40529 0x20 0x32 lt sp gt 2 40530 0x31 0x50 ie ed a 40531 0x31 0x20 1 lt sp gt Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Modbus Event Message Example 40532 0x41 0x42 A B 40533 0x20 0x31 lt sp gt T 40534 0x2E 0x30 ome 40535 0x6B Ox6D K m 40536 0x3A 0x20 2 lt sp gt 40537 0x54 0x72 Ta 40538 0x69 0x70 i p D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 11 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Device This document shows the device capabilities and the current value of each pa Prope rties rameter for the default unit configuration as defined in the default configura tion file T
386. releases designated with a letter suffix e g v3 1a maintain the same compatibility as their base version For example L PRO firmware v3 1c and Offliner Settings v3 la are compatible L PRO 4000 Firmware Software Compatibility Guide EERO Firmware RCE version veces oats Scie VK v2 5 v2 5 or greater 407 v2 6 or greater 3 0 v2 4a v2 4 or greater 406 v2 5 or greater 2 0 v2 3 v2 1 or greater 404 v2 3 or greater 2 0 v2 2 v2 1 or greater 404 v2 3 or greater 2 0 v2 1a b v1 3 or greater 403 v2 1 or greater 0 0 v2 1 v1 2 or greater 403 v2 1 or greater n a v2 0 v1 0 or greater 402 v2 0 or greater n a v1 0 n a 401 v1 0 or greater n a Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History L PRO 4000 User Manual xi PC System Requirements and Software Installation D02706R02 50 Hardware The minimum hardware requirements are e 1 GHz processor e 2 GB RAM e 20 GB available hard disk space e USB port e Serial communication port Operating System The following software must be installed and functional prior to installing the applications e Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or e Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1 Relay Control Panel requires Windows XP SP3 it will not work on earlier ver sions of Windows Software Installation The CD ROM contains software and the User Manual for the L PRO Trans mission Line Protection Rel
387. rent to line angle 80 Observe 51 Pickup Alarm High Slowly ramp the current phase angle in positive direction i e less lag At 5 to 15 expect 10 51 Pickup Alarm Low Turn off voltage and current sources End of 50 51 test L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 39 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 46 50 46 51 Settings Negative e Non directional Sequence 46 51 Pickup 1 0 A Overcurrent Time Curve IEEE Extremely Inverse Test A 5 64 B 0 02434 p 2 TMS 3 0 46 50 Directional Control If Directional or combined T must be greater than 10 ms 288 H Outs 50 12 5ms al 0 arm Timer is active only if it s directional or combined 46 51 Directional Control sii 289 E t Out 9 Figure 7 28 Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic 46 50 46 51 Note that positive sequence current SOILpos 4 of nominal current is nec essary to enable the directional element This supervision can be seen on OR 265 for details see Figure 7 27 Directional Element Logic on page 7 39 For this test inject only single phase current This method introduces an equal proportion of positive and negative sequence current This assures that there is sufficient positive sequence current to enable directional control of the nega tive sequence element if a polarizing voltage is also applied Positive sequenc
388. rip Command via External Input ProLogic 5 This equation provides indication via the relay HMI display that the Recloser has locked out Recloser Lockout 0 00 0 50 v 79 Lead Lockout f ratesdtociot g rause l Figure 7 38 Recloser Lockout ProLogic 6 This equation resets the 79 Lockout It uses Virtual Input 1 SCA DA Reset 79 to simulate a SCADA Lockout Reset command In this case this is done by closing the Main Breaker Status Out 5 then Auxiliary Breaker Sta tus Out 6 to simulate main and auxiliary breaker closed status This latching function resets when the 79 Lead Lockout goes low L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 53 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 54 SCADA LO Reset Ini 0 00 0 50 v Vi1 SCADA Reset 79 4 Tereon i rau Figure 7 39 Using Virtual Input to simulate SCADA Recloser Lockout Reset ProLogic 7 This equation is intended only for giving indication of when the 79 Lockout is reset This indication along with ProLogic 6 proves the 79 Reset timer TD Main 79LO is Reset 0 00 0 00 v Protest i Notused f Figure 7 40 Main Recloser Lockout Reset Indication ProLogic 8 This equation closes Out 6 to simulate auxiliary breaker closed status from SCADA breaker close command OR auxiliary recloser operation This latching function resets when an external trip is received L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acce
389. rly indication of a problem The Block level blocks the relay from false tripping by preventing any output contact from closing The Relay Func tional LED turns off but the protection functions will operate normally with the exception that the output contacts will not be allowed to close The Relay Inoperative contact will close for a Block condition The following table de scribes all the Alarm Block indication functions Action Condition Alarm Block Relay Functional LED off x Service Required LED on X X Self Check Fail Signal high X X Relay Inoperative Contact closed X Output Contacts held open X Event Log Message X X Status available through SCADA X X L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix D Event Messages The Self Check Fail signal which is available in the Output Matrix TUI me tering and SCADA can be used to signal an alarm Note that if this signal is mapped to an output contact the contact which it is mapped to will only be closed for an alarm condition If the relay is in the Block condition the Relay Inoperative contact must be used to signal an alarm The status of the Self Check Fail is available through the SCADA services pro vided by the relay The digital signal Self Check Fail will indicate that DSP has detected a continuous dc level and the analog metering value Self Check Fail Parameter is used to indicate which condition Alarm or Block The failure ty
390. roLogic 2 not shown is for 52 4 Input 4 ProLogic 1 Breaker Fail 52 3 IV Enabled Name Breaker Fail 52 3 Pickup Delay 1 00 5 0 00 5 v Target Enabled Dropout Delay Input V1 3 BFinit 52 3 Input B 50LS Input 3 v Do Ra De Input C SOLS Input 3 v o Input lt unused 0 gt This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 7 30 Breaker Fail Created Using ProLogic Input 3 Breaker Fail Test Procedure 1 Apply 0 31 A to the relay Terminals 312 313 2 In Relay Control Pane access Utilities gt Virtual Inputs Select Virtual Input 3 Init BF 52 3 Pulse On Observe after 1 Second Target Breaker Fail 52 3 PL1 3 Reduce current to zero 4 Apply the same process to Input 4 Terminals 318 319 using Virtual Input 4 Init BF2 4 End of 50BF and SOLS tests For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file change to Setting Group 3 1 In Relay Control Panel access Utilities gt Virtual Inputs 2 In the drop down list of virtual inputs select the corresponding virtual input to Switch to SG3 3 Cursor over to Action and select Pulse On 4 Click on Pulse On to execute this command the Active Setting Group is Group 3 now L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 81 Settings Overfrequency 81 1 Pickup 60 5 Hz Fixed R
391. rotocol Monitoring incoming and outgoing data Press Ctrl c to stop monitor Press lt Enter gt to continue gt _ Connected 0 02 07 VT100_ Figure 5 4 Login Screen L PRO 4000 User Manual 5 5 5 Data Communications 5 6 3 Pressing the Enter key results in all SCADA communications characters to be displayed as hexadecimal characters Individual exchanges are separat ed by an asterisk as the following sample illustrates com10_usb_115200 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dae SS 28 Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics 1 2 3 Retrieve system diagnostics 4 Restore ALL default settings including calibration 5 Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings 8 9 1 1 Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA pngble flisable Internal Modem if one exists xit port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 9 Modbus protocol Monitoring incoming and outgoing data Press Ctrl c to stop monitor Press lt Enter gt to continue gt _ Connected 0 02 07 YT 100 115200 8 N Figure 5 5 Hyperterminal 4 Press Ctrl C to end the monitor session L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 5 Data Communications 5 3 IEC 61850 Communication The IEC 61850 Standard Implementat
392. rrent protection functions of the relay along with directional over current elements specifically included in the scheme These elements use the memory polarization as described in the Relay Method of Memory Polariza tion on page 4 7 and the directional element as described in Directional El ement on page 4 10 The carrier trip logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 2 distance elements but the relay provides 2 directional neutral overcurrent elements that can be used in addition to the Zone 2 distance elements The device 51N time over current element and the 50N 67F instantaneous overcurrent if enabled can be configured to drive the carrier trip logic The 51N is configured in the 50N 51N screen while the 50N 67F is configured in the scheme selector screen both el ements are forward directional elements The carrier block logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 4 distance ele ments but the relay provides one directional neutral overcurrent element that can be used in addition to the Zone 4 distance elements The device 50N 67R D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications if enabled can be configured to drive the carrier block logic The 50N 67R is configured in the scheme selector screen and is a reverse directional element The scheme selector can also be configured to enable the 50N 67F and 50N 67R directional overcurrent elements as inputs to ProLogic statements The 50N 67F element can be se
393. rtual Input 27 Inactive Active 36 Virtual Input 28 Inactive Active 37 Virtual Input 29 Inactive Active 38 Virtual Input 30 Inactive Active 39 Fault Information Available Inactive Active 40 External Input 10 Inactive Active 41 External Input 11 Inactive Active 42 External Input 12 Inactive Active 43 External Input 13 Inactive Active 44 External Input 14 Inactive Active 45 External Input 15 Inactive Active 46 External Input 16 Inactive Active 47 External Input 17 Inactive Active 48 External Input 18 Inactive Active 49 External Input 19 Inactive Active 50 External Input 20 Inactive Active 51 21P1 Trip Inactive Active 52 21P2 Trip Inactive Active 53 21P3 Trip Inactive Active 54 21P4 Trip Inactive Active 55 51 Trip Inactive Active 56 50 Trip Inactive Active 57 21N1 Trip Inactive Active 58 21N2 Trip Inactive Active 59 21N3 Trip Inactive Active 60 21N4 Trip Inactive Active 61 68 Power Swing Inactive Active 62 51N Trip Inactive Active 63 50N Trip Inactive Active 64 46 51 Trip Inactive Active 65 46 50 Trip Inactive Active 66 SOTF Inactive Active 67 Distance Scheme Trip Inactive Active Appendix F 14 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 68 Distance Scheme Send 1 Inactive Active 69 60 LOP 1 Inactive Active 70 Self Check Fail 1 Inactive Active 71 27 Main Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 27 Main A B an
394. s Nominal Current Full Scale Continuous Maximum full scale rating Thermal rating Burden In 1 Arms or 5 Arms 3x In 3 Arms or 15 Arms 40x In for 1 second symmetrical 400 Arms for 1 second lt 0 25 VA 5 Arms Amplitude measurement accuracy 0 5 for 54 to 66 Hz 0 5 for 44 to 56 Hz Analog Sampling Rate 96 samples cycle for recording 8 samples cycle for protection Records up to 25th harmonic External Inputs 9 isolated inputs 3U chassis 20 isolated inputs 4U chassis Optional 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc nominal externally wetted Isolation 2 KV optical isolation External Input Turn on Voltage 48 Vdc range 27 to 40 Vdc 125 Vdc 75 to 100 Vdc 250 Vdc 150 to 200 Vdc 0 to 80 of nominal Specified voltages are over full ambient temperature range Output Relays contacts Externally wetted Normal Contacts 3U 14 programmable normal outputs and 1 relay inoperative normal output normally closed 4U 21 programmable normal outputs and 1 relay inoperative normal output normally closed Make 30 A as per IEEE C37 90 Carry 8 A Break 0 9 A at 125 Vdc resistive 0 35 A at 250 Vdc resistive HCFI Contacts 3U 6 programmable normal outputs 4 pro grammable HCFI outputs and 1 relay inopera tive normal output normally closed 3U 13 programmable normal outputs 4 pro grammable HCFI outputs and 1 relay inopera tive normal output normally close
395. s main and auxiliary are used as line current input e g ring bus application the user must enable ring bus configuration to configure the relay If enabled the cur rents from the 2 sets of CTs are added to the relay to form the line current For L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 15 6 Offliner Settings Software cases where voltage for line protection is obtained from bus PTs the bus PTs are connected to the main voltage inputs Auxiliary Voltage Input If a single phase source is used it must be connected to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input example If only a B phase bus PT is available it should be connected to the relay input B phase terminals All un used single phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation SCADA Communication ese pesei ane File Edit Window Help Bx SEOMCCNSTANN E kentification Relay SCADA Communication Analog Inputs C External Inputs ED Address 1 oe Output Contacts ee Baud Rate 19200 Virtual Inputs Setting Groups Serial Port 3 Data Link Timeout 5 ms 0 to disable C Even C System Parameters F scaDA Commuriatonl B C DNP Configuration C Point Map C DNP3Level2 Parity G odd Modbus ASCII C None C Modbus RTU Network Class Data Keep Alive Timeout s 0 to disable SCADA Settings Summary Ethernet Network Porth Record Length C DNP3 Level 2 TCP EO Setting Group 1 Setting Gre C DNP3 Level2 UDP C Line Parameters
396. s in the lead position 17 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 Close 52 CS using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will close breaker 52 1 and after a fixed delay of 10 0 seconds breaker 52 1 will move back into the lead po sition and 52 2 follow breaker will move back into the follow position 18 Go to the Control Virtual Inputs and select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79I using the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip both breakers and initiate the reclosing sequence 19 After 52 1 closes and before 52 2 closes select 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79T us ing the Pulse On action for the virtual inputs This will trip breaker 52 1 and cause a lockout alarm to be generated and block the follow breaker reclose attempt 20 Check the event log and confirm the 79 Lead Lockout event and that there was no follow breaker reclose attempt 79 Lead Lockout The time equals time from 79 Initiate event to 79 Lead Lockout event approx TP 1 0s L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 21 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example E Relay 4000 Control Panel Events File Edit View Help 2010Aug03 2 19 03 not 79 Lockout PL6 Low 2010Aug03 7 19 03 79 3Ph Lead lockout 2010Aug03 2 19 02 Spare 4 0UT4 Open 2010Aug03 PLOT OZS Spare 3 0UT3 Open 2010Aug03 2 19 02 52 l1Trip PL1 Low 2010Aug03 1191 02 52 2 Trip PL3 Low 2010Aug03 2 19 02 52 1 52 2 Trip amp 79 VI5 Low 2010Aug03 2 19 02 52 1 a status PL2
397. s into the non direc tional mode 50 51 67 Phase Phase Overcurrent provides backup protection to the line The user can define Overcurrent directional or non directional control on either 50 or 51 functions Device 51 provides 3 IEC inverse time curve types 3 IEEE inverse time types of overcurrent protection and one user defined curve The equation and the pa rameters of Device 50 51 67 are listed below Table 4 22 IEC and IEEE Curves No Curve Type A B p TR 1 IEC Standard Inverse 0 14 0 00 0 02 13 5 2 IEC Very Inverse 13 50 0 00 1 00 47 3 3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80 00 0 00 2 00 80 4 40 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 22 IEC and IEEE Curves 4 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0 0103 0 0228 0 02 0 97 5 IEEE Very Inverse 3 922 0 0982 2 00 4 32 6 IEEE Extremely Inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 00 5 82 7 User defined 0 001 1000 0 0 10 0 0 01 10 0 0 1 100 The equation of Devices 50 51 67 is given in Equation 3 and 4 below The various parameters are defined in Table 4 23 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent Set tings on page 42 For gt pickup 5 T 1 TMS B A I ip Pickup For lt pickup 6 T 1 TMS IR I di Pickup D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 41 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 42 Table 4 23 50 51 67 Phase Overcurrent Settings 50 Enable Disable
398. scribes the details Help Help Topics About L PRO Settings File Edit window Help New Save Copy Undo Copy About Setting _ I Open Cut Paste Copy Group Print Show or Hide Graph Left Hand Side Tree Figure 6 2 Top Tool Bar Table 6 1 Windows Menu Windows Menu Sub Menu Comment Document Restore Restores active window to previous Menu Icon size Move Allows user to move active window Size Allows user to resize active window Minimize Makes the active window as small as possible Maximize Makes the active window as large as possible Close Closes the active Offliner setting docu ment Next Switches to the next open Offliner set ting file if more than setting file is being edited 6 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 1 Windows Menu File Menu New Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version Open Open an existing setting file Close Closes the active Offliner setting docu ment Save Saves the active setting file Save As Saves the active setting file with a new name or location Convert to Newer Convert an older setting version to a newer version Print Prints graphs or setting summary depending on active screen Print Preview Provides a print preview of the setting summary Print Setup Changes printers or print options 1 6 Th
399. settings for the negative sequence voltage sensitivity and negative se quence current sensitivity should be normally higher than the maximum nega tive sequence quantities generated by unbalanced load These settings should also be low enough to maintain sensitivity for the minimum unbalanced fault in terms of negative sequence quantities The zero sequence directional element can be used in many applications How ever where strong mutual coupling between parallel lines exist the zero se quence calculation must be disabled to prevent an incorrect directional determination The sensitivity settings should be low enough to permit opera tion during the lowest expected ground fault in terms of zero sequence quanti ties expected during a fault and high enough to allow for normal load imbalance Table 4 3 Directional Element Settings Override Enabled Enable Disable Negative Sequence Enable Disable V2 Sensitivity Level V secondary 0 5 to 5 0 I2 Sensitivity Level A secondary 0 1 to 1 0 5 A 0 02 to 0 20 1 A Zero Sequence Enable Disable 3V0 Sensitivity Level V secondary 1 0 to 10 0 310 Sensitivity Level A secondary 0 2 to 2 0 5A 0 04 to 0 40 1 A The phase selector algorithm for the relay ensures that 21N only trips on single phase to ground fault so as to prevent 21N from false tripping for phase to phase to ground faults with arc resistance e Supervise 21P for low Source Impedance R
400. sient Compensation on Disabled All 21 Devices Current Input 3 CT Ratio 400 00 1 For Mutual Com 1 00 to pensation Recording 10000 00 amp ProLogic Input Current Input 4 CT Ratio 500 00 1 For Mutual Com 1 00 to pensation Recording 10000 00 amp ProLogic Input Main PT Turns Ratio 2000 00 11 Protection amp 1 00 to Recording 20000 00 Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 2000 00 11 Protection amp 1 00 to Recording 20000 00 Line to Line Voltage 230 00 V Pri 1 00 to 2000 00 Distance Unit Selection km Record Length Fault Record Length 0 5 s 0 2 to 10 0 Prefault Time 0 20 s 0 10 to 0 40 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Swing Rcd Length 120 s 60 to 120 Event Auto Save Disabled Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group Comments Default settings Line Parameters Line Length 100 00 km 0 50 to 2000 00 Positive Sequence Impedance 10 00 ohm 0 01 to 66 00 Z1 Positive Sequence Angle Z1 80 0 deg 5 0 to 89 0 Zero Sequence Impedance Z0 30 00 ohm 0 01 to 300 00 Zero Sequence Angle Z0 80 0 deg 5 0 to 89 0 Series Compensation Disabled Compensation 40 0 0 0 to 70 0 KO Override Disabled KO Magnitude 0 67 0 00 to 10 00 KO Angle 0 0 deg 180 0 to 180 0 KM1 Mutual Line 1 Disabled KM1 Magnitude 1 00 0 10 to 2 00 KM1 Angle
401. ss RPSB Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Op ACT_1_Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 25 Appendix N 26 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node RPSB2 Description Power swing detection blocking LN Class RPSB Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start BlkZn SPS_1_Proxy Blocking of correlated PDIS zone Logical Node PSCH1 Description Protection scheme LN Class PSCH Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate ProTX SPS_1_Proxy Teleprotection signal transmitted ProRx SPS_1_Proxy Teleprotection signal transmitted Str ACD_5 Str Carrier Send Op ACT_1_Op Operate WeiOp ACT_1_Op Operate signal from weak end infeed function L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Logical Node PSCH2 Description Protection scheme LN Class PSCH Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate ProTX SPS_1_Proxy Teleprotection signal transmitted
402. stance Scheme phase A voltage angle DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase B fault voltage magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f Distance Scheme phase B fault voltage angle DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase C fault voltage magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f Distance Scheme phase C fault voltage angle DSCHMMXU11 MX A phsA cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase A fault current magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MX A phsA cVal ang f Distance Scheme phase A fault current angle DSCHMMXU11 MX A phsB cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase B fault current magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MX A phsB cVal ang f Distance Scheme phase B fault current angle DSCHMMXU11 MX A phsC cVal mag f Distance Scheme phase C fault current magnitude DSCHMMXU11 MxX A phsC cVal ang f D59MMMXU12 Distance Scheme phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59MMMXU12 Data Name Description D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 1 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 1 Main phase A voltage angle D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 1 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 59 1 Main phase B fault voltage angle D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 59 1 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude D59MMMXU12 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 59 1 Main phase C
403. t Fault Location Event Function Code 3 address 40517 Identifies fault location events These events are identi fied by FL in this register Non fault location events contain in this location Read Event Message Function Code 3 addresses 40518 40570 Contains the current message Two ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register All unused registers in the set are set to 0 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 9 Fault Information Type Accessing L PRO Event Information Function Code 3 address 40571 If the current event is a fault location event this register contains the type of fault The following type bitmap 0x0001 Phase A 0x0002 Phase B 0x0004 Phase C 0x0008 Ground Any number of the flags may be set for a given fault If the relay could not determine the fault type then the register will not have any flags set and will read 0x0000 Fault Information Fault Dis tance Function Code 3 address 40572 If the current event is a fault location event this register contains the distance to the fault It is scaled up by a factor of 10 The units are the same as the units set in the relay configuration Fault Information Time of Fault Function Code 3 addresses 40573 to 40576 If the current event is a fault location event these registers contain the time of the fault in seconds since 1970 Each of these 16 bit
404. t 4 79 Aux Reclose mi Input B VI3 52 2 Close 52 CS Input C PL 3 52 2 Trip X Input D PL 3 52 2 Trip Figure L 25 ProLogic 4 52 2 a Status D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 13 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Testi ng the 79 1 Apply the previous settings to the relay Recloser 2 Set PL9 to ProLogic 9 TP Start F Enabled Name TP Start Pickup Delay 000 g Drop Daye 0 00 Target Enabled BEET oonan Reose E o E pt lt Urused 0 gt neat sUnused 0 gt This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure L 26 ProLogic 9 TP Start 3 Set PL10 to ProLogic 10 TP End F Enabled Name TP End Pickup Detay 0 00 s Dropout Delay 0 00 5 IV Target Enabled Input A 79 3Ph Main Reclose v RE l out Input B 79 3Ph Aux Reclose oi Input C lt Unused 0 gt Input D lt Unused 0 gt input lt Unused 0 gt x This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure L 27 ProLogic 10 TP End Appendix L 14 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example 4 Set PL6 to used for monitoring purposes ProLogic 6 not 79 Lockout Name not 79 Lockout AND Pickup Delay l 0 00 5 Dropout Delay 000 s J Target Enabled Input 4 79 Lead Lockout 7 Inpu
405. t B 79 Follow Lockout Figure L 28 ProLogic 6 not 79 Lockout Out 5 Clear the event log 6 Check the metering screen for ProLogic 52 1 and 52 2 should be low Relay 4000 Control Panel Metering Eile Help 52 1 Trip Low 52 1 a status 52 2 Trip Low 52 2 a Status Low ProLogic 5 Low not 79 Lockout High ProLogic 7 low ProLogic 8 low TP Start Low TP End High ProLogic 11 Low ProLogic 12 Low ProLogic 13 low ProLogic 14 low ProLogic 15 Low ProLogic 16 tow ProLogic 17 low ProLogic 18 Low ProLogic 19 low ProLogic 20 low ProLogic 21 low ProLogic 22 Low ProLogic 23 tow ProLogic 24 low Metering O Zoom Level fioo Freeze Close Main Menu Config Mgr Metering Events Relay 4000 Control Panel Current IED L43 Connected Z Figure L 29 ProLogic status for 52 1 and 52 2 are low D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 15 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example Appendix L 16 ferd Relay Control Panel Metering File Help 21P Zone 1 Trip 21P Zone 4 Trip 50 Trip 21N Zone 3 Trip 68 Power Swing 50N Trip SOTF 60 Alarm 21P Zone 4 Alarm 21N Zone 3 Alarm 51 Alarm Self Check Fail Outer Blinder Alarm 27 Aux UNV 50LS Main 50BF 1 Main Trip 50BF 2 Aux Trip 79 3Ph Lead lockout 79 1PhA Main Reclose 79 1PhB Aux Reclose 79 1Ph Lead Lockout 79 1Ph Block Multiple 3Ph Faults DEF Scheme Send
406. t data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the L PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary 4 When a fault location event is available Binary Input Fault Information Avail able default point index 39 is asserted while there are still fault location events in the buffer size 100 When a Pulse or Latch is received for the Binary Output Get Next Fault Event default point index 44 previous state is not important NOTES fault event information is put into the Analog Inputs If there is no fault location event available when the Binary Output is pulsed the fault type is set to zero Not all fault location events are reported trough DNP In a burst of fault locations from a fault only the first processed event is available through DNP all other events within the following 100 ms interval are ignored Outside 100 ms from the processed fault location event the system accepts another fault location event and performs the same filtering In addition only fault location events generated by trip elements are available The following bitmap id used for the fault information Type points 0x0001 Phase A 0x0002 Phase B 0x0004 Phase C 0x0008 Ground Transmitted Value Scaling pE oe Multipli Resolution Name pare o Minimum Maximum default range Offset Units def
407. t re turned through either of the octet string objects Event Message FL2000Sep21 20 16 16 966 21P1 AB 1 0km Trip DNP Octet string object components 0x46 0x4C 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x53 0x65 0x70 0x32 0x31 0x20 0x32 0x30 0x3A 0x31 0x36 0x3A 0x31 0x36 0x2E 0x39 0x36 0x36 0x20 0x32 0x31 0x50 0x31 0x20 0x41 0x42 0x20 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x6B 0x6D 0x3A 0x20 0x54 0x72 0x69 0x70 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 29 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Implementation Table The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia tions function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re sponses The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a Master or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation The Response col umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master or all responses that may be sent by an Outstation NOTE The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro cedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by highlighted rows Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough note these Object Groups will still be parsed
408. t serial link the baud rates for a modem link do not have to be the same on the computer and on the relay The modems automatically nego tiate an optimal baud rate for their communication The baud rate set on the relay only affects the rate at which the relay commu nicates with the modem Similarly the baud rate set in HyperTerminal only af fects the rate at which the computer communicates with its modem Details on how to set these respective baud rates are described above except that the user modifies the Port 123 baud rate on the relay and the properties of the modem in HyperTerminal L PRO 4000 User Manual 2 13 2 Setup and Communications 2 12 Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services Protocol Selection Communication Parameters Diagnostics 2 14 The relay supports DNP3 Level 2 and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan dard feature on all ERLPhase relays DNP3 is available through a direct serial link or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols The Modbus implementation supports both Remote Terminal Unit RTU binary or ASCII modes and is available through a direct serial link The relay s Port 122 is dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 serial proto cols Port 122 uses standard RS 232 signalling An external RS 232 lt gt RS 485 converter can also be used to connect to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see Communicating with the Re lay Intelligent Electronic Device IED
409. t the back of the printed version of this manual 6 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 6 Main Branches from the Tree View This section will describe the tree view which provides access to the various setting screens This section will not describe individual settings but will pro vide a general description of where to find the individual settings For a de tailed description of the individual settings see Chapter 4 RHS Information relating to specific menu Item LHS Menu Tree accessed by LHS menu or top tabs ales EK Relay Identification ar Peter tothe serisi number Serial haber LP 0 ON the back of the relay Ura Un Nominal CT Sec Currert 5 a System Frequency rex Standard O fe seesaw Options UO Not net Nominal CT Sec Current set to either 1Aor5A Nominal System Frequency set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Unique relay serial number Figure 6 5 Relay Identification In the LHS Menu Tree there are a series of menu headings that may have sub menus associated with them Clicking on an item in the left hand side tree view will display its corresponding menu in the RHS view Similarly the user can use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu tree The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file or the setting will be rejected by the relay This feature ensures that the correct setting file is appl
410. t to unknown D21P3PDIS3 ST Op general 21P3 Trip D21P3PDIS3 ST Op phsA 21P3 Trip phase A D21P3PDIS3 ST Op phsB 21P3 Trip phase B D21P3PDIS3 ST Op phsC 21P3 Trip phase C D21P3PDIS3 ST Op neut 21P3 Trip neutral D21P4PDIS4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P4PDIS4 Data Name Description D21P4PDIS4 ST Str general 21P4 Trip D21P4PDIS4 ST Str dirGeneral 21P4 Direction set to unknown D21P4PDIS4 ST Op general 21P4 Trip D21P4PDIS4 ST Op phsA 21P4 Trip phase A D21P4PDIS4 ST Op phsB 21P4 Trip phase B D21P4PDIS4 ST Op phsC 21P4 Trip phase C D21P4PDIS4 ST Op neut 21P4 Trip neutral L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 85 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation D21P5PDIS5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P5PDISS Data Name Description D21P5PDIS5 ST Str general 21P5 Trip D21P5PDIS5 ST Str dirGeneral 21P5 Direction set to unknown D21P5PDIS5 ST Op general 21P5 Trip D21P5PDIS5 ST Op phsA 21P5 Trip phase A D21P5PDIS5 ST Op phsB 21P5 Trip phase B D21P5PDIS5 ST Op phsC 21P5 Trip phase C D21P5PDIS5 ST Op neut 21P5 Trip neutral LodEncPDIS6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node LodEncPDIS6 Data Name Description LodEncPDIS6 ST Str general Load Encroachment Block LodEncPDIS6 ST Str dirGeneral Load Encroachment Block Directio
411. t to either forward directional or non directional when selecting the action ProLogic Only If the pickup delay setting Tp lt 9 ms then 9 ms will be used for the delay Otherwise Tp will be used for the delay This change is always applied regard less of the direction setting Non dir FWD REV and the 349 pickup level Note If the directional element cannot determine a valid direction the direc tion is set to forward the 50N 67F may operate and the SON 67R element is blocked See Directional Element on page 4 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual 4 51 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Basic Logic The basic selection does not provide any communication aided logic for local or remote protections Figure 4 29 Communication aided Scheme 4 52 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 POTT Logic D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The POTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over reaches the remote end for forward fault conditions for details see Figure 4 29 Com munication aided Scheme on page 4 52 The local end sends a permissive trip signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements operates The scheme send signal permissive transfer trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL3 The local end does not produce a scheme trip output unless the re
412. t used 40298 Not used 40299 Not used 40300 Not used 40301 Not used 40302 Not used 40303 Not used 40304 Frequency 40305 Hz 100 P 40306 MW 10 Q 40307 Mvar 10 Voltage V1 40308 kV 10 Current 11 40309 A 1 Active Setting Group Number 40310 la summated Magnitude 40311 A 1 la summated Angle 40312 Degrees 10 Ib summated Magnitude 40313 A 1 Ib summated Angle 40314 Degrees 10 Ic summated Magnitude 40315 A 1 Ic summated Angle 40316 Degrees 10 Self Check Fail 40317 N A 1 S 40318 MVA 10 Power Factor 40319 NA 100 Voltage V2 40320 kV 10 Voltage V0 40321 kV 10 Current 12 40322 A 1 Current 10 40323 A 1 Pa 40324 MW 10 Pb 40325 MW 10 D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 7 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Channel Address Units Scale Pc 40326 MW 10 Qa 40327 Mvar 10 Qb 40328 Mvar 10 Qc 40329 Mvar 10 Sa 40330 MVA 10 Sb 40331 MVA 10 Sc 40332 MVA 10 Power Factor a 40333 NA 100 Power Factor b 40334 NA 100 Power Factor c 40335 NA 100 Read Input Register Function Code 04 No input registers supported Response from IED indicates ILLEGAL FUNCTION Force Single Coil Function Code 05 Only the hold readings coil can be forced When active this coil locks all coil input and holding register readings simultaneously at their present values When inactive coil input and holding register values will read their most rec
413. table from i for Analog Outputs Configurable other describe group 41 Variable explain 1 5 7 Maximum number of Fixed at __ Data Sets not objects allowed in a Configurable range to supported single control request Configurable selectable from for Data Sets groups Configurable other describe 85 86 87 Variable explain 1 5 8 Supports mixing object Not applicable controls are not supported Analog Outputs groups AOBs CROBs Yes not supported and Data Sets in the BK No same control request Appendix F 8 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 6 Fill Out The Following If configurable Settings preserved through a device reset Analog Deadbands Data Set Prototypes Data Set Descriptors Items For Outstations Capabilities Current Value z list methods Only 1 6 1 Timeout waiting for None 5 000 ms Application Confirm of Fixed at 5 000 ms solicited response Configurable range to ms message Configurable selectable from __ __ _ ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 2 How often is time BK Never needs time synchronization Within seconds after IIN1 4 is set required from the Periodically every seconds master 1 6 3 Device Trouble Bit Never used IIN1 6 Reason for setting Unable to access requested data or execute CROB assuming a valid request has been received 1 6 4 File Handle Timeout 1 Not applicable files not supported Fi
414. tacts 1 5 P parameters line 6 21 system 6 14 physical mounting 8 1 POTT logic L 24 power supply 2 1 ProLogic 6 26 protection functions 4 1 6 26 graphing 6 26 PT turns ratio 6 15 PUTT logic 4 55 PUTT scheme 6 25 Index R recloser L 9 record duration and extension 4 56 4 57 initiation 4 56 length 6 19 storage retrieval and analysis 4 57 RecordBase View software 6 8 recording 4 55 swing 4 56 Relay functional 3 1 3 2 S SCADA accessing 2 14 communication parameters 2 14 diagnostics 2 14 protocol selection 2 14 scheme selector 6 23 Service 3 2 setting group change 7 32 setting groups 6 14 6 20 L 2 start up 3 1 Switch On To Fault SOTF 4 21 system parameters 6 14 system requirements vi xiii hardware vi xiii operating system vi xiii T Test mode 3 1 3 2 testing 21N2 ground distance 7 22 21P1 phase distance 7 14 21P2 phase distanc 7 16 25 27 59 sync check 7 48 27 undervoltage 7 33 46 50 46 51 negative sequence overcurrent 7 40 50 51 phase overcurrent 7 37 50BF breaker fail 7 42 50LS low set overcurrent 7 42 50N 51N neutral overcurrent 7 35 59 overvoltage 7 34 60 loss of potential 7 12 79 recloser 7 50 81 overfrequency 7 45 81 underfrequency 7 45 dead line pickup 7 27 directional element 7 42 external inputs 7 3 output relay contacts 7 3 weak infeed 7 25 tool bar 6 2 V version descriptions v xi L PRO 4000 User Manual view settings 6 29 virtual inputs 6 13 L 11 W weak infeed 4 23 w
415. tails D02706R02 50 Location Port Table 2 4 Communication Port Details Function Front Panel 119 RJ 45 receptacle 1OOBASE T Ethernet interface Default IP 192 168 100 80 Used for user interface access or SCADA access through Ether net LAN Front Panel 150 USB B receptacle High speed USB 2 0 interface Used for user interface access Default fixed baud rate 115 200 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Rear Panel 118 RJ 11 receptacle Internal modem interface Default Baud rate 38 400 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Rear Panel 119 Rear panel RJ 45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle fac tory configured 1OOBASE T or 100BASE FX 1300nm multi mode Ethernet interface Same subnet as front panel port 119 Used for user interface access or IEC61850 DNP SCADA access through Ethernet LAN Rear Panel 120 Rear panel RJ 45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle fac tory configured 100BASE T or 100BASE FX 1300 nm multi mode Ethernet interface Same subnet as front panel port 119 Used for user interface access or IEC61850 DNP SCADA access through Ethernet LAN Rear Panel 121 BNC receptacle IRIG B Interface Modulated or un modulated 330 ohm impedance Rear Panel 122 RS 232 DCE female DB9 Used for SCADA communication Default Setting 19 200 baud O71 odd parity 7 data bits 1 stop Rear Panel 123 RS 2
416. tamp YES M7 3 Reason for inclusion YES M7 4 Data set name YES M7 5 Data reference YES M7 6 Buffer overflow YES M7 7 Entry id YES M7 8 Buf Tm YES M7 9 IntgPd YES M7 10 GI YES M8 Unbuffered report control O YES M8 1 Sequence number YES M8 2 Report time stamp YES M8 3 Reason for inclusion YES M8 4 Data set name YES M8 5 Data reference YES M8 6 IntgPd YES M8 7 Gl YES Logging O NO Appendix N 2 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Table N 2 ACSI models Conformance Statement M9 Log control O NO M9 1 IntgPd NO M10 Log O NO M11 Control M NO If GSE B31 B32 is supported M12 1 EntrylD M12 2 DataRefinc ACSI service conformance statement The ASCI service conformance statement shall be as defined in Table N 3 ACSI service Conformance Statement Table N 3 ACSI service Conformance Statement Services AA Server Remarks TP MC Publisher Server Clause 6 S1 ServerDirectory TP M YES Table N 4 Application association Clause 7 S2 Associate M YES S3 Abort M YES S4 Release M YES Table N 5 Logical device Clause 8 S5 Logical Device Directory TP M YES D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 3 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 4 Table N 6 Logical Node Clause 9
417. tatements are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following excep tions the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the pro cessing is in a slower half second cycle Group Logic inputs statements are driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic statements Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs with Boolean statements one latch state and one pickup delay timer The Active Setting Group ASG is viewed from the Terminal Mode the front panel or from a record stored by the relay the ASG is stored with the record Group Logic Processing The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the relay protection algorithms The processing cycle happens once every half sec ond 0 5 second When using ProLogic statements remember that a latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0 5 seconds In the example following we will create a definite pulse length using ProLogic for details see L PRO Setting Example in Appendix L Default Setting Group The relay uses Setting Group 1 as the factory default setting group and retains the current active setting group in memory This allows the relay to use the last active setting group prior to interruption of relay power as the default setting group following power up Change Active Group The user can at any time change the active setting group When i
418. te time delay timer The user can set this function to be an AND or OR logic The auxiliary undervoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main undervoltage function except that it uses the voltages from the auxiliary PT in puts Gate Switch Setting 27 Va Main 27 Vb Main 27 Vc Main rl Figure 4 17 27 Undervoltage 60 Loss of Potential LOP 27 Via 0 75 pu fred 27 Vib 0 75 pu hed 27 Vic 0 75 pu bed BVia 0 pued Bib 0 1 puted 5BVic 0 1 pubad Apa gt Mode dAposd lt Moyde ASS dinosit gt 0 1Aoyde negative Seq Monitoring V2 gt Vnps 50 pos 5930 12 lt inps DLAK I romina ILB 4 rome SOILC 4 nominal Figure 4 18 Loss of Potential Logic The relay distance elements 21P and 21N are supervised by both instanta neous non directional overcurrent and the loss of potential LOP logic to pre 4 32 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications vent false trip due to the loss of potential where the phase distance elements are supervised by the delta current i e Ia Ib Ib Ic and Ic Ia and the ground distance elements are supervised by both the phase current and the zero se quence 3 9 current The loss of potential LOP function uses rate of change values for the positive sequence voltage and current signal along with voltage and current supervision to detect loss of potential conditions This functi
419. tem System Domain Records Records Domain Virtuallnputs Virtual Inputs Domain IEC 61850 Logical Devices Data Model The IEC 61850 Logical Devices top level data model consists of instances of Logical Nodes The data model name for a Logical Node instance is construct ed from an optional prefix known as the wrapper the Logical Node name and an instance ID or suffix LD LN Instance LN Type Description LD LN Instance LN Type Description Protection D21P1PDIS1 PDIS1 Distance Protection D21P2PDIS2 PDIS1 Distance Protection D21P3PDIS3 PDIS1 Distance Protection D21P4PDIS4 PDIS1 Distance Protection D21P5PDIS5 PDIS1 Distance Protection LodEncPDIS6 PDIS3 Distance Protection D21N1PDIS7 PDIS2 Distance Protection D21N2PDIS8 PDIS2 Distance Protection D21N3PDIS9 PDIS2 Distance Protection D21N4PDIS10 PDIS2 Distance Protection D21N5PDIS11 PDIS2 Distance Protection D2527RSYN1 RSYN1 Synchronism check Protection D27MnPTUV1 PTUV1 Undervoltage Protection D27AuxPTUV2 PTUV1 Undervoltage Protection D50BF1RBRF1 RBRF1 Breaker failure Protection D50BF2RBRF2 RBRF1 Breaker failure Protection D50BF3RBRF3 RBRF1 Breaker failure Protection D50BF4RBRF4 RBRF1 Breaker failure Protection CBFIRBRF5 RBRF1 Breaker failure Protection D50LS1PIOC1 PIOC1 Instantaneous overcurrent Protection D50LS2PIOC2 PIOC1 Instantaneous overcurrent D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual App
420. ternal Input 1 and Auxiliary Breaker Status is monitored by External Input 2 Output 7 is used to simulate a protection operation It supplies a trip command via External Input 3 and initiates the 79 operation Connect a 125 Vdc supply to the relay output and input terminals as shown for details see Figure 7 33 Test Connections for 4 Shot Recloser Test on page 7 51 7 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 214 OUT 6 52a OUT 7 Trip OUT 5 52a 215 104 El3 Trip and 79 Initiate El2 Aux Breaker Status El1 Main Breaker Status 101 103 105 Figure 7 33 Test Connections for 4 Shot Recloser Test ProLogic equations are used to activate and supervise the 79 test functions Normally each of these ProLogic equations would not be set to target but for this type of acceptance testing it is convenient for seeing operations as they happen Details of ProLogic Equations for this 79 Test Example ProLogic 1 This equation activates the reclose sequence It sets the breaker status closes Out 5 via ProLogic 3 ProLogic 1 Main Bkr Close IV Enabled Name Main Bkr Close AND Pickup Delay 0 00 s fo Ji o 0 Dropout Delay 9 99 s 01 of 1 0 4 1 f IV Target Enabled Out Input YI 2 SCADA Close Bkr 1 4 Input B Not used F 4 Input Input D Not use f Input E Not
421. the following path Relay Control Panel gt Records Also the relay display provides the option to initiate Fault Recording under the following path Main Menu gt Records gt Fault Recording A swing record can take a couple of minutes to produce due to the long post trigger time L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Record Duration and Extension Record Storage Record Retrieval and Deletion D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The length of each record is determined by the Record Length setting Tran sient record lengths can be set between 0 2 and 10 0 seconds swing record lengths can be set between 60 and 120 seconds Pre trigger times are configu rable between 0 10 to 2 00 seconds for transient records and fixed at 30 sec onds for swing records and are included as part of the normal record length The relay automatically extends a record as required to capture consecutive triggers that are close together If a trigger occurs while a recording is in prog ress the record is extended to include the full post trigger time of subsequent triggers up to a maximum length 12 0 seconds for transient records 180 seconds for swing records If a trigger occurs before the end of a record caused by a previous trigger but too late to allow sufficient post trigger time in a max imum extended record a new overlapping record is created The normal record length settings are accessible under the Record Len
422. tion binary input Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 37 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 38 Logical Node GGIO10 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Logical Node GGIO11 Description Generic process I O LN Class GGIO Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Ind1 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind2 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind3 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind4 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind5 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind6 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind7 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind8 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind9 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind10 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind11 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind12 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input Ind13 SPS_1_Proxy General indication binary input L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50
423. tions for example power line carrier The local end sends a block trip signal to the remote end when one of the enabled reverse directional elements operates The scheme send signal block trip send is time delayed by timer setting TL3 the local end is required to sense a reverse fault for durations greater than TL3 If one of the forward directional elements operates the blocking logic does not operate For forward directional fault conditions the DCB logic is time delayed by timer setting TL2 The forward fault condition has to last for durations greater than TL2 The local end does not produce a scheme trip output if the remote has detected a reverse directional fault and sends the similar block trip signal to the local end The lo cal end senses a block trip receive signal and the scheme trip logic is disabled with no intentional delay Current reversal logic guards against incorrect local tripping for installations with parallel lines where one end of the un faulted line is contributing fault current and the other end of the un faulted line is reverse reaching and sending a block trip signal The local forward directional ele ments are supervised by the block receive signal from the remote end to form the blocking logic The blocking logic reset is time delayed by timer setting TD2 the local end is required to receive the remote block trip for durations greater than 0 ms The blocking logic continues to block the scheme trip signals when the blo
424. tions and integrated HV breaker auto recloser ProLogic 24 statements per setting group 5 inputs per ProLogic statement Group Logic 8 16 group logic statements per setting group 5 inputs per group logic statement Recording Transient Fault 96 s c oscillography of all analog and external input channels User configurable 0 2 to 10 0 seconds Record length and 0 1 to 2 seconds prefault length Dynamic Swing 1 s c phasor measurements of line positive sequence V and plus frequency User configurable 60 120 seconds Pre trigger time fixed at 30secs Events 250 events circular log with 1ms resolution When event auto save is enabled a compressed event record is created every 250 events Record Capacity 75 records of a combination of transient swing and optionally event records D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 1 Appendix A IED Specifications Input amp Output L PRO Model 4000 Specifications Analog Voltage Inputs 2 sets of 3 phase voltage inputs 6 voltage channels total Nominal Voltage across input channel Full Scale Continuous Maximum Over scale Thermal Rating Burden Vn 69 Vrms 120 Vrms L L 2x Vn 138 Vrms 240 Vrms L L 4x Vn 276 Vrms 480 Vrms L L for 3 seconds 3x Vn 207 Vrms 360 Vrms L L for 10 seconds lt 0 03VA Vn Analog Current Inputs 4 sets of 3 phase current inputs 12 current channel
425. to 999 9 Close Time Tp 0 2 0 1 to 1 0 Lockout Reset TD 25 0 0 1 to 999 9 Initiate Reset TDI 0 1 0 0 to 999 9 Recloser Mode Main Only Block Reset TDB 0 1 0 0 to 999 9 Follower Time TF 5 0 0 0 to 24 9 Breaker Out of Service TC 50 0 0 0 to 999 9 Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser Follower Time TF 59 Overvoltage 59 1 Main Disabled Gate Switch OR Pickup 70 0 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 0 00 to 10 00 59 2 Main Disabled Gate Switch OR Pickup 70 0 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 0 00 to 10 00 59 1 Aux Disabled Gate Switch OR Pickup 70 0 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 0 00 to 10 00 59 2 Aux Disabled Gate Switch OR Pickup 70 0 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 0 00 to 10 00 59N Zero Sequence OverVoltage 59N Inverse Time Delay Disabled 3V0 Pickup 10 00 5 00 to 150 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 14 B 0 0 p 0 02 TR 13 50 59N Definite Time Delay Disabled L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 13 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 14 Pickup 10 00 Vv 5 00 to 150 00 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 27 Undervoltage 27 Main Disabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 25 0 Vv 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 10 00 27 Auxiliary Disabled Gate Switch AND Pickup 25 0 Vv 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 1
426. to view and manipulate settings Offliner supports all firm ware versions and has the capability to convert older setting versions into new er ones In this section first the Offliner features are presented The menu and toolbar are discussed and this is followed by a description of the Graphing and Protec tion functions Next the Offliner features for handling backward compatibility with previous software versions is described Also described are methods of converting a Set tings File sending a new Settings File to the relay and creating a Settings File from an older version of the software Next the RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a re lay are described This is followed by a lengthy description of the main branches from the Tree View This section provides all information for Identification System Param eters SCADA Communication DNP Configuration SCADA Settings sum mary Record Length Setting Groups ProLogic Group Logic Output Matrix and Settings summary Finally a description of how the settings on the relay can be viewed through the RecordBase View analysis software is provided L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Window Help 8x nsu seele ef N Relay Identification Analog Inputs C External inputs Output Contacts Virtual Inputs I Ignore Serial Number O Setting Groups Serial Number LPRO 4000 000000 or feter tothe serial number System Parameters
427. tput Contact 2 514 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 3 515 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 4 516 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 5 517 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 6 518 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 7 519 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 8 520 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 9 521 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 10 522 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 11 523 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 12 524 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 13 525 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 14 526 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 15 527 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 16 528 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 17 529 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 18 530 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 19 531 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 20 532 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contact 21 533 0 Contact Open inactive
428. tr ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_5_Op Operate Logical Node PIOC3 Description Instantaneous overcurrent LN Class PIOC Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 23 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 24 Logical Node RBRF1 Description Breaker failure LN Class RBRF Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start OpEx ACT_1_Op Breaker Failure Trip external trip Logical Node PTOC1 Description Time overcurrent LN Class PTOC Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_5 Op Operate L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 Logical Node PTOC2 Description Time overcurrent LN Class PTOC Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Attribute Attr Type Explanation T X Mod INC_2_Mod Mode Beh INS_1_Beh Behaviour Health INS_1_Health Health NamPIt LPL_4 NamPIt Name Plate Str ACD_5 Str Start Op ACT_1_Op Operate Logical Node RPSB1 Description Power swing detection blocking LN Cla
429. trix mmary Setting Group 2 Setting Gro Setting Group 3 Setting Gro Setting Group 4 Setting Gro Setting Group 5 Setting Gro Setting Group 6 Setting Gro Setting Group 7 Setting Gro Setting Group 8 Setting Gro L PRO Offliner Figure 6 24 Settings Summary njem e 2 fa Settings Summary Output Matis Name Relay Identification Settings Version lIgnore Serial Number Serial Number Unit ID Setting Name Nominal CT Secondary Current Nominal System Frequency Standard I O Optional 1 0 Comments Date Created Modified Station Name Station Number Location Line Analog Input Hames LVA LYB ILvC ij Settings v404 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Symbol Value Unit Range 404 No LPRO 4000 000000 01 UnitID Default Settings 5A 60 Hz 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts Not Installed Comments 2012 10 29 10 01 03 Station Name 1 Location D245 Main Voltage 4 Main Voltage B Main Voltage C Main Line Current A Main Line Current B Main Line Current C Aux Line Current A Aux Line Current B Aux Line Current C Current 3 A Current 3 B Current 3 C Ciwrart A A Select Settings Summary to view and print the relay settings in text form for details see IED Settings and Ranges in Appendix B L PRO 4000 User Manual 6 29 6 Offliner Se
430. ttings Software 6 7 Settings From a Record 6 30 The settings on the relay at the time of a recording are included in every record and can be viewed through the RecordBase View analysis software While viewing a recording in RecordBase View select the View Setting button to dis play the settings RecordBase View will automatically launch L PRO Offliner to display the settings in summary form If the record contains Setting Groups the Offliner displays all Setting Groups in the summary Bold text in the tree view indicates an active Setting Group the Setting Group used at the time the record was captured The setting sum mary is read only To edit the setting file associated with the summary the user must use File Save As to save the summary to a file Then close the summary screen and open the setting file for editing L PRO Offliner Settings UNITID 2001 10 16_09 27 36 992 Ips E 5 x File Edit Window Help 218 x oleje semla Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 5 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setings Summary Jovwantis Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Name SymboliValue Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Relay Identification Settings Version ce Serial Number LPRO 2100 000915 13 Nominal CT Secondary Current 5A
431. uadri Mho Quadri Mho Quadri Mho Quadri lateral lateral lateral lateral lateral Forward Impedance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Both Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 4 6 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 2 21N Ground Distance Element Settings Forward Reactance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Quadrilateral Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Reverse Impedance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Both Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Reverse Reactance 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 0 00 to 66 00 Quadrilateral Reach Ohms secondary 5A 5A 5A 0 00 to 0 00 to 0 00 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Left Reach R1 Ohms 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05to66 00 Quadrilateral secondary 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 0 25 to 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A 330 00 1A Right Reach R2 Ohms 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05 to 66 00 0 05to66 00 Quadr
432. uence impedance of the line with respect to the line loading If the line loading causes the imped ance to cross the outer Zone an Power Swing timer is started If the impedance does not cross the inner zone before this timer times out the function produces an output either a block or trip whichever is set when the impedance crosses the inner Zone The entire activity is supervised by an overcurrent function to prevent undesired operations for impedances far from the origin The logic has a timeout feature that prevents the blocking function from oper ating for an indefinite amount of time Device 68 functions as either a blocking device or tripping device The 68 Power Swing 68 Trip or 68 Block 68 Inner and 68 Outer Zone logic points are available in the output matrix These logic points are also logged as event messages in the event log Event Messages in Appendix D In addition the outputs from the inner and outer Zones are available for use with ProLogic to create any application scheme required If the user selects Device 68 to block for Power Swing conditions the relay en ergizes the front panel alarm LED when the 68 elements are blocking If the user selects the 68 to trip for Power Swing conditions the relay energizes the front panel target light L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Inner Blinder Alarm Zpos Enable Setting Outer Blinder Alarm mn pes 68 Block Out of Ste ee
433. uence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 V cycle output HIGH will invert into element 10 amp 11 to Block tun ing 10 amp 11 off 4 Detects LOP by checking a negative rate of change of positive sequence voltage below or less than 3 V cycle AND an absolute value of rate of change of posi tive sequence current below or less than 0 1 A cycle 5 If negative sequence monitoring is enabled detect LOP by checking high V2 and low 12 6 Combines logic 4 amp 5 7 When 50lpos or 50310 exceed their set point and go HIGH 1 it will invert and block logic element 8 8 LOP dection AND not have a positive sequence load current 50 Ipos above the setting OR not have 3 times zero sequence fault current 3lo above the setting of 3lo 9 LOP is declared by this logic element logic HIGH when any of the phase cur rents are above 0 2 A 10 Has an output when o p from 1 is HIGH AND o p from logic 12 is HIGH AND NOT logic 3 HIGH Positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 V cycle and not 3 phase voltage greater than 0 1 pu 11 Has an output when o p from 9 is HIGH AND positive sequence rate of change voltage is not greater than 3 V cycle 12 Has an output when o p from 10 is HIGH OR timed o p from logic 8 is HIGH 13 Has a Loss of Potential LOP output when o p from 1 is HIGH AND o p from logic 11 is HIGH AND o p from logic 12 is HIGH The outp
434. ulse width required for the External Inputs to be detected Below is a table describing the pulse widths for possible and definite defection for each setting Pickup Filter Input Pulse Width required for Count El to be possibly detected 4 0 694 ms Input Pulse Width required for El to be definitely detected 1 215 ms 5 0 868 ms 1 563 ms 6 1 042 ms 1 909 ms 7 1 215 ms 2 257 ms 8 1 389 ms 2 604 ms 9 1 563 ms 2 951 ms 10 1 736 ms 3 299 ms 11 1 909 ms 3 645 ms 12 2 083 ms 3 993 ms For a setting of 6 it will take between 1 042 and 1 909 ms for an External Input to be declared as high The default setting is 4 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges B 1 Settings and Ranges The Offliner software provides a means for the user to view and print a com pact summary of the settings defined in each Setting Group for a given device The user can view the summary by selecting the Settings Summary option last D02706R02 50 item under each Setting Group listed in the Offliner application The summary includes general data from the Relay Identification screen as well as all the user defined names of inputs e g current voltage virtual and control outputs and Group Logic definitions It also includes all the user de fined settings along with their respective units and permissible value range The following pages illustrate the Settings Summary for Settings Gro
435. ult current magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsB cVal ang f 21N3 phase B fault current angle D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21N3 phase C fault current magnitude D21N3MMXU16 MX A phsC cVal ang f D21IN4MMXU17 21N3 phase C fault current angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21 N4MMXUI17 Data Name Description D21N4MMXU17 MX Hz mag f 21N4 fault frequency D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 21N4 phase A fault voltage magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 21N4 phase A voltage angle D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 21N4 phase B fault voltage magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 21N4 phase B fault voltage angle D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 21N4 phase C fault voltage magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 21N4 phase C fault voltage angle D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsA cVal mag f 21N4 phase A fault current magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsA cVal ang f 21N4 phase A fault current angle D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsB cVal mag f 21N4 phase B fault current magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsB cVal ang f L PRO 4000 User Manual 21N4 phase B fault current angle Appendix N 71 Appendix N IEC61850 Implementation Appendix N 72 D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsC cVal mag f 21N4 phase C fault current magnitude D21N4MMXU17 MX A phsC cVal ang f D5067MMXU18 This section defines logical node data
436. und indicator G is put in the 21P event messages e g 21P Trip ABG 123 1 km Series Capacitor on 21 Devices When a series capacitor is added to a transmission line performance of 21 de vices can be affected significantly due to the effects such as sub harmonics voltage inversion and current inversions Series capacitor algorithm provides enhanced performances against the effect of series capacitors The algorithm consists of two parts namely 1 sub harmonic removal filter and ii modified directional function The sub harmonic removal filter is a 5th order Infinite Impulse Response IIR filter Upon enabling the series capacitor option sub harmonic removal filter will be activated Based on compensation factor settings i e if compensation factor gt 0 direc tional function will be enabled When the series capacitor is located at the end of the line a compensation factor greater than zero should be used In this case voltage is measured from the line side PTs CVTs Reverse side voltage esti mated using line side voltage and phase currents is used to determine the di rectionality When the series capacitor is located at the far end of the line or middle of the line the compensation factor setting should be set to zero L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 6 Series Capacitor Settings Example Settings End A Settings End B Series capacitor
437. up 1 L PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Name Symbol Value Unit Range Relay Identification Settings Version 407 Ignore Serial Number No Serial Number LPRO 4000 000000 01 Unit ID UnitID Setting Name Default Settings Nominal CT Secondary Current 5A Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz Standard I O 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts Optional I O Not Installed Network Card Installed Comments Comments Date Created Modified 2014 12 12 15 26 16 Station Name Station Name Station Number 1 Location Location Line D245 Analog Input Names LVA Main Voltage A LVB Main Voltage B LVC Main Voltage C LIA Main Line Current A L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 1 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 2 LIB Main Line Current B LIC Main Line Current C 1A2 Aux Line Current A IB2 Aux Line Current B IC2 Aux Line Current C IA3 Current 3 A IB3 Current 3 B IC3 Current 3 C 1A4 Current 4 A IB4 Current 4 B IC4 Current 4 C BVA Aux Voltage A BVB Aux Voltage B BVC Aux Voltage C External Input Names 1 El Spare 1 2 El Spare 2 3 El Spare 3 4 El Spare 4 5 El Spare 5 6 El Spare 6 F El Spare 7 8 El Spare 8 9 El Spare 9
438. using an ohmmeter When ex iting this sub menu each contact status reverts to the open position L PRO 4000 User Manual 7 3 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 3 L PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline Devices to Test 7 4 60 AC Loss of Potential 21P Phase to Phase Impedance 21N Phase to Neutral Impedance Load Encroachment Weak Infeed Switch On To Fault 68 Power Swing 27 Undervoltage 59 Overvoltage 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent 50 51 Phase Overcurrent 46 50 46 51 Negative Sequence Overcurrent SOLS Low Set Definite Time Overcurrent 50BF Breaker Fail Example of Inputs 3 and 4 being used for Breaker Fail 81 Over Under Rate of Change of Frequency 25C Syne Check 79 Recloser 79 1 3 single pole trip device number L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Download Acceptance Test File D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 1 Browse to find the following Offliner Setting file LPROaccTestsetting60hz in C Program Files ERLPhase LPRO Offlin er Settings 2 Double click the Setting file to open Enter the serial number of the relay being tested or check Ignore Serial Number checkbox 3 Select File on the menu bar then select Convert to Newer under its sub menu select version 404 L PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 al al File Edit Window Help ET osm sxe ees fl Identification O System Parameters O SCADA Communication Relay Identification
439. ut mpte 6414905 Locairenote z Figure L 8 Group Logic 15 El 1 low El 2 high and El 3 low Group Logic 14 Go to Group 3 M Enabled Name Go to Group 3 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 3 Setting Group 3 7 Pickup Delay 5 seconds ojojo lalolo Input A El 1 Selector 1 X Input B El 2 Selector 2 X Input C El 3 Selector 3 E Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Out Input E El 4 43CS LocalRemote Figure L 9 Group Logic 14 El 1 high El 2 high and El 3 low Group Logic 13 Go to Group 4 V Enabled Name Go to Group 4 Setting Group to Activate SG 4 Setting Group 4 had Pickup Delay 0 seconds Input A El 1 Selector 1 d Input B El 2 Selector 2 Sal Input EI 3 Selector 3 X Input D PL 8 Black Group Logic D gt Out Input E El 4 43CS LocalRemote joj o ojojo Figure L 10 Group Logic 13 Appendix L 6 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix L L PRO Setting Example EI 1 low El 2 low and El 3 high Group Logic 12 Go to Group 5 V Enabled atin Go to Group 5 AND Setting Group to Activate SG 5 Setting Group 5 td j0 0 Pickup Delay 5 seconds onn 0 1 0 0 1 1 4 Inputa f E11 Selector f Input B El 2 Selector 2 7 Input C l EI 3 Selector 3 Input D PL 8 Block Group Logic Input E E14 43CS L
440. ut 3 1 Inactive Active 3 External Input 4 1 Inactive Active 4 External Input 5 1 Inactive Active 5 External Input 6 1 Inactive Active 6 External Input 7 1 Inactive Active 7 External Input 8 1 Inactive Active 8 External Input 9 1 Inactive Active 9 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active 10 Virtual Input 2 1 Inactive Active 11 Virtual Input 3 1 Inactive Active 12 Virtual Input 4 1 Inactive Active 13 Virtual Input 5 1 Inactive Active 14 Virtual Input 6 1 Inactive Active 15 Virtual Input 7 1 Inactive Active 16 Virtual Input 8 1 Inactive Active 17 Virtual Input 9 1 Inactive Active 18 Virtual Input 10 1 Inactive Active 19 Virtual Input 11 1 Inactive Active 20 Virtual Input 12 1 Inactive Active 21 Virtual Input 13 1 Inactive Active 22 Virtual Input 14 1 Inactive Active 23 Virtual Input 15 1 Inactive Active 24 Virtual Input 16 1 Inactive Active 25 Virtual Input 17 1 Inactive Active 26 Virtual Input 18 1 Inactive Active 27 Virtual Input 19 1 Inactive Active 28 Virtual Input 20 1 Inactive Active 29 Virtual Input 21 1 Inactive Active 30 Virtual Input 22 1 Inactive Active 31 Virtual Input 23 1 Inactive Active D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 13 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 32 Virtual Input 24 Inactive Active 33 Virtual Input 25 Inactive Active 34 Virtual Input 26 Inactive Active 35 Vi
441. ut 5 x DNP Configuration 1 2 External Input 6 12 ___ External Input 7 12 External mas gs SCADA Settings Summary 5 External input 3 Record Length 1 2 Virtual Input 4 jake Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 1 21 Virtual Input 2 C Line Parameters 4 2 Virtual Input 3 mx O Scheme Selector A Virtual Input 4 C Breaker Status 1 21 Virtual Input 5 E al Directional Element 1 2 Virtual Input 6 Protection Functions 1 2 Virtual Input pee O Z Circle Trigger 1 2 Virtual Input 8 x 4 0 ProLogic 1 2 Virtualno XXO _ Group Logic 4 2 Virtual Input 10 x C Output Matrix 1 21 Virtual input 1 XXO O Settings Summary 1 2 Virtual Input 12 x Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 1 2 Virtual input13 X C Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 1 2 Virtual Input 14 x Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Da2 Va K O _ Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Maaz Virtual Input 16 x C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 14 2 Virtual input17 O OoOO Figure 6 13 Point Map The relay has configurable DNP point mapping On the Point Map screen any of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point List by clicking or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard on the asso ciated check box A green X denotes that the item will be mapped to the Point List The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs Binary Outputs and An alog Inputs The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side
442. ut is timed on drop out This output is sent to other elements of the relay to give indication and block voltage elements such as impedance from tripping falsely from loss of potential condition 4 34 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 60 CT Supervision 81 Frequency D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The relay provides CT secondary circuit supervision function for both main and auxiliary CT s The element operates on presence of negative sequence current Inps on main CT above the set vale and the absence of negative se quence voltage Vnps below the set value line PT principle The auxiliary CT Supervision function operates exactly the same way as the main CT Supervision function except that it uses the Inps current from the aux iliary CT in puts Main CT Supervision Enabled Main CT Inps gt Pickup Main PT Vnps lt Pickup Figure 4 19 60 CT Supervision Table 4 18 60 CT Supervision Settings Main Enable Disable Inps Pickup 0 25 to 5 00 A secondary 5A 0 05 to 1 00 A secondary 1A Vnps Pickup 7 00 to 110 00 V secondary Pickup Delay 0 03 to 99 99 seconds Auxiliary Enable Disable Inps Pickup 0 25 to 5 00 A secondary 5A 0 05 to 1 00 A secondary 1A Vnps Pickup 7 00 to 110 00 V secondary Pickup Delay 0 03 to 99 99 seconds The relay has 4 frequency devices available Each frequency element can be set to operate either at a fixed level of und
443. ut timer TD reset Protection functions that can initiate a single phase trip and reclose are defined by the user in the output matrix setting screen The user has full control to dic tate which protection functions should initiate the recloser logic Time delayed trips for instance may be considered backup functions where recloser initiation is undesired In this case these types of operations can be set to block any at tempted reclosures in any of the chosen reclosure schemes These protection functions can also be set to initiate transient fault or dynamic swing recordings and breaker failure initiations on the output matrix as well During the single pole open condition while in the single pole tripping mode unbalanced line load current will create negative and zero sequence line quan tities In order to override these unbalances provisions have been made in the relay logic to allow the user to apply modified protective relay settings to the line protections that will be automatically applied while the line is in a phase open condition These settings can be determined through load flow and fault study cases for the protected line Once the line phase recloses the protective settings that have been modified will return to their original settings In this way protection security can be maintained while the line goes through a single phase trip and reclose operation The drawing for the single phase reclosing logic is shown on the L PRO 4000
444. ux LMDA Enable Disable L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 79 Recloser D02706R02 50 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 10 25 27 59 Sync Check Settings Enable Dead Main Dead Aux DMDA Enable Disable The relay provides single phase tripping and reclosing and 3 phase tripping and reclosing on the 4000 hardware platform The schemes available are user programmable and consist of the following user setting options 3 Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme e Phase 3 Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Please note that the user can select only one scheme at a time although the user can change the scheme selected by using the setting groups within the setting software 3 Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme This scheme allows the relay to 3 phase trip always even if the fault is single phase in nature and reclose the 3 phases after a period of time Up to 4 shots of reclosing is possible depending upon the user recloser settings The recloser logic control is capable of reclosing a single line breaker or two ring bus line breakers in a variety of sequences The breaker reclosing sequence refers to the breakers as lead and follower breakers The first breaker selected to reclose is called the lead breaker and the second breaker that is reclosed is called the fol lower The reclosing can be done with or without synch check supervision The output matrix is used to determine the inputs and the outputs to the 3 phas
445. uy uano OW s s uauno aul Oy xNy S UALIND As duly OV ule OEN z o soo e o w e oe dui Se s emo zz I o Z Z Mm W Q m Q U T a o u og e Zj z M1 NR spe 0D ON ONON ONON ONON Ndo lbadeacesescssacaasl Iie L l L 6 speg N ON N ON yndino a a a e iw ow oiy IOO RISIOILGIOLGCOLCOLGI JOLEA TG Lb OL GL 07 YM 6b Y sinduy 9 H G E syndul dno ON ON ON A osz szi ev A osz szi ey 1eU13 x3 AN OSZ szt ev A OSZ szt ey A OSZ sZt 8Y feweyx Sor X XLBSVEQOO XXL ISVE000 wepo i ei aw oi w so odo olea OAO AAG z S000 S000 AN BE SAN NNN NA AEE ED QO ii DLLO DAA G 2 g IN L ON ODN GE PE ZINE andr ae et cai as me ual A osz sz av A osz szi 8 A osz szi av A osz szi ar A osz Szi 8 A osz szi 87 A osz szi av A osz set ev BUIBPA H H
446. ve Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 35 Virtual Input 22 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 36 Virtual Input 23 Y Y Y y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 37 Virtual Input 24 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 38 Virtual Input 25 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 39 Virtual Input 26 Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 40 Virtual Input 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 41 Virtual Input 28 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 42 Virtual Input 29 Y Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 43 Virtual Input 30 Y Y Y zg Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 44 Get Next Fault Y Y Y Y Y nactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed Event atis 45 Output Contact 15 nactive Active None None Appendix F 22 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Supported Control Operations Default Class Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none c 2 S g o Q fo D x 2 S Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description z i 3 2 value is 0 value is 1 gl flia 2
447. xed at ms Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from i ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 5 Event Buffer Overflow Discard the oldest event Behaviour Discard the newest event Other explain 1 6 6 Event Buffer Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32 size Organization 200 Separate buffer for the Object Group 111 size 100 Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events size 100 1 6 7 Sends Multi Fragment Yes Responses No 1 6 8 DNP Command Assign Class Not supported D02706R02 50 L PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 9 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 7 Outstation Unsolicited Capabilities Current Value If configurable Response Support P list methods 1 7 1 Supports Unsolicited Not Supported NA Reporting Configurable selectable from On and Off Appendix F 10 L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 8 Outstation Performance Capabilities Current Value i conigurabie list methods 1 8 1 Maximum Time Base NA not synchro Drift milliseconds per nized by DNP minute 1 8 2 When does outstation Never NA set IIN1 4 Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza tion request received Periodically range ___to____ seconds Periodically selectable from ___ _ seconds Range __to__ seconds after last time sync Selectable from___ __ __ seconds after last time sync When time error may have drifted by
448. z 49 501 to 49 499 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 1 Low 81 2 High Contact 8 Closed 5 Turn voltage source off 81 Rate of Change df dt Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering gt Protection Monitor 81 3 Trip Contact 9 2 Apply single phase nominal voltage to the relay terminals Ph A 330 333 66 4 V 60 Hz 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay 81 3 Low 81 4 Low 3 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 0 99 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 Low Contact 9 Open 4 Restore nominal frequency 5 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 1 01 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 High 81 4 Low Contact 9 Closed 6 Restore nominal frequency 7 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 0 99 Hz s of a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 Low Contact 9 Open 8 Restore nominal frequency 9 Ramp the frequency at a rate of 1 01 Hz s for a duration of 2 seconds Observe 81 3 Low 81 4 High Contact 9 Closed L PRO 4000 User Manual D02706R02 50 D02706R02 50 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 81 Timing Test Procedure 1 Monitor Timer Stop on Output Contact 8 81 1 2 Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66 4 V 60 Hz to 60 6 Hz transition Expect time delay of 500 ms approximately 1 5 cycle detection time 3 Apply the frequency shift Confirm the expected time delay Target 81 1 4 Move Timer Stop to Output Conta

L-PRO 4000 Manual - ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents